JP7345852B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventional gaming machines determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on determination information obtained based on the establishment of starting conditions, and execute variable effects according to the result of the determination. is common.

In such gaming machines, the interest of the game is increased by performing various performances in the variable performance (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2019-033816A

However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem that there is room for improvement in the variable performance and the game is not very interesting.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the present invention, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to players, movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 73, The special game is executed based on the movable member 74, etc.), the operation means (performance button 17, production lever 24) that can be operated by the player, and the establishment of the first starting condition (the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening). A first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game, and a first determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second starting condition (a game ball enters the second starting hole). a second determining means (main control board 110) for determining, and a state control means (for controlling the normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state). main control board 110), a performance control means (performance control a board 130), and the effect control means controls, during execution of the first variable effect, a specific effect involving the movement of the movable member (a look-ahead movement effect, a pseudo continuous effect, an extended effect, etc.) and the operation. Vibration performance that vibrates the means (vibration performance during dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance, when the symbols are aligned, when the c symbols are aligned, etc.) , it is possible to execute a reach effect that makes the player expect to execute the special game, and during execution of the reach effect, it is possible to execute a winning effect (decision effect) that suggests whether or not the special game will be executed. , the vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (during a dialogue preview performance, during a pseudo continuous performance, during a development performance, during a cut-in performance, during a final performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period. etc.) and a second vibration performance ( pre-reading vibration performance) that is executed without the operation validity period, and is more effective than when the first variable performance is executed during the specific gaming state. , when the first variable performance is executed during the normal gaming state, the specific performance is more likely to be executed, and the operation validity period related to the first vibration performance is when the win/loss performance is executed. The first vibration performance is executed when notifying that the special game will be executed with the movement of the movable member in the win/loss performance, and the second vibration performance is , the special game may be executed without movement of the movable member, depending on the result of a preliminary determination that determines whether or not to execute the special game before the first determination means. The winning effect is executed at a later timing than the second vibration effect than the vibration period in the second vibration effect, which is executed when suggesting that the winning effect is executed at a timing before the winning effect. It is characterized in that it can be executed so that the vibration period in the accompanying first vibration performance is longer.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a diagram showing an example of a front view of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing a state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame. FIG. 3 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 2; It is a figure showing the main board case of this embodiment when the main control board is housed. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case including the pedestal. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the main board case. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the structure of a main control board. It is a front view of the main board case when the main control board is housed. It is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a preliminary determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in a production control part. It is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the production control section. It is a diagram showing customer waiting performance processing in the performance control section. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration standby time determination table. It is a figure which shows the prefetch type|system|group performance process in a performance control part. It is a figure showing icon change production decision processing in a production control part. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a change scenario determination table. It is a figure showing icon change production execution processing in a production control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern determination table for pending icons. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a one-step change pattern determination table for the icon, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the two-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows the continuous preview performance determination process in a performance control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous notice type determination table for performance modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous notice type determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous preview performance scenario determination table for performance modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous preview performance scenario determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states). It is a figure which shows the continuous notice performance execution process in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows lamp change production execution processing in a production control part. It is a figure showing the fluctuating performance pattern judgment processing in a performance control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C (normal gaming state). It is a diagram showing an example of a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states). It is a figure showing timer performance decision processing in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an event timer frequency|count determination table. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a suggestion event determination table for a one-time timer. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a first suggestion event determination table for a two-timer, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a second suggestion event determination table for a two-timer. It is a figure which shows an example of an update pattern determination table. It is a diagram showing jackpot preview performance determination processing in the performance control section. It is a diagram showing an example of a ready-to-reach advance notice determination table for production modes A to C (normal gaming state). It is a diagram showing an example of a ready-to-reach advance notice determination table for production modes D to G (specific game states). It is a figure which shows an example of a dialogue notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a step-up notice pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of an advanced production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a roulette advance notice determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop option determination table of a roulette notice. It is a diagram showing an example of a cut-in performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C (normal gaming state). It is a diagram showing an example of a cut-in performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states). It is a diagram showing an example of a fixed performance pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a re-lottery performance pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a fixed performance pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the overall control unit. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where the operation unit is operated while waiting for a customer. It is a timing chart in which a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance in which a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. It is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the production example in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a player changes a performance element during the 1st variable performance in a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a player changes a performance element during the 2nd variable performance in a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a look-ahead motion performance and a step-up notice performance are performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance when a look-ahead motion performance and a step-up notice performance are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a pre-reading vibration performance and a dialogue preview performance are performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance when a pre-reading vibration performance and a dialogue preview performance are executed. It is a timing chart when a timer effect is executed during a variable effect. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which a timer performance is executed during a variable performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a roulette preview and a pseudo continuous performance are executed before the reach performance. It is a figure showing an example of a performance in a case where a pseudo continuous performance is executed after a ready-to-win performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a development performance is executed and an SP ready-to-reach performance is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when the development performance is performed and the SPSP reach performance is performed. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a cut-in performance is executed during the SP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance in the case where a cut-in performance is executed during the SP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a figure showing example 1 of a performance in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing a continuation of performance example 1 in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a figure showing example 2 of a performance in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing a continuation of performance example 2 in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a special SP ready-to-win performance is executed in performance mode A (normal gaming state) and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a special SP reach performance is executed in performance mode G (specific gaming state) and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a variable mission performance is executed during a jackpot. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change performance and lamp change performance. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance when restarting after power supply to a gaming machine is stopped during execution of the said icon change performance and lamp change performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of a look-ahead effect performance, a pending icon change performance, and a lamp change performance. It is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the prefetch effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the gaming machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the fixed effect pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIG. 1. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a on which game balls flow down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front and rear directions, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ) is fixed via.

The game board mounting frame 3 has a mounting part (not shown) for mounting the game board 5 from the front, and is removable from the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism part 6 at one end in the horizontal direction. and is rotatably supported using the first hinge mechanism section 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices installed on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It becomes possible to carry out maintenance, etc.

The glass frame 4 is removably connected to the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism part 7 at one end in the horizontal direction so as to cover the front of the mounting part of the game board mounting frame 3, It is rotatably supported using the second hinge mechanism section 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-back direction is formed in the approximate center of the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed to close the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the mounting portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be viewed through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there is an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and game balls etc. put out from a payout device 100 described later. an upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls; a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and have flowed into the overflow ball channel described later; and a game ball firing operation. A firing operation device 13 is provided for performing the following steps.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations on the upper part of the glass frame 4 with an interval between them, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to perform sound (music, voice) production. It has become. Further, a plurality of frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the direction and color of light emitted from each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to turn on/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a dispensing abnormality, which will be described later, occurs.

In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the game ball storage section 11a is sloped downward toward the firing operation device 13 (rightward), and a ball feeding solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. . When the game balls stored in the storage part 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, in the center front side of the upper plate 11, there are a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for determining and selecting various productions to be described later. They are arranged side by side on the left and right.

The performance button device 16 includes a performance button 17 (not shown) that can perform a decision operation etc. (operation input), a performance button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 9) that detects an operation on the performance button 17, and a performance button A button driving device 17b (see FIG. 9) for driving the gaming machine 17 is provided, and the player can input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The production button 17 performs production light emission by lighting the production button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white, red, rainbow color). It is now possible. In addition, it is possible to move in the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located below and the production position located above by the driving force of the button drive motor that is a part of the button drive device 17b. The button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the button is at the origin position. Furthermore, it is possible to perform a production operation by vibrating in a predetermined vibration mode using the driving force of a button vibration motor that is a part of the button drive device 17b, so that production can be performed even when the button vibration motor is vibrating. Button 17 can be operated.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (not shown) that can perform operations such as selection operations, and a cross key detection switch 19a (not shown) connected to the cross key 19 to detect operations on the cross key 19. (see FIG. 9) is provided, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

Further, on the right side of the upper tray 11, there is provided a rental operation section 20 that can perform operations for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance. When the lending button of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the remaining amount stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 is subtracted, and the game balls are lent out. When the return button of the operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

An overflow ball channel (not shown) is formed between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12 for receiving game balls that cannot fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 9) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls. While this is being detected, the payout of game balls by the payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The firing operation device 13 includes a base body 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base body 14, and a touch sensor that detects when the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 9), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 9) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a plurality of firing volumes 15b (see FIG. 9) for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A handle LED (frame lighting device 10) is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is activated and game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting part 25 for mounting the game board 5, a firing device 26 for firing a game ball toward the gaming area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and a glass frame. A locking mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with a front opening at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices installed on the back side of the game board 5 can be installed at the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Coming.

The firing device 26 includes a firing member 28 for firing a game ball, a firing solenoid 28b (see FIG. 9) for driving the firing member 28, and a solenoid 28b (see FIG. 9) that extends upward from the firing member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board. An inclined firing rail 29 and a stopper 30 for stopping the game ball A at a firing position which is the inclined lower end of the firing rail 29 are provided. When the game ball sent out by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot out toward the game area 5a by the operation of the shooting member 28.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member that guides the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 are provided. A firing ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 for guiding the game ball fired by the firing device 26 to the upstream part of the gaming area 5a. Furthermore, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the gaming area 5a to guide the game balls that have flown down to the outside of the gaming area (to the collecting section of the gaming board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the gaming area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40, called a so-called center case, that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior is provided, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, a warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce the game balls flowing down the game area 5a into the decorative frame 40, and a warp device 41 is provided at the lower part of the decorative frame 40 to A stage section 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the interior and making them flow down below the decorative frame 40.

At the bottom of the gaming area 5a, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always be entered are provided at intervals, and these general winning holes 43 When a game ball that has won a prize (entered a ball) is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 9), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are ejected from the payout device 100 (not shown) as prize balls. It is dispensed onto plate 11.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, there are provided normal game gates 44 (normal game starting area) through which the game balls can pass, and the game balls that have passed through the general game gates 44 When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 9), a normal symbol winning lottery (auxiliary game determination) is performed. Note that the winning lottery for normal symbols will be described later.

At the lower part of the gaming area 5a and directly below the stage part 42, a first starting opening 45 (special figure starting area) is provided in which a game ball can always enter a prize (ball), and this first starting opening 45 When a game ball that has won a prize (entered a ball) is detected by the first starting port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 9), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are transferred from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. It is about to be paid out. In addition to paying out prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, a game ball is placed in a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a normal symbol winning lottery). A variable starting section 46 is provided which is converted into an open state (special mode) in which winning (ball hitting) is possible or easy.

The variable starting section 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) through which a game ball can enter a prize (ball entering), and a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) that allows a game ball to enter a prize (entering ball) into the second starting port 47. A starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 9), a movable member 48 that converts (variably) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid that opens and closes the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 9). When the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the winning of the game ball ( ball entry) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are delivered from the payout device 100 to the top tray as prize balls. It is set to be paid out on the 11th. In addition to paying out prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

A prize opening lamp NR (not shown) is provided between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46 to illuminate the area around the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46 in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect by emitting light from a panel illumination device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guiding member 37 and downstream of the right-hand general figure gate 44, there is a closed state in which it is impossible to win a game ball (ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning the jackpot determination of the special symbol). A variable winning section 49 is provided which is converted from the basic mode to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won.

The variable winning part 49 includes a big winning hole 50 in which a game ball can be won (balls entered), and a big winning hole detection switch 50a (Fig. 9), an opening/closing member 51 for converting (variable) the big winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening and closing the opening/closing member 51. When the grand prize opening 50 is in a closed state, it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball, and when the grand prize opening 50 is in an open state, winning a game ball (entering a ball) is difficult. ) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the big winning hole 50 is detected by the big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are transferred from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. paid out.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are a general winning opening 43, a first starting opening 45, a second starting opening 47, and a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, An out ball flow path is provided that receives the game balls detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a and the big winning port detection switch 50a, and the game balls that have flowed into the out port 39, collects them, and allows them to flow down. An out-ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream part of the ball flow path. The game balls flowing down this out ball channel and detected by the out ball detection switch 52a are discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment) from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1.

Outside the gaming area 5a, there are a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol reservation display 63, a second special symbol reservation display 64, as well as. A normal symbol holding display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 9) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) to be described later is executed, and a round number display 66 (see FIG. 9) during a jackpot game (special game) or a time-saving game state. A right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 9) that prompts you to fire the game ball toward the right side of the gaming area 5a, and a status confirmation display that indicates that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. A main information display device 59 consisting of a device 68 (see FIG. 9) is provided.

Further, a winning probability display sticker is attached near the main information display device 59 (not shown). On this winning probability display sticker, the jackpot winning probability (1/285 to 1/300) and set value (4 to 1) of the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment are printed. The position where this winning probability display sticker is pasted is just one example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, but may be on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, which is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display device 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, which is performed on the condition that the game ball enters the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol, which is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the prize gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot determination of the first special symbol means that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, a random number value for jackpot determination, etc. (first special symbol determination information) is acquired, and the acquired jackpot determination This corresponds to comparing the random number value and the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot". In addition, when the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60, and after a predetermined period of time, a stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. be exposed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

Jackpot determination of the second special symbol means that when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, a random number value etc. for jackpot determination (second special symbol determination information) is acquired, and the acquired jackpot determination This corresponds to comparing the random number value and the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot". In addition, when the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 61, and after a predetermined period of time, a stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. be exposed. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and in the variable display of each special symbol, the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order. do. When the special symbols are to be stopped and displayed, the LEDs are lit in a manner that indicates the result of each jackpot determination (jackpot mode, loss mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "jackpot" means executing a jackpot game (special game) in the jackpot determination (special game determination) of the first special symbol or the jackpot determination (special game determination) of the second special symbol. refers to the state in which one has acquired the right to do something. The term "jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the jackpot 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 or 15 times).

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, even before the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time are reached, a predetermined number of game balls can be opened in the big winning opening 50. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins (balls entered), one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous for the player in which the player can easily win the prize ball. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to generate any of a plurality of types of jackpot games with different degrees of advantage to the player, which will be described in detail later.

The normal symbol winning lottery is to acquire a random number value for determining a hit when a game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44, and compare the obtained random number value for determining a hit with the winning determination value to determine whether it is a "win". This corresponds to determining whether or not. In addition, when a winning lottery of a normal symbol is performed, a variable display of the normal symbol is performed on the normal symbol display 62, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a stop display of the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order in the variable display of the normal symbols. When the normal symbols are to be displayed in a stopped state, the LED lights up in a manner that indicates the result of the winning lottery (a winning manner or a losing manner).

In addition, in this embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "winning game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 may be opened even before the maximum number of openings or the maximum opening time is reached. The winning game (auxiliary game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 balls) win a prize (balls entered). In other words, the "winning game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition for the variable display is likely to be satisfied). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

The first special symbol holding display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is used to determine the jackpot of the first special symbol that is stored when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 (balls entered). This is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memories) for performing a variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. Note that although up to four first reservation memories are stored, the number may be fewer or more than four.

The second special symbol holding display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is used to determine the jackpot of the second special symbol that is stored when the game ball enters the second starting port 47 (balls entered). This is for displaying the number of rights (second pending memory) for performing the variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second pending memories. In addition, although up to four second reservation memories are stored, it may be fewer or more than four.

The normal symbol holding display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and has the right to perform a normal symbol winning lottery (fluctuating display of normal symbols) that is stored when a game ball enters (passes) the common symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (Fuzuzu pending memory), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of Fuzuzuzu pending memory. In addition, although up to four ordinary figures are stored in the storage, the number may be smaller or larger than four.

In addition, the 1st special symbol display 60 and/or the 2nd special symbol display 61 can also be comprised with 7 segment LED. For example, if you win a special symbol jackpot, "7" will be displayed as a stop sign, and if you lose, a "-" will be displayed as a stop sign, and while the variable display is in progress, the light will turn off and "-" will be displayed as a stop sign. ” should be repeated. In addition, before the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the stop result of the previous fluctuation display is displayed by lighting the LED, so when the fluctuation display starts, the fluctuation display can be started by turning off the LED. It becomes easier to understand what has started.

The round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs. starts lighting up, continues lighting the LED during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if it is a jackpot game with two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left will light up, and if it is a jackpot game with sixteen rounds, all the LEDs will light up.

The right-hand hitting indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and is a right-hand hitting indicator 67 that prompts you to fire the game ball toward the right side gaming area (so-called right-hand hitting) during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state. This is for displaying a winning display, and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED, and is for indicating that the setting change mode, which will be described later, or the setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. When the mode shifts to , the LED starts lighting up, and when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. In this way, the status confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine. It is possible to easily check whether the settings are set or not.

Note that the installation position of the status confirmation display 68 is just an example, and is not limited to the installation position of this embodiment, and may be any position in the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display is displayed in the same manner (lit display) regardless of whether it is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, but the display is made so that it is possible to recognize which mode it is set to. You may do so. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be blinking. When the setting change mode is set, either the status confirmation display 68 or the second game information display device 69 lights up, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status is displayed. Only the confirmation display 68 may be displayed by lighting.

Further, in this embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. good. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of either the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or one LED of the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on. All LEDs may be turned on.

At the lower right inside of the gaming area 5a, there are a sub-first fluctuation display 81, a sub-second fluctuation display 82, a sub-first reservation display 83, a sub-second reservation display 84, and a sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85. A sub-information display device 80 is provided, which includes a sub-normal figure reservation display 86, and a sub-right-hitting display 87 that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side area of the gaming area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). Note that the sub-information display device 80 is not provided with a display indicating that the sub-information display device 80 is set to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, such as the status confirmation display 68 described above.

The sub-first fluctuation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 is for displaying the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. (notification), and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the corresponding special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (the first lamp symbol LZ or the second lamp symbol LZ is displayed in a variable manner), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is a jackpot. The result of the judgment (lights up if it's a jackpot, turns off if it's a loss) is displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, in the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82, so that it can be grasped only whether or not the special symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed, it blinks and stops while the special symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed. It may be configured to turn on or off when displayed.

The sub-first reservation display 83 is for displaying the number of first reservation memories (number of reservations), and the sub-second reservation display 84 displays the number of second reservation memories (number of reservations). It is made up of two LEDs on the left and right. Then, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and when the number of reservations is "2", the LED on the right turns off. The left and right LEDs light up, and when the number of reservations is "3", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reservations is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

The sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the LED blinks at predetermined intervals (variable display). Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, an aspect indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights on in the case of a win, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in order to be able to grasp only whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the sub-normal symbol fluctuation display 85 is configured to blink while the normal symbol is in the fluctuating display, and to turn on or off when the normal symbol is displayed in a stopped state. It's okay.

The sub-universal drawing reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of ordinary drawings (reservation number), and is constituted by two LEDs arranged on the left and right. Then, when the number of reserved general drawings is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, and when the number of reserved general drawings is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and the number of reserved general drawings is ``1''. When the number of reservations is "2", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reserved ordinary cards is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) made of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the production space 40a, and a , a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is provided, which is a liquid crystal display whose display area is smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A first movable member 73 is provided that resembles the same, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of the performance space 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays various effects according to the progress of the game. Performance displays include customer waiting demonstration performances that are executed during a customer waiting state (standby state where the game is not in progress) where special symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner, and production symbols that are executed while special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. There is a fluctuating effect accompanied by a fluctuating display of 70a.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three columns of variable display areas: a left area, a center area, and a right area. By scrolling the effect pattern 70a vertically (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, a special symbol display area is formed in the lower right corner of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area is changed to a special symbol variable display. By correspondingly scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", and the special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61. In response to (synchronized with) the fluctuating display of the symbols, the fluctuating display of the performance symbols 70a is performed. That is, in response to the start of the fluctuating display of the special symbol, the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and before the fluctuating display of the special symbol stops, the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (swinging display), and the special symbol is fluctuating. In response to the stop display of the display, the fluctuating display of the effect pattern 70a is stopped (still display). Note that, in addition to the symbols indicating numbers, symbols indicating alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided as the effect symbols 70a.

Note that the "temporary stop display" is a display in which the performance symbols 70a are slightly swayed or deformed slightly to make it appear to the player that the performance symbols 70a are stopped (completely stopped). (not done).

In the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a is stopped for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (loss mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of jackpot determination. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same performance symbols such as "777" or the combination of regular performance symbols such as "357", and the loss mode is any other format. be. Note that the manner in which the performance symbols 70a are variably displayed is not limited to this, and may be one that scrolls in the left-right direction, or one that rotates (rotates) on the spot.

In addition, during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images and movies such as a ready-to-reach effect, a background image, a character, etc., which will be described later, are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the like depending on the result of the jackpot determination. By being displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the player's expectations for the jackpot (special game) to be executed (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot winning expectation level") are increased. It has become.

In addition, at the bottom of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), there is a first special figure reserve, which is the number of the current first reserve memory in the normal gaming state (basically excluding the specific gaming state). A first pending icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first pending icons corresponding to the number (U1), and a current number of second pending icons in a specific gaming state (basically excluding the normal gaming state). A second pending icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second pending icons corresponding to the second special symbol pending number (U2), and a special symbol (production pattern) that is being executed in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. An icon display area 70C for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of 70a) is formed.

The first pending icon display area 70B is divided into a first display area 70B1, a second display area 70B2, a third display area 70B3, and a fourth display area 70B4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70B1 to 70B4 display the number of first reservation icons corresponding to the number of first reserved special symbols (U1).

Specifically, the first display section 70B1 displays a first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is first performed, and the second display section 70B2 displays the first pending icon H11. The first pending icon H12 indicating the first pending memory is displayed on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed third, and the third display section 70B3 displays the variable display of the first special symbol. A first pending icon H13 indicating the first pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display section 70B4 displays a first pending icon H14 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth. and each time the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal gaming state, the first pending icon displayed on each display section is shifted (decreased) toward the icon display area 70C. It has become.

In the first reservation icon display area 70B configured in this way, since the first reservation icon is displayed in the normal gaming state, the first reservation icon is The number also increases or decreases (the first reserved icon is displayed as an increase or is shifted (displayed as a decrease)), but in a specific game state, the first reserved icon is not displayed, so the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases or decreases. The number of first pending icons does not increase or decrease (the first pending icons are not displayed to increase or shift (display to decrease)).

The second pending icon display area 70D is divided into a first display area 70D1, a second display area 70D2, a third display area 70D3, and a fourth display area 70D4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display second reservation icons in a number corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2). In other words, the number of second reserved icons also increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the number of second reserved special symbols (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is first performed, and the second display unit 70D2 displays the second hold icon H21. A second pending icon H22 indicating a second pending memory is displayed in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third, and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed in the third display section 70D3. A second pending icon H23 indicating a second pending memory is displayed, and a second pending icon H24 indicating a second pending memory in which variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display section 70D4. and each time the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a specific gaming state, the second pending icon displayed on each display section is shifted (displayed decreasingly) toward the icon display area 70C. It has become.

In the second reservation icon display area 70D configured in this way, since the second reservation icon is displayed in a specific gaming state, the second reservation icon is The number also increases or decreases (the second pending icon is displayed as an increase or a shift display (decreasing display)), but since the second pending icon is not displayed in the normal gaming state, the number of second reserved special symbols (U2) increases or decreases. Correspondingly, the number of second pending icons does not increase or decrease (the number of second pending icons is not increased or shifted (decreased)).

In addition, if the second special figure reservation number (U2) is "1" or more when the specific game state (here, the time-saving game state) ends and becomes the normal game state, this second special figure reservation number ( Since the second reservation icon is exceptionally displayed in the second reservation icon display area 70D until the number U2) becomes "0," the second reservation icon is The number of pending icons also increases or decreases (the number of second pending icons is increased or shifted (decreased)), but in the normal gaming state, without exception, the second pending icon is not displayed (the second pending icon is displayed). Shift display of the hold icon may not be performed.

The icon display area 70C is displayed in the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B in response to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a) in the normal gaming state (excluding the specific gaming state). The first hold icon in the second hold icon display area 70D corresponds to the start of the variable display of the displayed first hold icon or the second special symbol (effect pattern 70a) in a specific game state (excluding the normal game state). As the second pending icon displayed on the display section 70D1 moves (shifts), the icon TI is displayed, and the icon TI disappears (erased) when the variable display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a) ends. do. Note that the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

In addition, in this embodiment, the "first reserved number of special symbols" may be referred to as the "first reserved number" and the "second reserved number of special symbols" may be referred to as the "second reserved number". Furthermore, the "first pending icon," the "second pending icon," and the "approximate icon" may be collectively referred to as "icon."

In addition, on the left side of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a first pending number indicating the current number of first reserved special symbols (U1) is displayed in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. 1st special figure reservation number display area 70E for displaying the second special figure reservation number display area 70E for displaying the second reservation number indicating the current number of second special figure reservation number (U2) in the normal game state and the specific game state. A number display area 70F is formed.

Therefore, regarding the reservation display indicating the number of reserved first special symbols, in the normal gaming state, the reservation display is performed in the first reservation icon display area 70B and the first reservation number display area 70E of special symbols, and in the specific gaming state, the number of reserved special symbols is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. This will be performed in the display area 70E. In addition, regarding the reservation display indicating the number of second reserved special symbols, in the normal gaming state, it is performed in the second reserved number display area 70F of special symbols, and in the specific gaming state, it is displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D and the second number of reserved special symbols. This will be performed in the display area 70F.

The first movable member 73 is capable of emitting dramatic light by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission mode. The drive force of the first movable member drive motor, which is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 9), moves the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located above and the presentation position located below. By moving to , it is possible to perform a performance operation, and the first position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

The second movable member 74 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission mode. The drive force of the second movable member drive motor, which is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 9), moves between the standby position (origin position) located at the upper right and the production position located at the lower left. It is possible to perform a performance operation by moving diagonally up and down, and a second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

Since the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 partially overlap each other's production positions, basically the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operate at the same time. By not doing so, they avoid conflict with each other.

Note that if the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, when one movable member moves to the production position and returns to a position that does not overlap with the production position of the other movable member, The other movable member may be moved to the presentation position.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there is a payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball rental), and game balls supplied from island equipment, etc. A game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores balls and supplies them to the payout device 100, a main control device 110A (not shown) that includes a main control board 110 that centrally controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110. A payout control device 120A (not shown) incorporating a payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 100 according to a payout control command from the main control board 110, and a production that controls the production according to production control commands from the main control board 110. A production control device 130A (not shown) that includes a control board 130, a power supply device 160A (not shown) that includes a power supply board 160 that supplies power voltage to various control devices, and game information (not shown) external to the gaming machine. A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 9) for outputting a game signal (game signal) is provided.

Further, an opening/closing door-type cover member is provided that opens and closes the left and right sides in the left-right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire production control device 130A from the rear. The production control device 130A includes the volume of production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member, display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and various lighting devices. A changeover switch 22 (see FIG. 9) is provided for switching adjustment modes related to adjustment of the amount of light of the devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76).

On the front side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m to clear the memory contents or to indicate the level of advantage of the game. an RWM clear switch 111a that inputs a signal for updating the set value (different advantages); a signal for moving the set value to a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed by operation using the setting key; A setting key switch 112a for inputting information, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that allow the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped, and the like are installed.

The information display 113 is for displaying setting values and performance information (normal base values to be described later), and is composed of four 7-segment displays having decimal points DP arranged side by side. There is. An identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type) is configured on two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits, and two 7-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits. A numerical value segment is configured to display numerical information indicating numerical values of setting values and performance information.

(Configuration of the back of the game board)
Next, the structure of the back side of the game board will be explained using FIGS. 2 and 3.
FIG. 2 is a rear view showing a state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame, and FIG. 3 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 2.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a base frame 170 (liquid crystal base frame) having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction is assembled on the back surface (rear surface) of the game board 5. An image display unit (first image display device 70 and image display cover 185) 180 is assembled on the back side (rear side) of the image display unit 180 so as to close the opening. A lamp relay board 186 is assembled on the back (rear surface) of the image display cover 185 (liquid crystal cover), and a main controller 110A (main control board) is attached to the lower back of the image display cover 185 below the lamp relay board 186. The main board case 200 containing the main board 110 is attached.

The base frame 170 (liquid crystal base) is a substantially rectangular annular body having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction, and its annular front surface 171 is attached to and fixed to the back surface of the game board 5. The back side of the base frame 170 has a space for arranging various circuit boards and parts.
An effect control board 130 is arranged on the back side of an image display unit 180 (liquid crystal unit) fixed to the back side of the base frame 170. The image display unit 180 can be slid freely from the sides (left and right), up and down, or diagonally of the base frame into a gap (storage space) for storing the image display unit provided in front of the production control board. It is configured so that it can be installed on the
Various circuit boards arranged on the back side of the base frame are covered by a lid member 190.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the main board case 200, at least the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a included in the main control board 110 are exposed.
Furthermore, the information display 113 included in the main control board 110 is visible through the transparent main board case 200.
The staff of the game parlor open the door of the game machine, visually check the information display 113 on the back of the game machine, and operate the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a to clear the RWM, change the settings, and check the settings. You can perform operations such as checking the performance information of the gaming machine.

The RWM clear switch 111a on the main control board 110 is not directly exposed, and the operation member 685 can be operated by the staff of the game parlor through an opening provided in the main board case 200 at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a. stands out.
When a staff member or the like depresses the operating member 685, the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed by the depressed operating member 685. This causes the RWM clear switch 111a to be operated.

The setting key switch 112a has a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 110, and a keyhole into which a key is inserted is provided in the end surface of the cylindrical member.
The end face of the setting key switch 112a provided with a keyhole is exposed through an opening provided in the main board case 200.
A staff member of the game parlor can operate the setting key switch 112a by inserting a key into the keyhole.

(Main board case)
Next, the configuration of the main board case 200 according to this embodiment will be described using FIGS. 4 to 6.
In addition, in this embodiment, the game board 5 side will be described as the front side with respect to the main board case 200, and the direction opposite to the game board 5 will be described as the rear side. Therefore, the left-right direction in the figure is the left-right direction when main board case 200 is viewed from the side opposite to game board 5.

4 is a diagram illustrating a main board case according to an example of the present embodiment, FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case 200 including a pedestal, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case 200. FIG.
The main board case 200 of this embodiment is assembled to the back of a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine via a pedestal 280, with the main control board 110 carrying electronic components accommodated therein.

The pedestal 280 is a connecting means for attaching the main board case 200 to the gaming machine side holding part (in this embodiment, the lamp relay board 186) provided on the back side of the gaming machine main body.
The main board case 200 that accommodates the main control board is assembled with the lower case piece 210 attached to the back of a game board such as a pachinko game machine via the pedestal 280, so the main board case 200 houses the main control board. Electronic components mounted on the internal main control board 110 can be visually recognized through the case piece 220.

The pedestal 280 is a component used to attach the main board case 200 to the rear side of the game board 5. As shown in FIG. 5, the pedestal 280 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape in which two sides along the left and right directions are longer than two sides along the up and down direction, and a pair of shaft portions 281 are provided near both left and right ends of the lower side. It has a plate shape in the center of the upper side in the left and right direction. The shaft portion 281 has an axial direction that coincides with the left-right direction.

The main board case 200 is provided with a pair of hook parts 249 that are engaged with each shaft part 281. A pair of hook portions 249 are provided on the lower side of upper case piece 220, which will be described later. The hook portion 249 is formed in a U-shape that is convex toward the front side.

When attaching the main board case 200 to the pedestal 280, the main board case 200 is arranged so that the hook portion 249 is convex toward the back side. Then, the hook portions 249 become engageable with the shaft portions 281, so the main board case 200 is brought closer to the pedestal 280, and each hook portion 249 is engaged with each shaft portion 281.

Then, when the hook portion 249 engages with the shaft portion 281, the free end side of the main board case 200 is rotated upward around the shaft portion 281, and the main board case 200 is stacked on the pedestal 280. At this time, the plate-shaped hook 282 provided on the upper side of the pedestal 280 is caught in the depression D provided on the upper side of the main board case 200. Therefore, the main board case 200 is fixed to the pedestal 280 by the engagement between the hook part 249 and the shaft part 281 and the engagement between the plate-like hook 282 and the main board case 200.

Thereafter, the protective cover 229 is attached to the main board case 200. The protective cover 229 covers a lower portion of the main board case 200 including the hook part 249. In this way, the main control device 110A is attached to the rear side of the game board 5.

The main board case 200 consists of two transparent resin case pieces (lower case piece) that house a single-sided mounting type main control board 110 (printed board) with electronic components arranged only on one side. 210, an upper case piece 220), a cutting member 230 for cutting a tamper-proof seal held between the edges of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, and a main body to which a tamper-proof seal 250, which will be described later, is adhered. A cap 240 is detachably attached to the sealing base portion 310 of the board case 200.

Main board case 200 encloses main control board 110 with a plurality of connectors 771 to 776 mounted on main control board 110 exposed. The main board case 200 is made of a light-transmitting member such as transparent plastic, for example.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 constitute a main board case body (sealing body 300).
A protective cover 229 is disposed at the lower part of the upper case piece 220 to cover a connecting portion between an internal connector and an external connector provided on the main control board 110 inside.
In this embodiment, the lower case piece 210 is fixed to the upper case piece 220 with the main control board 110 in between by a caulking member.

A caulking part 291 using a caulking member is arranged at a suitable location along the edge of the main board case 200, and a caulking member (locking member) is inserted into a caulking hole (sealing part) provided in the caulking part 291. ), the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are locked in a closed state. By removing (breaking) the caulking member driven (locked) into the caulking fastening hole, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 become openable, closable, and detachable.

In the caulking portion 291 of the main board case 200 of this embodiment, two caulking holes are provided (caulking holes 291A, 291B).
Each caulking fastening hole 291A, 291B is configured by a lower case side fastening hole 292 provided in the lower case piece 210 and an upper case side fastening hole 293 provided in the upper case piece 220 communicating with each other.

Note that only one caulking hole is used for one time of fastening the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220. After removing (breaking) the caulking member and releasing the connection (after opening the main board case 200), if you want to perform the connection again, drive the caulking member into the other remaining caulking hole. conduct. That is, the main board case of this embodiment can be opened up to two times.

The lower case piece 210 is combined with the upper case piece 220 to form an internal enclosing portion 581 for enclosing the main control board 110. The upper case piece 220 is provided on the rear side of the main board case 200, which is the main control unit 110m side. The lower case piece 210 is provided on the front side of the main board case 200, which is the opposite side to the main control unit 110m side.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 each include control board housing parts 211 and 221 that house the main control board 110, and sealing parts 212 and 222 that constitute a sealing base part 310, which will be described later. There is. The control board storage parts 211 and 221 are provided with plate parts 211a and 221a formed in a substantially rectangular shape, respectively, and protrude from the peripheral edges of these plate parts 211a and 221a, and are provided on one side of each of the plate parts 211a and 221a. It is formed in a shape having flange portions 211b and 221b surrounding the surface.

Further, on the left side of the plate portion 211a of the lower case piece 210, a cylindrical portion 565 is provided that extends toward the rear, which is the main control board 110 side. A hole 566 is formed in the cylindrical portion 565 and extends in the front-rear direction. A thread is formed inside the hole 566. In the main control board 110, a hole 567 is provided at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565.

Main control board 110 is fixed to lower case piece 210. More specifically, the hole 567 of the main control board 110 is arranged behind the cylindrical part 565 of the lower case piece 210. The shaft portion of a screw for fixing the main control board 110 is inserted into the hole 566 of the cylindrical portion 565 through the hole 567 from the rear side of the main control board 110. The thread formed in the hole 567 of the cylindrical portion 565 is combined with the thread provided on the shaft of the screw. As a result, the main control board 110 is sandwiched between the head of the screw and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565, and the main control board 110 is fixed to the lower case piece 210. That is, the main control board 110 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side.

A portion of the flange portion 211b of the control board storage portion 211 that protrudes from the plate portion 211a along two long sides of the plate portion 211a (hereinafter referred to as the “male portion”) is formed in an L-shape. Three hooking pieces 211c are formed respectively. On the other hand, a portion of the flange portion 221b of the control board storage portion 221 that protrudes from the plate portion 221a along two long sides of the plate portion 221a (hereinafter referred to as the “female portion”) has a double wall shape. An insertion groove portion 221c into which the male portion of the control board storage portion 211 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming a double wall. Furthermore, a hook piece 221d is formed in each insertion groove portion 221c.

When the lower case piece 210 to which the main control board 110 is screwed is combined with the upper case piece 220, the male part of the flange part 211b is inserted into the female part of the flange part 221b. Then, the control board storage sections 211 and 221 are slid relative to each other in the direction of arrow α in FIG. 6 along the left-right direction. Then, the hook piece 211c provided on the male part engages with the hook piece 221d, so the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are assembled together so that they will not come off unless they move in the opposite direction to the arrow α. It will be done.

When combined in this manner, the control board housing parts 211 and 221 form a box-shaped inner envelope part 581 that is shielded from the outside. Since the main control board 110 is housed in the inner packaging part 581, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the main control board 110, the main control section 110m, etc. are illegally replaced.

The main control board 110 is attached inside the control board storage part 221 before the control board storage parts 211 and 221 are combined. At this time, the IC and the like mounted on the main control board 110 are attached so as to face the plate section 221a of the control board storage section 221. Since the plate portion 221a is also made of transparent plastic, even if the main control board 110 is housed in the main board case 200, electronic components such as the main control unit 110m mounted on the main control board 110 can This is so that it can be confirmed from the outside via the plate portion 221a whether or not it has been illegally replaced. In this embodiment, when the main control device 110A including the main board case 200 is attached to the game board 5, the main control board 110A in the main board case 200 is mounted on the main control board 110 in the main board case 200 through the upper case piece 220 from the back side of the game machine 1. Electronic components can be visually recognized.

Sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided at the right end portions of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220. As shown in FIG. 34, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with a first screw stopper piece 91 and a second screw stopper piece 92 above the sealing parts 212 and 222. When the control board housing parts 211 and 221 are slid and combined, a sealing base part 310 is formed by the sealing parts 212 and 222 at the longitudinal end of a sealed body 300 in which these parts are combined. Then, when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing body 300 by covering the sealing base 310, the first screw piece 91 and the second screw piece 92 are attached to the longitudinal end of the sealing body 300. , the third screw stopper piece 393 of the cap 240 overlaps to form a screw stop part 390 for screw fastening.

The sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided to protrude rightward from the right end portions of the control board storage portions 211 and 221. The sealing parts 212 and 222 are formed to have the same height in the left-right direction and the same width in the up-down direction. In each of the sealing parts 212 and 222, elongated groove parts 212a and 222a are formed along the left-right direction. In the sealing part 222, two parallel grooves 222a are formed along the left-right direction, separated by a predetermined distance, and in the sealing part 212, one groove 212a is formed in the left-right direction. When the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined, the sealing parts 212 and 222 form a sealing base part 310 on the right side of the combined control board storage parts 211 and 221. In the sealing base part 310, the sealing parts 212 and 222 are arranged in parallel with a constant interval, and an insertion/extraction space is formed between the faces of the sealing parts 212 and 222 facing each other.

The tamper-evident seal 250 is used as a means to seal the main board case 200, and certifies that it is a genuine product issued by an organization with certification qualifications. The tamper-proof seal 250 is made of an easily cutable material such as paper with an adhesive surface provided on one side, and has a plurality of cuts in consideration of cuttability. As will be described later, the tamper-proof seal 250 has, for example, a hologram, a QR code (registered trademark) printed thereon, and the like. Further, the words "Do not tamper" are also printed on the tamper-proof sticker 250.
The cutting member 230 is formed in a shape having a base portion 230a, a pair of pinching portions 361, and a cutting portion 364. A base portion 230a, which is the basis of the cutting member 230, is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cutting portion 364 is formed on one of the two long sides of the base portion 230a. The cutting portion 364 is a portion where the tip of the base portion 230a is formed into a blade shape. The knob portions 361 are provided at both ends of the base portion 230a in the longitudinal direction, and are formed into a shape that is bent into a dogleg shape overall. The left end of the knob 361 is referred to as a free end 361a.

The cap 240 is formed in a size that can be placed over the sealing base part 310 to cover the entire sealing base part 310, and is formed to be detachable from the sealing base part 310. The cap 240 includes a bowl-shaped cap body 241 that covers the sealing base 310 and a third screw stopper 393 formed at one end of the cap body 241 in the longitudinal direction. A protrusion 382 is provided on the inner surface of the cap body 241 at a position where the free end 361a of the knob 361 of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/extraction space 310a is caught when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing base 310. It is provided. Furthermore, a groove portion 386 is formed on the inner surface of the cap body 241.

The cutting member 230 is inserted into the insertion/extraction space of the sealing base 310. Thereafter, a tamper-proof sticker 250 is attached. Further, when the cap 240 is placed over the sealing base portion 310, the groove portion 386 fits into a portion of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/extraction space 310a. Furthermore, the protrusion 382 engages with the free end 361a of the knob 361 of the cutting member 230.

When the cap 240 is placed over the sealing base 310, the third screw stopper 393 is a combination of the first screw stopper 91 of the lower case piece 210 and the second screw stopper 92 of the upper case piece 220. overlaps with each other to form a screw-fastening portion 390 for screw-fastening. When the caulking member 94 is driven into the screw fixing portion 390, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240 are fixed to each other.

When unsealing the main board case 200, the caulking member 94 is removed and the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base 310. The same applies when the seal on the main board case 200 is illegally broken. The cutting member 230 and the cap 240 are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base 310, the cutting member 230 is also removed from the sealing base 310 at the same time. Then, the tamper-proof seal 250 is irreparably damaged by the cut portion 364 and the like.

(Main control board)
Next, the configuration of the main control board 110 according to this embodiment will be described using FIG. 7.
The main control board 110 that controls the game includes a main control section 110m, an RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, an information display 113, and a plurality of electronic components 595 (IC, resistor, connector, etc.) different from the main control section 110m. capacitors, coils, etc.), a plurality of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, etc. are mounted.

The main control unit 110m stores memory contents used for controlling games. The main control unit 110m also stores memory contents that affect the outcome of the game.
The main control unit 110m is a one-chip microcomputer that integrates a main CPU 110a, a main ROM 110b, and a main RAM 110c, which will be described later.
The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right at the bottom of main control board 110. The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided at the bottom of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200.

Among the plurality of connectors 771 to 776, two connectors 774 and 775 are referred to as detection signal connectors 774 and 775. The detection signal connectors 774 and 775 include one of the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, and the big winning opening detection switch 50a, which detect that a game ball has won. Signals from at least some of them are input. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 include a first starting opening detection switch 45a that detects that a game ball has won, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, and a big winning opening detection switch. It is assumed that all the signals of the switch 50a are input. Detection signal connectors 774, 775 have a different color from other connectors 771, 772, 773, 776. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 have a fluorescent color, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773, and 776 have a color different from the fluorescent color.

The main control unit 110m includes a plate-shaped main body extending in the left-right direction, and a plurality of signal pins (first signal pins) extending downward from the lower end of the main body and electrically connected to the main control board 110. We are prepared. The signal pin (first signal pin) is mounted (soldered) on the main control board 110 so as to be visible through the main board case 200.
The plurality of electronic components 595 each include a signal pin (second signal pin) provided on each of the plurality of electronic components. The signal pin (second signal pin) is mounted (soldered) on the main control board 110 so as to be visible through the main board case 200.

The RWM clear switch 111a will be explained.
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the RWM clear switch 111a on the main control board 110 is not directly exposed. The upper case piece 220 of the board case 200 is provided with a recess 688, and an opening 687 is provided within the recess 688.
As can be seen from FIG. 5, the operating member 685 is provided at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a, and when a staff member or the like presses the operating member 685, the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed by the depressed operating member 685. be done. This causes the RWM clear switch 111a to be operated.
A cover member 686 is provided within the recess 688 . The cover member 686 is rotatably supported within the recess 688 between a first position in which the operating member 685 is closed and cannot be operated, and a second position in which the operating member 685 is opened and operable. has been done.
By moving the operating member 685 to the second position, the RWM clear switch 111a can be operated.
By doing so, it is only necessary to provide the board case 200 with an opening 687 large enough to allow the operation member 685 to be inserted therein. Furthermore, the operation member 685 cannot be operated unless the cover member 686 is opened. Therefore, unauthorized access to the inside of the board case 200 can be prevented.
The end of the RWM clear switch 111a may be exposed through the opening 687 so that it can be directly operated without being operated using the operating member 685.

The setting key switch 112a has a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 110, and a keyhole into which a key is inserted is provided in the end surface of the cylindrical member.
The end face of the setting key switch 112a provided with a keyhole is exposed through the opening 661 provided in the upper case piece 220 of the board case 200, but is slightly lower than the surface of the board case 200.
A staff member or the like can operate the setting key switch 112a by inserting a key into the keyhole.

(Identification display)
The identification display 520 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 5, the identification display 520 is attached to the main control board 110, the main control section 110m, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.
The identification display 520 is a display that includes information regarding the gaming machine 1. In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the main control board 110 is referred to as an identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the main control unit 110m is referred to as an identification display 522. The identification display 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is referred to as an identification display 523, the identification display 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is referred to as an identification display 524, and the identification display 520 provided on the cap 240 is referred to as an identification display 523. It is called display 525.

As shown in FIG. 5, the identification display 521 is displayed on the upper part of the back surface of the main control board 110 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. The identification display 522 is attached to the main control unit 110m by a stamp. The identification display 522 is an information identification section for displaying specific information.
Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to the main board case 200 are information identification parts for displaying specific information. The identification mark 524 is formed on the upper right side of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by marking with a mold used to manufacture the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 33).
The identification mark 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 240 by marking with a mold for manufacturing the cap 240. The display mode of the identification display 523 will be described later.

Identification indicia 521-525 are related to each other and include at least the same identification indicia 529. In this embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string "ABCD01", and the identification display 522 is a character string "ABCD02". The identification display 523 is a character string "ABCD03", and the identification display 524 is a character string "ABCD04". The identification display 525 is a character string "ABCD05". The same identification display 529 among the identification displays 521 to 525 is "ABCD". The identification display 529 is a display corresponding to, for example, a manufacturer name and a model name. In this embodiment, as an example, in "ABCD", "AB" represents the manufacturer name, and "CD" represents the model name.

In the identification displays 521 to 525, instead of displaying the manufacturer name as "AB" included in "ABCD", the manufacturer name itself may be displayed. Furthermore, instead of displaying the model name as "CD" included in "ABCD", the model name itself may be displayed. Further, the model of the gaming machine may be displayed in the identification displays 521 to 525.

(Seal member)
The seal member will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 8, a seal member 1560 and a seal member 1561 are attached to the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200.

The sealing member 1560 is attached to a position display section 561 provided at the lower left side of the upper case piece 220 in the left-right direction. is pasted on.
The sealing members 1560 and 1561 are both made of a light-transmitting material, and in this embodiment, as an example, they are transparent (made of a transparent material).
Seal members 1560 and 1561 are each placed across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 8). Note that, in FIG. 5, illustrations of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 located in front of the seal members 1560 and 1561 are omitted.

The seal member 1560 is a seal for managing the main board.
In this example, a seal member main body 1560A (base portion) of the seal member 1560 is provided with a watermark for preventing forgery. That is, the seal member 1560 (opener display seal) is a processed seal in which a watermark is applied to the seal member main body 1560A.
A "watermark" is a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle, and various types of watermarks can be applied, such as those using holograms and those that look different depending on the physical shape. .
However, the sealing member main body 1560A is transparent even though it has been subjected to a predetermined process (watermarking), and at least has high light transmittance to ensure a certain level of visibility.

The sealing member 1560 has a blank entry area 1570 (entry field), a code section 1572, and an information display section 1573 in a black frame with a heading such as "Main Board Management Number" on the sealing member main body 1560A. We are prepared.
The entry area 1570, the code area 1572, the information display area 1573, and the character displays associated with these areas, which will be described later, are non-transparent with low translucency because the transparent material of the sealing member main body 1560A is not exposed. Department.
The sealing member 1560 includes a plurality of non-transparent parts, and it is difficult to visually recognize the main control board 110 inside the main board case 200 through these non-transparent parts.
The code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the writing area 1570 as non-transparent portions are provided at a position on the seal member body 1560A that does not overlap with the main control portion 110m and the information display 113.

On the other hand, the transparent material of the seal member main body 1560A is exposed and the transparent material of the seal member main body 1560A is exposed, and the writing area 1570, the code section 1572, the information display section 1573, and the areas other than the character display attached to these areas, which will be described later, are translucent. The transparent portion 1574 has a high
The light transmitting portion 1574 is the above-mentioned viewing portion that allows the electronic component 595 on the main control board 110 inside the main board case 200 to be seen and confirmed through the transparent material.

In the main board case 200, the main control board 110 is visible through the seal member 1560 and the main board case 200. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control board 110. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control board 110 through the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not fraud is being committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Moreover, regardless of the presence or absence of a transparent part or a non-transparent part, the seal member 1560 is attached to a position where the seal member 1562 attached to the main control part 110m on the main control board 110 is visible from all angles. has been done.
Furthermore, regardless of the presence or absence of a transparent portion or a non-transparent portion, the entire sealing member 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, overlaps the main control portion 110m from all angles. It is set so that it is in a position where
Therefore, when main board case 200 is viewed from the front, main control section 110m is always visible through main board case 200.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control section 110m. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control unit 110m and easily determine whether or not fraud is being committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Regardless of the presence or absence of a transparent part or a non-transparent part, the seal member 1560 is located at a position where the entire seal member 1560, including the writing area 1570, code part 1572, and information display part 1573, does not overlap the information display 113 from any angle. It is set up so that
Therefore, when main board case 200 is viewed from the front, information display 113 can be visually recognized through main board case 200.

Although it cannot be said that the seal member 1560 and the information display device 113 are located in the vicinity in FIG. 8, the seal member 1560 does not overlap the main control unit 110m and the information display device 113, If the following conditions are satisfied: the seal member 1560 and the information display 113 are located at a sufficient distance from the connectors 771 to 776, and the seal member 1561 does not overlap the information display 113, the seal member 1560 and the information display 113 are located close to each other. It's okay.

The display contents of the seal member 1560 will be explained in detail below.
The entry area 1570 is an area for entering the person who opened the main board case 200 and the date of opening.
The writing area 1570 is a white base formed on a transparent material on which writing can be done with a pen or the like.
For example, six entry areas 1570 are provided, three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, in which three sets of "opener" and "opening date" can be entered.
The writing area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) base.

Above the entry area 1570, headings such as "Opened by" and "Date opened" are printed in black, and on the left side of each entry area, a circled number indicating the number of the entry area is printed.
That is, above the entry area 1570 in the upper left corner, "Opener" is printed in black. Above the entry area 1570 in the upper right corner, "date opened" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed on the left side of the upper left entry area 1570. A circle 2 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 at the vertical center on the left side. A circle 3 is printed on the left side of the lower left entry area 1570.

For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200, the inspector writes the inspector's name in the entry area 1570 on the left, and writes the date of opening the main board case 200 in the entry area 1570 on the right. . Note that the inspector may write in the entry area 1570 the date and time when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 110 was tampered with.

The cord portion 1572 is provided at the upper left portion of the seal member 1560. Code section 1572 includes predetermined information. The code section 1572 is a section from which information is read by another device, and for example, a QR code (registered trademark), barcode, etc. is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. There is. In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code section 1572 is linked to, for example, information stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "other device") and indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110.
For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code section 1572, is read by a camera installed in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information mobile terminal uses the URL to access other devices via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the mobile information terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 110 (for example, the name of the store where the gaming machine 1 was delivered), and whether the gaming machine 1 has been disposed of. Contains information such as. This allows the inspector to easily confirm information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Therefore, the inspector can check the information on the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not a fraud has been committed in which the main control board 110 from a different delivery destination has been installed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Information display section 1573 includes various information. The information display section 1573 may include the same information as the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, a character string "EF001" is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area on the information display section 1573. The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 110. Using the management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been disposed of, based on information linked to the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string in the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, etc. Further, the rectangular region of the information display section 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code section 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

The transparent portion 1574 (peeping portion) included in the sealing member 1560 will be described.
The transparent portion 1574 includes a writing area 1570, a code portion 1572, an information display portion 1573, a notation of “main board management number”, a frame, an opening person, an opening date notation, and circles 1 to 15 in the sealing member main body 1560A. This is an area other than the notation 3.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is, for example, a region extending in the left-right direction and existing between three rows of writing regions 1570 in the vertical direction.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is also a region extending in the left-right direction and existing between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged left and right, and the upper two writing areas 1570.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is also a region extending in the vertical direction between the two rows of writing regions 1570 in the left-right direction.
The inspector can check the electronic component 595 (see FIG. 62(a)) through the light-transmitting portion 1574. Therefore, compared to the case where the transparent portion 1574 is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not tampering has been performed on the electronic component 595. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

The seal member 1561 will be explained.
The seal member 1561 is attached to the main control board 110 at a position where it can be viewed from any angle.
The seal member 1561 is provided at a position that does not overlap the main control section 110m from any angle.
Therefore, when main board case 200 is viewed from the front, main control section 110m is always visible through main board case 200.
The seal member 1561 is provided so as not to overlap the information display 113 from any angle.
Therefore, when main board case 200 is viewed from the front, information display 113 can be visually recognized through main board case 200.

Furthermore, the seal member 1561 is an information identification section for displaying specific information.
For example, at least one of the model name, manufacturer name, rated voltage, and total capacity is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In this embodiment, the part on which this information is printed is also referred to as a printing part 1563. Further, specific information displayed on the seal member 1561 is referred to as an identification display 1595. In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR Aiu GH101" including the model number, the manufacturer name "AA Company", the rated voltage and the total capacity (AC24V±5%, 250VA).
In addition, in the area where the model name is displayed, a base is formed on the transparent material in a conspicuous color such as red or yellow, and the model name is displayed in white letters on the base.

Further, a seal member 1562 is attached to the main control section 110m.
The seal member 1562 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of a model name and a manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed on the seal member 1562 as predetermined information. Further, specific information displayed on the seal member 1562 is referred to as an identification display 1596. In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating information specified by the identification display 1596 may be displayed on the seal member 1562.
Further, the seal member 1561 and the seal member 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification marks 1595 and 1596. In this embodiment, the species name "CR Aiu", the model type "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but it is only necessary that some of them are the same.
Note that although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are attached to the main board case 200 and the main control unit 110m, they may be attached to other members. For example, it may be displayed on the main control board 110 including the same identification display as the identification displays 1595 and 1596.

As described above, in this embodiment, the sealing members 1560, 1561 are arranged to straddle at least part of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 8), so for example, the sealing members 1560, 1561 and the electronic component 595 are By checking the positional relationship, the inspector can determine whether or not the main control board 110 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, since a region 1575 is provided in the sealing member 1560, the inspector can write the name of the inspector and the date when the main board case 200 was opened in the region 1575 (more specifically, in the entry region 1570). can be filled in. The inspector can also write in area 1575 the date on which it was confirmed whether or not fraud was committed on the main control board 110. Further, since the light-transmitting portion 1574 (peeking portion) is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than when only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the examiner to confirm the characters written in the area 1575. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Furthermore, since the sealing member 1560 is provided with a light-transmitting portion 1574 (viewing portion), the inspector can check the electronic component 595 through the light-transmitting portion 1574 (viewing portion). Therefore, compared to the case where the transparent part 1574 (peeping part) is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not tampering has been carried out with respect to the electronic component 595. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Further, the cord section 1572 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the main control section 110m. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control section 110m. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control unit 110m and easily determine whether or not fraud is being committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, the code section 1572 is linked with information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110, which is stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1. Thereby, the inspector can easily confirm information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 using the code section 1572. Therefore, the inspector can check the information on the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not a fraud has been committed in which the main control board 110 from a different delivery destination has been installed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Further, a seal member 1562 is attached to the main control unit 110m, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal member 1562. Therefore, by checking the seal member 1562, the inspector can easily confirm that the main control unit 110m is being replaced illegally. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Further, since at least one of the model name and the manufacturer's name is printed on the seal member 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name and the manufacturer's name. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name and manufacturer name and easily determine whether fraud is being committed. Therefore, players can play games with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Note that the various information displayed on the seal members 1560 and 1561 may be displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the main control unit 110m to be visually recognized.
The main board case 200, especially the upper case piece 220, does not have ventilation holes.
The main board case 200 has date marks formed on a lower case piece 210 and an upper case piece 220.
A date mark is a mark for lot management that is added to a case, which is a plastic molded product, during manufacturing (molding).
A feature of this embodiment is that no component is provided near the main control unit 110m at a height that would make the seal member 1562 invisible.

As explained above, the main control board 110 is equipped with the main control unit 110m that controls the game, the information display 113 that displays the performance of the gaming machine, and other electronic components 595 different from these. There is. A transparent sealing member 1560 is attached to the main control board 110. Thereby, other electronic components 595 can be visually recognized through the transparent sealing member 1560 and the main board case 200. Further, the main control unit 110m and the information display 113 can be directly viewed through the main board case 200.

By watermarking the transparent portion of the sealing member 1560 that has a transparent portion and a plurality of non-transparent portions that need to be attached to the main board case 200, duplication of the sealing member 1560 can be prevented. In addition, by pasting the sealing member 1560 in a position that does not overlap the main control unit 110m and the information display 113, the main control unit, which is an important board component, is not affected by watermarking or multiple non-transparent parts. 110m, the visibility of the information display 113 that needs to be read accurately can be ensured.

Regarding the electronic components 595 whose importance is lower than the main control unit 110m and the information display 113, the status can be confirmed through watermarking from the gaps between the multiple non-transparent parts and the surrounding transparent parts 1574 (peeping parts). I can do it. Even if there are multiple non-transparent parts, visibility of the board components can be ensured by the transparent parts. Further, predetermined information, such as necessary information such as identifying the main control unit 110m, can be displayed in the non-transparent portion. Different information can be displayed or written on each of the non-transparent parts.

Note that the information display 113 may be arranged at the lower end of the main control board 110 instead of at the upper end. In that case, it is desirable that the connectors 771 to 776 be arranged on the opposite (opposite) upper end side to the information display 113.
The information display 113 may be arranged on the left end side or the right end side of the main control board 110. In that case, it is desirable that the connectors 771 to 776 be arranged at the opposite (opposite) end to the information display 113.
Furthermore, as described above, the information display 113 may be arranged inside the main control board 110 instead of at the end thereof. Even in that case, it must be placed in a position that does not overlap with the cables, harnesses, seal members 1560, etc. extending from the connectors 771 to 776.

In the present embodiment, the RWM clear switch 111a is described as being disposed on the main control board 110, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and it may be disposed on the payout control board 120. Further, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 112a is described as being disposed on the main control board 110, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The setting key switch 112a can be placed at a separate position from the main control board 110 as long as it is electrically connected to the main control board 110.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically explained using FIG. 9. FIG. 9 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The main control board 110 centrally controls the progress of the game (basic operations). The main control board 110 includes a main control unit 110m as a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. It is equipped with an input port for main control, an output port, etc. The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. and transmits predetermined commands based on the results of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the production control board 130, etc.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to communicate commands (data) in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 is It is configured so that commands (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the production control board 130.

The input ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a big winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball detection switch 52a. , a magnetic detection sensor 53a, a radio wave detection sensor 54a, an RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, an information display 113, a payout control board 120, and the like are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing is performed according to the detection signals.

The output port of the main control board 110 includes a second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, a winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, a main information display device 59, a game information output terminal board 90, a payout control board 120, a performance control board 130, etc. is connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various indicators, and game notifications to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) from the gaming information output terminal board through the output port. Information etc. are output.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on reception of the payout command from the main control board 110, and also controls the firing of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, etc., a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, etc. . The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of game balls while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area, and operates the payout device 100. control, and transmits predetermined commands based on the results of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the production control board 130, etc.

The input port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to an open detection switch 31a, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the payout device 100, a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit, etc. A dispensing motor 100b provided in the dispensing device 100 is connected to an output port of the dispensing control unit 121.

When the payout control unit 121 receives the payout command from the main control board 110, it drives the payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100 to control the payout of a predetermined number of game balls, and controls the payout ball detection switch 100a to pay out a predetermined number of game balls. When the payout of game balls is detected, the control for paying out game balls is ended.

The firing control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, etc. (not shown). A touch sensor 15a and a firing volume 15b are connected to an input port of the firing control unit 122, and a ball feeding solenoid 11b, a firing solenoid 28b, etc. are connected to an output port of the firing control unit 122. ing.

When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b to be energized. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed based on the detection signal from the firing volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the ball is fired so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. The game ball is fired by driving the solenoid 28b.

The firing solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to a rotating shaft, and as the rotating shaft rotates, the launching member 28 rotates and launches the game ball A. . Note that the operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to approximately 99.9 times/minute based on the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, so the firing of the game ball in one minute is approximately 99.9 times per minute. The number is approximately 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, the game ball will be fired approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The performance control board 130 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls the performance related to the game (performed in the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of the performance command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub-CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub-ROM 130b in which an effect control program is stored, a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an effect control unit 130m, and a first image display device 70 (main display control unit 140 that controls the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b, the panel drive device 75, and the panel lighting. It includes a lamp control section 150 that controls the device 76 and the like, and an input port, an output port, etc. for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the performance control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area. Control is performed to cause various control units (display control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) to execute various effects in accordance with commands and input signals from the effect button detection switch 17a and cross key detection switch 19a (data and commands). ).

A performance button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), etc. are connected to the input port of the performance control board 130. In the production control board 130, a production button detection signal indicating that the production button 17 has been operated is input from the production button detection switch 17a, and a cross key detection signal indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (upper button detection signal, left button detection signal, lower button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the production control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image. or controls the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined audio.

The display control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141 that collectively controls image display and audio output based on reception of production control commands from the production control unit 130m, and a control unit 141 that controls display control commands (display list) from the general control unit 141. A video control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71 based on reception, a CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and a voice control unit that receives voice control commands from the general control unit 141. It includes an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on the audio data, and an audio ROM 149 that stores audio data and the like.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 141b that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 (VDP), and an audio control unit 148 (audio It has an input/output port to which LSI is connected.

The overall CPU 141a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out an overall control program stored in the overall ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while utilizing the overall RAM 141c as a work area. Thereby, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing the effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting it to the display control unit 140, and an audio output device It performs control processing and the like for generating an audio control command instructing the effect sound to be output from the audio controller 9 and transmitting it to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The VRAM 143 provided in the image control unit 145 (VDP) is a display list storage area that temporarily stores the display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142a), and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , and a frame buffer area corresponding to the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying images, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing starts.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 in the “frame buffer for drawing” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the general control unit 141. The drawing data is read from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, and a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second It is output to an image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display various images.

Note that the image control unit 145 (VDP) is supplied with an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and by frequency-dividing this operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display Generates a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal/vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and displays the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Output to. In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) based on various performance data (including commands) transmitted from the performance control unit 130m. Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display on the two-image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. In response to performance instruction commands and the like, control is performed to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform predetermined performances (data and commands are output).

The frame lighting device 10, button drive device 17b, panel lighting device 76, and sub information display device 80 are connected to the input/output port of the lamp control section, and the information is transmitted from the production control section 130m (sub CPU 130a). Based on the various production data (including commands), the lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80 is performed, and the button driving device 17b and, It also performs drive control of drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the panel drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power (operating power) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 from the power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine 1, and supplies the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, production control (substrate 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power outage detection circuit 162 that detects whether a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of a power outage (power outage). A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 during a power outage (power outage).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the supply of main power is stopped. A power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk at the game parlor, and when the power switch is turned on, supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Note that even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power outage detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a becomes operational when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, and the main CPU 110a enters an operational state when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when power is applied to the gaming machine, and when a power outage (power outage) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is transferred to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. supply As a result, even in the event of a power outage (power outage), the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c will be retained, and after recovery from the power outage (power outage), the gaming control state will be returned to the state before the power outage (power outage). It can be restored. Note that backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the production control board 130.

(Explanation of gaming status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be explained. In this embodiment, the states related to jackpot determination of special symbols include a "low probability state" and "high probability state," and the states related to the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 include a "non-time saving state" and ""time saving state".

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) A low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) that is a "low-probability state" and a "non-time-saving state"
(2) A low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state) that is a "low probability state" and a "time-saving state"
(3) High probability time saving gaming state (variable probability gaming state) which is a "high probability state" and "time saving state"

Note that the gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state." In addition, in this embodiment, the "low-probability time-saving gaming state" and the "high-probability time-saving gaming state" are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, so they may be referred to as "specific gaming states."

In this embodiment, the "low probability state" means, for example, when the set value (jackpot probability in jackpot determination), which is the stage of advantageousness of the game, is "1", the first starting port 45 or the 2 Refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set as low as about 1/300 in jackpot determination of a special symbol performed on the condition that a game ball enters a starting hole 47. On the other hand, "high probability state" means that the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in a low probability state, and when the setting value is "1", the probability of winning a jackpot is set as high as approximately 1/60. Indicates the game state.

Specifically, there are four setting values, ``1'' to ``4.'' When the setting value is ``1,'' the probability of winning the jackpot in a low probability state is approximately 1/300, which is a high probability. The probability of winning the jackpot in the state is approximately 1/60, and if the setting value is "2", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is approximately 1/295, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is approximately If the setting value is "3", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is approximately 1/290, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is approximately 1/58, and the setting value is "3". 4, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is approximately 1/285, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is approximately 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high probability state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low probability state". Further, the low probability state changes to the high probability state after the jackpot game described later is completed. Therefore, in this embodiment, a jackpot that triggers a transition to a high probability state is referred to as a "probable jackpot." In addition, a jackpot that triggers a transition to a low probability state is called a "normal jackpot."

In this embodiment, the "non-time saving state" refers to the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbols that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44. This is a game state that is set longer than the "time saving state" and in which the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is likely to be set short. For example, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal pattern is performed, and a variable display of the normal pattern is performed on the normal pattern display 62, but after the variable display of the normal pattern starts, For example, the display stops after 30 seconds. If the lottery result is a win, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be open for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the normal symbols are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, the "time saving state" means that in the winning lottery for regular symbols that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the regular symbols corresponding to the lottery result is " This is a game state in which the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is set to be shorter than the "non-time saving state" and longer than the "non-time saving state", for example, 2.5 seconds. Furthermore, in the "non-time saving state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as, for example, 1/128, and in the "time saving state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set to be low, for example 127/128. is set high. Therefore, in the "time saving state", when the game ball passes through the regular game gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more easily controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time saving state". As a result, in the "time saving state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game in a state where it is difficult to consume game balls.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time saving state" is set so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery are more advantageous than the "non-time saving state". has been done. However, the "time saving state" may be set so that only one of the normal symbol variation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. Further, in the non-time-saving state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery may be set to, for example, 0/128.

In addition, in this embodiment, a jackpot is determined in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability state is five times the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state (common regardless of the setting value). The probability is not limited to 5 times, but may be set to any value such as 3 times or 8 times as long as it is 10 times or less.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the jackpot determination, a small win that is less advantageous to the winner than a jackpot is not won, but for example, a small win is set to be won with a probability of about 1/100. Good too. In this case, it is preferable that the small win probability be the same regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "4".

Also, the larger the setting value is, the more advantageous it becomes to the player (higher jackpot probability), but conversely, the smaller the setting value is, the more advantageous it becomes to the player (higher jackpot probability). You can also do this.

In addition, the probability of being judged as a jackpot in a low probability state and/or a high probability state may be set to be the same for all setting values (1 to 4), or for example, for two or three setting values (1 and 4), 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of determining a jackpot in the low probability state and/or the high probability state may be the same. Further, although the setting values in this embodiment are in four stages from 1 to 4, they are not limited to four stages, and may be more or less than four stages.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13.

(Jackpot judgment table)
FIG. 10(a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the first starting port 45. , FIG. 10(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the second starting port 47. be.

As shown in FIGS. 10(a) and (b), the jackpot judgment table corresponds to the current setting value, the current probability state, the random value for jackpot judgment, and the jackpot judgment result (jackpot, loss). As a reference, the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot" is listed in the far right column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 10(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10(b), and determines the current setting value, probability state, and jackpot. Based on the random number value for determination, it is determined whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss".

For example, according to the first special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. The random number value for determination is determined to be a "jackpot". Then, random numbers for jackpot determination other than those determined to be jackpots are determined to be "losses".

Note that the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is stored in the first special figure determination information retention storage area of the main RAM 110c, The special figure determination information acquired based on the winning is stored in the second special figure determination information reservation storage area of the main RAM 110c. Then, when making a jackpot determination, the special symbol determination information stored in the first special symbol determination information retention storage area or the second special symbol determination information retention storage area is shifted to the special symbol determination information storage area of the main RAM 110c. , jackpot determination will be performed using the shifted special figure determination information.

In addition, the first special figure judgment information reservation storage area is divided into a first storage part to a fourth storage part, and the reservation corresponding to the special figure judgment information stored in these first storage part to fourth storage part is divided into the first to fourth storage parts. The icons are displayed on the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 of the first pending icon display area 70B, respectively. The second special figure determination information reservation storage area is divided into first to fourth storage sections, and the reservation icons corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in these first to fourth storage sections are They are displayed on the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 11(a) is a special symbol determination table for jackpot for determining the type of special symbol when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 11(b) is a special symbol determination table for determining the type of special symbol when a jackpot is determined. This is a special symbol determination table for losing to determine the type.

As shown in FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b), the special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the random value for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol, and the information corresponding to the determination result. The stop special symbol data and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result are associated.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which a jackpot game is not executed. Special symbols "01" and "04" are special jackpot symbols that execute the first jackpot game, and special symbols "02" and "05" are jackpot symbols that execute the second jackpot game. , the special symbol "03" is a jackpot symbol for executing the third jackpot game.

In the "first jackpot game", a round game in which the grand prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds is executed up to six times. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time has elapsed. Further, after the first jackpot game ends, the low-probability non-time-saving game state (time-saving game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game", a round game in which the grand prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 10 times. Furthermore, after the second jackpot game ends, the high accuracy time-saving gaming state (variable probability gaming state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, judging from the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

In the "third jackpot game", a round game in which the second jackpot 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the jackpot is closed for two seconds is executed up to four times. Furthermore, after the third jackpot game ends, the highly accurate time-saving gaming state (variable probability gaming state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, judging from the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

Although one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of losing special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Good too.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any one of FIGS. 11(a) to 11(b), and determines the type of special symbol, based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed and the random value for special symbol determination. The stop special symbol data and the special symbol designation command are determined, and the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the type of jackpot special symbol and the type of loss special symbol are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player can play the game with peace of mind without having complicated gameplay.

A second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols and the selection ratio of various losing symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 12(a) is a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state for determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern in the non-time saving state, and FIG. 12(b) is a special symbol fluctuation pattern in the time saving state. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state for determining.

As shown in FIG. 12, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting opening) that performs variable display, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), and the reach determination result. Random value, first special figure reservation number (U1) or second special figure reservation number (U2), random value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, special figure fluctuation pattern as a judgment result, special symbol fluctuation time and a special figure variation pattern designation command indicating a special figure variation pattern.

Therefore, the "special symbol variation pattern" can be said to be one that can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 2 Determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern based on the number of special pattern reservations (U2) and the random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination, and send the special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command according to the special pattern fluctuation pattern to the production control board 130 It looks like this.

In addition, the performance control board 130 determines the content (performance mode) of the variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the performance symbols 70a, in accordance with the fluctuation pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.), as will be described later. Therefore, in the rightmost column of the special pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12, the production contents that can be executed with the variable production are listed for reference.

As for the performance contents shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12, "normal fluctuation", "shortened fluctuation", "ultra shortened fluctuation", and "long fluctuation" are three performance symbols 70a that fluctuate apart at high speed. , it is a performance that stops without becoming a reach.

In addition, "reach" means that the player expects a jackpot game to be executed in which a part of the combination of presentation symbols 70a that informs a jackpot temporarily stops and other presentation symbols 70a change. It means a performance that causes For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot, the same performance symbols 70a in the left and right regions temporarily stop at "7". , refers to a mode in which the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the performance symbols 70a are slightly swayed or deformed slightly to make it appear to the player that the performance symbols 70a are stopped (not completely stopped). refers to the manner in which the

In addition, "normal reach" means a reach effect in which the same effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a changes in the center area, and the expectation level of jackpot is the lowest. This is a reach production.

Moreover, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach effects that have a higher expectation of a jackpot than normal reach effects, and are performed after the normal reach effect and the extended effect. For example, the two performance symbols 70a are reduced in size from their normal size and moved to the top of the screen of the first image display device 70 (a symbol change performance is performed in which the performance symbols 70a forming a reach state are smaller than their normal size). 1), a special ready-to-reach effect is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. Note that in the "Special SP Reach", a more special effect than in the "SP Reach" is executed.

Furthermore, "SPSP reach" and "SPSP '7' reach" are special reach performances that have higher expectations for a jackpot than super reach performances, and are executed after the normal reach performance or the super reach performance. For example, a normal reach performance is performed to a development performance, and then the three performance symbols 70a are reduced to the minimum size and moved to the upper left corner of the screen of the first image display device 70 (the performance symbols 70a forming the reach state are A symbol change effect is performed in which the symbol is smaller than the normal size), and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70 is used to perform a special reach effect than "SP reach". In addition, in "SPSP reach", a reach effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a other than "7", and in "SPSP "7" reach", a reach effect is performed with a pattern of "7".

In addition, the "full rotation reach" is a reach that guarantees a jackpot, and is executed after the normal reach performance. For example, a development effect is executed from a normal reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 70a are all the same and change at a low speed, and "SPSP reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. It is designed to have a special reach effect (reach effect that guarantees a jackpot) than "SPSP '7' Reach".

In this embodiment, the jackpot winning expectation degree related to the reach effect is higher in the order of normal reach effect<SP reach effect<SPSP reach effect<full rotation reach effect (jackpot confirmed).

In addition, when a shortening variation or a super shortening variation is executed, the production pattern 70a starts variable display according to the first start display mode in which the three production patterns 70a start variable display (scrolling) at the same time, and the three production patterns 70a start variable display (scrolling). The first stop display mode in which the symbols 70a temporarily stop at the same time temporarily stops the effect symbols 70a, and other variable effects (normal variation, long variation, normal reach, SP reach, special SP reach, SPSP reach, SPSP When "7" reach and full rotation reach are executed, the three effect symbols 70a start variable display (scrolling) in the order of left → right → middle. The performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped by the second stop display mode in which the three performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the order of left → right → middle.

The first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that the type of special figure variation pattern to be determined is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing this, it becomes difficult to discern the setting value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

A second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that the selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing this, it becomes difficult to discern the setting value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The third feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that when the number of reserved first special symbols increases to 2 or 3 during a non-time saving state, a shortening variation is determined as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. On the other hand, even if the second special symbol reservation number increases to 2 or 3 during the non-time saving state, the shortening variation is not determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing this, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of special symbols when hitting left than when hitting right in a non-time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The fourth feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that even if the number of reserved first special symbols increases from 1 to 3 during the time saving state, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is (super) shortened. While the fluctuation is not determined, when the second special symbol reservation number increases from 1 to 3 during the time saving state, the (long) shortening fluctuation becomes easier to be determined as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing this, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of special symbols when hitting right than when hitting left in the time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

As a fifth feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. When a loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation performance resulting in a loss) of the first special symbol is executed during the change, it is easier to perform a fluctuation display (variation performance) based on the same fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern to be executed is There are few types). By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect during the non-time saving state in which the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. When a jackpot variation display (first variation production resulting in a jackpot) of the first special symbol is executed during the execution, a variation display (variation production) based on the same variation pattern is more likely to be executed (the variation pattern to be executed is There are few types). By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect during the non-time saving state in which the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a seventh feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. When a loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation performance that results in a loss) of the first special symbol is executed in (low). By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect during the time-saving state in which the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable presentation) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. When a jackpot variation display (first variation effect that results in a jackpot) of the first special symbol is executed in (low). By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect during the time-saving state in which the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable presentation) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a ninth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. In the case where the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol (the second fluctuation performance resulting in a loss) is executed, there are more types of fluctuation patterns to be executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect during the time-saving state in which the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable presentation) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that the first special symbol is held when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (the second variation effect resulting in a loss) is executed during the non-time saving state. The difference between the average fluctuation time when the number is the maximum number (here "3") and the average fluctuation time when the number is a predetermined number smaller than the maximum number (for example "1") is greater than the difference between the average fluctuation time when the number is the maximum number (here "3") and the average fluctuation time when the number is a predetermined number smaller than the maximum number (for example "1"). When executing the loss fluctuation display (the first fluctuation effect that results in a loss), the average fluctuation time at the maximum number (here, "3") of the first special symbol reservation number and a predetermined number smaller than the maximum number (for example, "1") '') is smaller than the average fluctuation time (Strictly speaking, when executing the losing fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the time saving state, the difference in the average fluctuation time due to the number of reserved first special symbols is smaller) There are some points that can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect during the non-time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is that the number of second special symbols reserved when performing a loss variation display of the second special symbol (second variation effect resulting in a loss) during the time saving state. is the difference between the average fluctuation time at the maximum number (here "3") and the average fluctuation time at a predetermined number smaller than the maximum number (for example "1"), the first special symbol loses during the time saving state. When performing a variable display (first variable effect that results in a loss), the average variation time at the maximum number (here, "3") of the first special figure reservation number and a predetermined number smaller than the maximum number (for example, "1") ) is smaller than the average fluctuation time (strictly speaking, when executing the loss fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol during the time saving state, there is no difference in the average fluctuation time depending on the number of 1st special symbols held) ) points can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to improve the performance effect during the time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when performing the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the time saving state (the first fluctuation performance resulting in a loss), a difference may be provided in the average fluctuation time depending on the number of first special symbols held. Specifically, if the number of first reserved special drawings is "0" or "1", a long variation with a variation time of 12 seconds is executed, and if the number is "2" or "3", a variation time is 10 seconds. It is recommended to perform a normal variation of seconds. Even in this case, when executing the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the non-time saving state, the number of 1st special symbols held is longer than the average fluctuation time and maximum number at the maximum number (here "3"). The maximum number of the first special symbol pending number (here, It is preferable that the difference between the average fluctuation time at "3") and the average fluctuation time at a predetermined number smaller than the maximum number (for example, "1") be smaller.

In addition, when executing the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol (the first variation effect that becomes a jackpot) even in a non-time saving state or in a time saving state, the average variation time depending on the number of reserved first special symbols A difference may be provided between the two. Even in this case, the average fluctuation time when the number of first special drawings on hold during the non-time saving state is the maximum number (here, "3") and a predetermined number smaller than the maximum number (for example, "1"). Compared to the difference between the average fluctuation time, the number of 1st special symbols on hold during the time saving state is the maximum number (in this case, the average fluctuation time at "3" and the predetermined number smaller than the maximum number (for example, "1") It is better to make the difference from the average time smaller.

The twelfth feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. It is executed by a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the variation pattern with the maximum variation time that is executed when executing the jackpot variation display of the 1 special symbol or when executing the jackpot variation display of the 2nd special symbol during the time saving state. There are several points. By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect during the non-time saving state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is likely to be executed and in the time saving state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, and the interest of the game is improved. It becomes possible to improve the

(Pre-judgment table)
FIG. 13(a) is a preliminary judgment table for the non-time-saving state for pre-judging (pre-reading) the special figure judgment information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 during the non-time-saving state. , FIG. 13(b) is a pre-determination table for the time-saving state for pre-determining (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 during the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 13, the preliminary determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting opening), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. , a special figure scheduled variation pattern as a determination result and a prefetch designation command indicating the special figure scheduled variation pattern are associated.

Therefore, the "special pattern scheduled variation pattern" can be said to be able to specify the type of special symbol, the result of jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special symbol variation pattern scheduled to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 13, and determines the planned special pattern fluctuation based on the random value for jackpot determination, the random value for special symbol determination, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination. The pattern is determined and a prefetch designation command corresponding to the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern is sent to the production control board 130.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 14. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a disables all interrupts in step S1, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S2, and performs startup wait processing for other boards in step S3. Specifically, in order to avoid missing commands from the main control board 110, the CPU waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 to start up.

The main CPU 110a allows access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a firing permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing to permit the shooting device 26 to shoot the game ball.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored is saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that the power has been restored, and the process moves to step S7; if the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that the power is turned on for the first time, and the process moves to step S8.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed in step S8. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process moves to step S9 as a transition to setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process moves to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S9. Specifically, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed or settings are being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and a setting value area of the gaming RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. Displays the current setting values saved in and sends a setting change designation command to the production control board 130.

Furthermore, each time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the setting value is changed (updated) in the range of "1" to "4", the updated setting value is displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the setting key switch 112a is When there is a setting confirmation operation that changes the setting from the ON state to the OFF state, the changed (updated) setting value is saved in the setting value area to confirm the setting value, and the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is ended. At the same time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated, and processing for terminating the setting change mode is performed.

In addition, in the production control board 130 which received the setting change designation command, processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed will be performed. Specifically, a settings change screen is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71 to indicate that the settings are being changed, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are displayed in a predetermined manner while the settings are being changed. All the lights are turned on with the same emission color (for example, white). Note that the audio output device 9 may output a settings change notification sound (“Settings are being changed”) indicating that settings are being changed.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal in step S10. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S7. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), the process moves to step S11, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), Assuming that it is not possible to normally return to the control state before power-off, the process moves to step S12.

Note that if the backup flag has not been saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S13, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S12. Move.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S12. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an irreversible error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred to the production control board 130. , sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and after clearing the output port, outputs a non-recoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a non-recoverable error from the security signal terminal of the gaming information output terminal board 90. Then, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the production control board 130 performs a process for notifying an unrecoverable error.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (no transition to game control occurs), and is not canceled unless a setting change process is executed. Therefore, if an unrecoverable error occurs, even if you turn off the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 and then turn on the power switch without changing settings, it will not be canceled and the It is now necessary to turn on the power switch in conjunction with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

Note that although the "unrecoverable error" is not cleared unless the setting change process is executed, it may also be cleared when RWM clear is executed without the setting change process.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is a notification to make the user aware that an unrecoverable error has occurred. "), the frame lighting device 10 and panel lighting device 76 are lit in a predetermined color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error occurs from the audio output device 9. An unrecoverable error sound ("Unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) indicating that the error has occurred is output until the power is turned off.
Note that the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the board illumination device 76 may be collectively referred to as a "production device."

The main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear operation has been performed in step S13. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, it is assumed that RWM clear is to be executed and the process moves to step S14, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S14. Specifically, processing is performed to initialize the gaming control state (initialize the gaming RWM area other than the setting value area).

In step S15, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command to the payout control board 120 and the power-on designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been initialized and the current gaming state (here, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state as the normal gaming state). It is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the process moves to step S21. As a result, the production control board 130 performs processing for executing power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135" ), the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit up in a predetermined color (for example, red) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds), and the RWM area is displayed from the audio output device 9. This means outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) to indicate that the device has been initialized.
Note that in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display notifying that RWM has been cleared may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S17 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was cut off. The process moves to step S18.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed or settings are being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and a setting value area of the gaming RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. Displays the current set values saved in and sends a setting confirmation designation command to the production control board 130.

Furthermore, when there is a confirmation end operation that changes the setting key switch 112a from the ON state to the OFF state, the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is ended, and the state confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is ended, Performs processing to end setting confirmation mode.

In addition, in the production control board 130 which received the setting confirmation designation command, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that setting confirmation is being performed will be performed. Specifically, the image display devices 70 and 71 display a setting confirmation screen indicating that the settings are being confirmed, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 emit a predetermined light while the settings are being confirmed. Turn on all lights in a color (for example, white). Note that the audio output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Setting values are being confirmed”) indicating that the settings are being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the gaming RWM area, and sets the gaming RWM area when the power is restored. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (restored) to the state before the power was turned off, so it is possible to resume the game from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits to the production control board 130 a power recovery designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been restored and the gaming state before the power outage occurred. As a result, the production control board 130 performs a process for terminating setting confirmation notification, etc., which will be described later, and executing power recovery notification.

"Power restoration notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect The frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 76 are fully illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g. blue) for a predetermined period (e.g. 60 seconds), the audio output device 9 A power restoration notification sound ("power has been restored" + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power outage) is output for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds).
Note that in the power restoration notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display notifying that the power has been restored may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a executes other commands (a command for specifying the number of reserved special symbols (U1) and a second reserved number of special symbols (U2), and the number of reserved regular symbols (G)). A command for specifying the number of reserved general figures shown) is transmitted to the production control board 130. As a result, the performance control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols and the number of reserved regular symbols, and also perform processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the first image display device 70. It will be done.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the production control board 130 in step S21. This makes it possible for the effect control board 130 to grasp the current set value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the production control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are transmitted. Furthermore, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time a variable display of special symbols starts, or each time a jackpot game starts.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special symbol determination to determine the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol, and in step S25, An initial value random value update process is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether a power outage (power outage) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it is determined whether a power outage detection signal is input from the power outage detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if the power outage detection signal is not input, the process moves to step S24, and the power outage detection is performed. If a signal is input, the process moves to step S27.

The main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step S27, clears the output port in step S28, and clears the gaming RWM area (set value area) of the main RAM 110c in step S29. In step S30, a process is performed to save a backup flag in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S31, Processing is performed to prohibit RAM access, and the process waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off.

In this way, since multiple conditions (operations) are set for setting change operations, it is not possible to change settings easily, which makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts and improve the security of gaming machines. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is greater than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, making it possible to avoid the most fraudulent setting changes. It is possible to increase the security of events where acts are likely to be committed, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped, causing the game machine to perform unexpected operations and causing inconvenience to the game parlor and players. This eliminates the need for overtime, making it possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, if the value in the setting value area is not within the appropriate range, in other words, if the previous power-off may have occurred while changing the settings, irreversible error processing will be executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with setting values that are not intended by the game parlor, thereby improving the reliability of the game machine. Become.

Also, while changing settings (setting change mode) or checking settings (setting confirmation mode), on the front (surface) of gaming machine 1, there are a status confirmation display 68, image display devices 70 and 71, and a frame lighting device. It is possible to recognize that the settings are being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back side (back side). ing. In other words, it is possible to know whether the settings are being changed from either the front (front) or the back (back) of the gaming machine 1.

Note that the condition for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state. By doing so, the number of conditions increases, so fraudulent acts can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

In addition, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (this is the first time the power is turned on) and there is no setting change operation, and if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S10, an unrecoverable error process is performed. is executed, but when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the gaming program initializes the gaming RWM area (clears it to 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the setting value area. Then, the process may be moved to step S13.

Additionally, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (power has been restored) and there is no setting change operation, and if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the gaming program initializes the gaming RWM area (clears it to 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the setting value area. , the process may be moved to step S13.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power-recovery designation command are sent including information indicating the current gaming state, but after transmitting the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command, the current gaming state Alternatively, a gaming state designation command indicating the game state may be transmitted.

In addition, when the power is turned off or turned on, the gaming program calculates the checksum of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c, but the information program calculates the checksum. may be calculated. In this case, it is preferable to save the calculated checksum in the information RWM area.

Also, when the power is turned off or turned on, the checksum of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but even if the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either checksum is abnormal, the process may proceed to irreversible error processing.

Additionally, a settings change designation command is sent at the start of the settings change process, and a power-on designation command is sent after the settings change process ends, but instead of the settings change designation command, a settings change start designation command is sent. However, instead of the power-on designation command, a setting change end designation command may be sent. In this case, the settings change end designation command may be sent at the end of the settings change process, or may be sent after the settings change process ends.

Further, when a setting change is made, the RWM clearing process is performed after the setting change is made, but the RWM clearing process may be performed before the setting change is made.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, updates the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter such as the opening time of special electric accessories, etc. It performs time control processing for updating various timer counters, such as updating processing of , normal symbol time counter updating processing, and updating processing of opening/closing time of the movable member 48 . Specifically, 1 is subtracted from counters such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting port opening timer counter, and a starting port closing timer counter.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for hit determination, a random value for normal symbol determination, and a regular symbol fluctuation pattern determination. Performs specific random number update processing to update random numbers. Specifically, each random value and random number counter are updated by adding +1. In addition, if the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the corresponding The initial value random value is set as a new round initial value, and the random value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a, similarly to step S30, sets the initial value random value for jackpot determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination. Perform initial value random value update processing to be updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a controls the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the out ball detection switch 52a, etc. It determines whether or not there is an input to each switch, and performs input control processing to set predetermined data if there is an input. The details will be described later using FIG. 16.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a operates a special figure special electric line for determining the number of reserved special figures (judgment of jackpot, etc.), controlling the display of special symbols, controlling opening/closing of the grand prize opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), controlling the gaming state, etc. Performs control processing. The details will be described later using FIG. 18.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a executes a normal pattern and general electric power control process for determining the number of normal patterns stored (hit determination, etc.), controlling the display of normal symbols, controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), etc. conduct.

It should be noted that the type of winning normal symbol and the type of losing normal symbol determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol determination information performed in the ordinary symbol and electric power control process are the same without changing depending on the setting value. By doing so, the gameplay is not too complicated and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various winning ordinary symbols and the selection ratio of various losing ordinary symbols, which are determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol judgment information performed in the ordinary symbol general electricity control process, do not change depending on the setting value and remain constant. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation command to the payout control board 120 for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120, and sends a prize ball counter (3 prize ball counter, 10 award balls counter, 15 award balls counter), and performs payout control processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning holes to the payout control board 120. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the payout device 100.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and issues a magnetic abnormality error specification command and a radio wave abnormality error specification command. Performs magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination processing for transmitting commands to the production control board 130. In addition, when the production control board 130 receives the error designation command for magnetic abnormality or the error designation command for radio wave abnormality, it performs control to perform magnetic abnormality error notification or radio wave abnormality error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (gaming information) from the gaming information output terminal board 90, starting opening opening/closing data outputting to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b. Winning opening/closing data, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 60 and second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, first special symbol pending display 63, and performs data creation processing to create data such as special symbol pending display data to be output to the second special symbol pending display 64 and normal symbol pending display data to be output to the normal symbol pending display 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing to output signals such as the external information data, starting opening opening/closing data, and big winning opening opening/closing data created in step S700, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , a display output process that outputs signals such as special symbol pending display data, normal symbol pending display data, etc., and a payout command transmission process that transmits a command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120. Also, an output control process is performed to execute a production command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the production control board 130.

The main CPU 110a performs information program call processing in step S800. Specifically, after disabling interrupts, the flag register is saved in the gaming RWM area, and processing is performed to call the target information program using a CALL instruction.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the number of payouts during normal play, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning holes (general winning hole, big winning hole, starting hole) during normal gaming state, Processing is performed to count the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, regardless of the gaming state. .

In addition, the total number of outs, the number of payouts during normal play, and the number of outs during normal play are gaming information that is not affected (unrelated to the setting value) even if the setting value is changed, so these By counting, it becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value to be described later) that excludes the influence of the set value, and it becomes possible to use it for understanding the performance of the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs performance information calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((number of payouts during normal play ÷ number of outs during normal play) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is calculated. Processing is performed to save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area.

The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is divided into a first area where the normal base value in the current game section is stored, and a one-time storage area. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous gaming section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the two previous gaming sections, and a normal base value in the three previous gaming sections. A fourth area for playing the game is provided, and the base values for four game sections including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base value (performance information) for four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area is displayed on the information display 113 while being switched every 5 seconds. Performs processing to set performance display data.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, processing is performed to create test data (test information) to be output to test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing is performed to output signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various indicators, and processing is performed to output signals such as test data created in step S870 above. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs processing upon returning to the gaming program. Specifically, processing is performed to restore the flag register from the gaming RWM area, enable interrupts, and return to the gaming program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, the timer interrupt is not executed in the setting change processing, RWM clear processing, and setting confirmation processing, so it is not possible to count the number of payouts and outs, calculate the performance information of the gaming machine, and perform the processing of the gaming machine. Since the performance information is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control board 110.

Although the performance information calculation process was performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Further, the game ball counting process may also be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 16. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a performs general winning opening detection switch input processing in step S210. In this general winning hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process moves to step S220.

When a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, data indicating 5 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (5 prize ball counter) for the general winning hole used for prize balls and updated. Then, after adding "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning hole and updating it (D←D+1), the general winning hole detection switch input process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process in step S220. In this big winning hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the big winning hole detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning hole 50. If there is no detection signal input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the process moves to step S230.

When the detection signal from the big winning opening detection switch 50a is input, data indicating 15 winning balls is added to the winning ball counter (15 winning balls counter) for the big winning opening used for winning balls. Update and add "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that entered the winning slot and update (D←D+1) to determine whether the current jackpot game (special game) is in progress. Determine whether If you are currently playing a jackpot game, add "1" to the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that have entered the big winning hole 50 and update it (C←C+1). Detection switch input processing ends.

If the current gaming state is not a special gaming state, the number of illegal winning balls that have won (balls entered) in the specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, big winning opening 50) outside the winning winning period. Add "1" to the counter (E) and update it (E←E+1), determine whether the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number (for example, 10), and If the value of the ball counter (E) is less than or equal to the specified number, the big winning opening detection switch input process is ended.

If the value of the illegal prize winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, an illegal prize winning (unauthorized winning ball) in which a game ball wins a prize (balls entered) outside the winning period has occurred, and an error for fraudulent prize winning is designated. Set the command to the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, an error specifying command for fraudulent winning is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 issues a fraudulent winning error notification to notify that a fraudulent winning has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared, and the big winning opening is detected. End switch input processing. As a result, a fraudulent winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible for an external device to grasp (specify) that a fraudulent winning has occurred.

The main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process in step S230. In this first starting port detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 45 or not. The details will be described later using FIG. 17.

The main CPU 110a performs second starting port detection switch input processing in step S240. In this second starting port detection switch input process, substantially the same process as the first starting port detection switch input process shown in FIG. 17, which will be described later, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the regular figure gate 44 or not. If no detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process ends.

When a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of regular symbols held, which is the number of regular symbols stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area, is less than four. If the number of reserved general drawings is not less than 4, the input control process is ended.

If the number of reserved symbols is less than 4, the number of reserved symbols is updated by adding "1", and the ordinary symbol judgment information (random value for hit determination, random value for determining ordinary symbols, fluctuation pattern of ordinary symbols) is updated. Random value for determination) is acquired, and the vacant storage sections are searched in order from the first storage section in the normal symbol storage area, and the acquired ordinary symbol determination information is stored in the empty storage section and input. Control processing ends.

(Input processing of the first starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 17. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the first starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process moves to step S230-2, and if the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current 1 Finish the starting port detection switch input process.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-prize ball counter used for prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, the main CPU 110a updates the 3-prize ball counter used for prize balls. A random value for jackpot determination, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for reach determination, a random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination) is acquired.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area is less than four. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process moves to step S230-5, and if the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first start The mouth detection switch input process ends.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and updating it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the main CPU 110a performs processing to update the first special symbol pending number (U1). A first special figure reservation number designation command corresponding to the figure reservation number (U1) is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the first special figure reservation number designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the first special figure reservation number.

The main CPU 110a stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the first special symbol reservation storage area in step S230-7. Specifically, since the first special symbol holding storage area is divided into the first storage part to the fourth storage part, the empty storage parts are searched in order from the first storage part, and the empty storage part is searched in order. The special figure determination information obtained in the above is stored.

As a result of the above, the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area stores special symbol determination information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, and special symbol fluctuation pattern determination). A first pending memory consisting of random numbers, etc.) will be stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current gaming state is a non-time-saving gaming state. If it is in the non-time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step S230-9, and if it is not in the non-time-saving gaming state, the current first starting opening detection switch input process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-9. In this first preliminary determination process, the preliminary determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the currently acquired special symbol determination information (first pending memory) is stored before the special symbol fluctuation display based on the determination information is performed. A planned variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets a first prefetch designation command corresponding to the schedule fluctuation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process in step S230-8 in the performance transmission data storage area, and 1 Finish the starting port detection switch input process.

As a result, the first prefetch designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 starts changing the special symbol corresponding to the first prefetch designation command. It is possible to execute a prefetched preview performance that executes a predetermined preview performance over a plurality of variable displays. Note that the pre-read preview effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the board lighting device 76. This is done using

Regarding the second starting port detection switch input process, the first starting port detection switch 45a, the first starting port 45, the first special symbol reservation storage area, the first reservation memory, the first special symbol reservation number (U1), The first special symbol reservation number designation command, the first preliminary determination process, and the first prefetch designation command are respectively transmitted to the second starting port detection switch 47a, the second starting port 47, the second special symbol pending storage area, the second pending storage, What is necessary is to read it as the second special figure reservation number (U2), the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second preliminary determination process, and the second pre-reading designation command.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 18. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric line processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric line processing data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, The current special map special electric train control process ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the variable display of the special symbol is started based on the judgment result of the reserved memory (special figure judgment information), the variable time is set, and the start command (special figure judgment information) is started. Performs processing for transmitting (symbol memory designation command, gaming state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) to the production control board 130, processing for changing special symbol special electric processing data to "1", etc. A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) is executed. The details of the special symbol storage determination process will be described later.

If the special pattern special electric processing data = 1, the variable display of the special pattern is stopped as the variation time elapses, the stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set, and the stop command (special pattern stop command) is produced and controlled. A special symbol variation process (step S320) is executed to perform a process for transmitting to the board 130 and a process for changing the special figure special electric process data to "2".

If the special pattern special electricity processing data = 2, the special pattern special electricity processing data will be changed to "0" if the special symbol is a loss as the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has passed, and if it is a jackpot special symbol, it will be a jackpot. The opening time of the game is set, and processing for transmitting an opening designation command to the performance control board 130 and special symbol stop processing (step S330) for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "3" are executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the round game is started as the opening time of the jackpot game has elapsed, and the jackpot is executed based on the processing for transmitting the round number designation command to the production control board 130 and the end of the final round game. Executes jackpot game processing (step S340) for setting the ending time of the game and transmitting an ending designation command to the production control board 130, processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "4", etc. do.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process for ending the jackpot game as the ending time passes, and the game state after the jackpot ends (low-accuracy time-saving game state, high-accuracy time-saving game state, high probability number of times, time-saving number) ), a jackpot game end process (step S350) is executed to perform a process to set the special figure special electric line process data to "0", etc.

In addition, the number of executions of variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the end of the jackpot gaming state is counted (whether it is a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or a variable probability gaming state). If the variable display of the special symbol is not in the fixed variable gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 800 times), the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 600 times). The first special time-saving state (time-saving game state) may be caused to occur over the period up to (up to). In this first special time-saving game state, the same various tables (jackpot determination table, special symbol determination table, special pattern variation pattern determination table, preliminary determination table, etc.) as in the normal time-saving game state are used, but they are different from the normal time-saving game state. For example, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is lower than in the normal time-saving gaming state (127/128) (for example, the probability is higher than in the non-time-saving state). 100/128 or 1/128 which is the same probability as in the non-time saving state), so that the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols is the same as in the normal time saving gaming state.

Also, as a result of the jackpot determination, a special loss different from the normal loss is provided, and as a result of the variable display of the special symbol that won the special loss, when the special loss special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is not a probability variable game state. , the second special time-saving state (time-saving game state) may be generated for a predetermined number of times (for example, until the variable display of special symbols is executed 50 times). In this second special time saving state, the same various tables (jackpot determination table, special symbol determination table, special pattern variation pattern determination table, advance determination table, etc.) as in the normal time saving gaming state are used, but they are different from the normal time saving gaming state. For example, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is lower than in the normal time-saving gaming state (127/128) (for example, the probability is higher than in the non-time-saving state). 100/128 or 1/128 which is the same probability as in the non-time saving state), so that the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols is the same as in the normal time saving game state.

Furthermore, if a special loss is won during the normal time-saving gaming state and the special losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal time-saving gaming state and the second special time-saving state may be caused to overlap. In this case, it is preferable to maintain the performance of the normal time-saving gaming state (the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery, the (average) fluctuation time of the normal symbols, etc.).

In addition, if the normal time-saving gaming state and the second special time-saving gaming state overlap, the performance of the normal time-saving gaming state (probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, (average) fluctuation time of the normal symbol, etc.) ), and if the normal time-saving gaming state ends first and entering the second special time-saving state, the performance of the normal time-saving gaming state (probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, (average) fluctuation of the normal symbol) It would be a good idea to take over the time (time, etc.).

Further, if a special loss is won during the first special time saving state and the special losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special time saving state and the second special time saving state may be caused to overlap. However, the first special time saving state may be maintained and the second special time saving state may not occur.

In addition, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery in the non-time saving state and various time saving states (normal time saving gaming state, first special time saving state, second special time saving state) is set to be the same (for example, 120/128), and Also, the (average) fluctuation time of the normal symbols in various time-saving states may be shortened.

(Special symbol memory determination processing of main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the special symbol is not in the variable display state, the process moves to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process goes to step S310-4. move.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second special figure reservation number (U2) by subtracting "1," and in step S310-6, the second special figure reservation number (U2) corresponds to the second special figure reservation number (U2) after the subtraction. A special symbol storage designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, sets the gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area. Shift processing is performed on the data stored in the storage section, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage sections is shifted to the previous storage section.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure judgment information stored in the first storage part of the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage part which is the special figure judgment information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage part. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-5, and if the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process goes to step S319-1. move.

The main CPU 110a updates the first special figure reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the main CPU 110a updates the special figure reservation number (U1) corresponding to the first special figure reservation number (U1) after the subtraction. A symbol storage designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores it in the first special symbol holding storage area. Shift processing is performed on the data, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the second special symbol reservation number (U2) after subtraction is stored in the main RAM 110c. set in a predetermined area. As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and shifted (the second special figure reservation number is However, in the order in which the game balls enter the starting hole, the first special figure judgment information holding storage area or the second special drawing judgment information holding storage area is It may be shifted (subtracting the number of reserved 1st special symbols and the number of reserved 2nd special symbols in the winning order), or the 1st special symbol determination information retention storage area may be prioritized over the 2nd special symbol determination information retention storage area. You may also shift (subtract the first special figure reservation number with priority over the second special figure reservation number).

The main CPU 110a performs jackpot determination processing in step S311. Specifically, the special figure determination information (random value for jackpot determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is checked against the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 10, and a jackpot is determined. Determine whether or not. In addition, the special symbol determination information (random value for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is checked against the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, and the special symbol is stopped. Performs processing to determine the type of.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable performance.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing in step S313. Specifically, the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is checked against the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined. Performs processing to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time).

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variable performance pattern which is a performance mode of a variable performance performed during the variable display of special symbols is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , starts changing display of special symbols. As a result, the LED lighting data for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of step S800, so that the first A variable display of special symbols will be performed on the special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1", and ends the current special symbol memory determination process. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process moves to step S319-2. In addition, the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the special symbols are not displayed fluctuating and the special game (jackpot game) is not being executed, but the requirement also includes that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. It's okay.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is completed. As a result, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demonstration performance to encourage the player to play.

(Main processing of the production control section)
Next, the main processing of the production control section 130m will be explained using FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the production control section 130m.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 130b, flags etc. stored in the sub RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial settings is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupts in step E30, and performs sub random number update processing in step E40. Specifically, processing is performed to update various random numbers stored in the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control section)
The timer interrupt processing of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) in the production control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and when there is an input, processing is performed to set predetermined data.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, the process determines whether or not various commands are being transmitted from the main control board 110, and stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c when various commands are being transmitted. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change/confirmation process in step E170. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if a setting change designation command has been received, the above-mentioned settings are A process for executing change notification is performed, and if a setting confirmation designation command is received, a process for executing the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power-on designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the power-on designation command has been received, processing is performed to execute a power-on notification. More specifically, a power-on notification command is sent to the display control unit 140 to display a power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and to output audio. For example, the device 9 may output a power-on sound.

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the power restoration designation command has been received, processing is performed to execute a power failure restoration notification. In detail, a power recovery notification command is sent to the display control unit 140 to display a power recovery screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and to output audio. For example, the device 9 may output a power restoration sound.

The sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing in step E300. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received, and if a command has been received, performs processing to perform a customer waiting demonstration effect after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. conduct. To be more specific, a customer waiting production command is sent to the display control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demonstration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and to A customer waiting demo sound is outputted from the output device 9. The details of the customer waiting performance process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs a gaming state update process in step E350. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received, and if it has been received, updates the gaming state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs pending information update processing in step E400. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to, and it is determined whether or not a command for specifying the number of special drawings reserved or a command for specifying the number of regular drawings reserved is received, and if the command is received, it is stored (ascertained) in the sub-RAM 130c. ), the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of second reserved special symbols, the number of regular symbols, etc. are updated.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch effect process. Specifically, the receiving buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether a prefetch designation command or a special figure variation pattern designation command is received, and if so, the icon changes as a prefetch-related effect. Performs processing related to production, continuous preview production, and lamp change production. Note that the details of the look-ahead performance processing will be described later.

The "icon change performance" is a type of pre-read preview performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by changing the pending icon and the display mode of the icon. In the present embodiment, an icon change effect for a pending icon may be referred to as a "hold icon change effect" and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as "the icon change effect."

The "continuous notice performance" is a type of advance notice performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by executing a predetermined performance over one or more variable performances.
The "lamp change performance" is a type of advance notice performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by changing the light emission mode of the winning slot lamp over one or more variable performances.

The sub CPU 130a performs special figure special electric production processing in step E600. Specifically, with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol stop designation command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round number designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command are executed. etc., and if so, performs processing to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

In step E700, the sub CPU 130a performs a general figure and general electric display process. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c and receives a normal symbol designation command, a regular symbol variation pattern designation command, a regular symbol stop designation command, a winning opening designation command, a winning ending designation command, etc. It is determined whether or not the command is received, and if the command is received, processing is performed to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

The sub CPU 130a performs production mode update processing in step E800. Specifically, a production mode (production stage) in which production elements (background image, production image, production sound, BGM, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined. As for the update conditions according to the progress of the game (changes in the game state, winning of the mode update lottery at the start of the variable effect, start of the variable effect after the SP/SPSP reach effect is executed which results in a loss) etc.) is satisfied, and if the update condition is satisfied, processing is performed to update the presentation mode to any one of a plurality of presentation modes.

"Production mode" includes production modes A to C set in the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state), production mode D to E set in the variable probability gaming state (high probability non time saving gaming state), and production mode D to E set in the variable probability gaming state (high probability non time saving gaming state). Performance modes FG are provided which are set in the game state (low-accuracy time-saving game state: including the above-mentioned first special time-saving state and second special time-saving state). In addition, when the power is turned on and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state (for example, after changing settings, clearing RWM, confirming settings, etc.), the first performance mode set is always performance mode A, and when the power is turned on, When the power is turned on, the production mode that is set first is always production mode D, and when the power is turned on and the time-saving gaming state is controlled, the production mode that is first set is always production mode D. is always in production mode F.

In addition, in production modes A to C, the production pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters corresponding to the numbers (decoration part) + design effect images (decoration part) that decorate the backgrounds of the numbers and characters, Numbers and character designs differ between production modes. In the performance modes D to F, the performance pattern 70a is composed only of numbers (identification characters), and the design of the numbers is common among the performance modes. Furthermore, in the production modes A to F, the background image corresponding to each production mode scrolls left and right (reciprocating motion).

In addition, regardless of the production mode, the production pattern 70a can be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory action) and then scrolled (updated to another production pattern) at the start of the variable production, but in production mode A. ~C (normal game state), if the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is started from the state where the first special symbol pending number is "1" or "2", before the scroll display While the reduced display (preparatory action) of the performance symbol 70a is performed, the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is started from the state where the first special symbol pending number is "3" or "4". In this case, the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a is not performed before the scroll display, and in production modes D to G (specific game states), the first special symbol pending number is in the state of "1" to "4". When the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is started, the performance symbol 70a is displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation) before the scroll display. In other words, the rate at which the reduced display (preparatory action) of the performance symbol 70a is executed is when the first variable performance is executed during the normal gaming state and when the first variable performance is executed during the specific gaming state. are different. Therefore, it is possible to change the performance mode at the start of the first variable performance according to the game state (performance mode), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in performance modes D to G (specific game states), when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed from a state where the first special symbol pending number is "1" to "4", , when the reduced display (preparatory action) of the performance symbol 70a is performed before the scroll display, and the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed from the state where the second special symbol pending number is "1" , the performance symbol 70a is displayed in a reduced size (preparatory action) before being scrolled, and the second variation performance (variation of the second special symbol Display) is executed, the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect pattern 70a is not performed before the scroll display. In other words, the rate at which the reduced display (preparatory action) of the performance symbol 70a is executed is when the first variable performance is executed during a specific gaming state and when the second variable performance is executed during a specific gaming state. are different. Therefore, it is possible to change the performance mode at the start of the first variable performance according to the game state (performance mode), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the preparatory action before scrolling the performance symbol 70a may be displayed in an enlarged manner instead of being displayed in a reduced size, or may be displayed in a floating manner that floats upward from the stop position. In addition, in production modes D to G (specific game states), when the first variable production (variable display of the first special symbol) is started, the preparation operation of the production symbol 70a is not performed before the scroll display. It's okay.

In addition, when the performance pattern 70a performs a preparatory action at the start of the variable performance, the three performance symbols 70a start scrolling in the order of left-center-right, and when the preparatory action is not performed, the three performance patterns 70a The effect pattern 70a may start scrolling display at the same time.

In addition, regarding the update conditions of the performance mode, the first special symbol during the specific gaming state is The case where the variable effect corresponding to the variable display (first variable effect) is executed is more difficult to win the mode update lottery, and the SP/SPSP reach effect that would result in a loss is less likely to be executed. In the latter case, the update condition for the production mode is more difficult to satisfy. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the specific game state is more effective than the case where the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the specific game state (first variable display). (Second variable effect) is more likely to win the mode update lottery, and the SP/SPSP reach effect that results in a loss is more likely to be executed, so the latter is better than the former. The update conditions are more likely to be met. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in a specific game state where the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the display mode of the first pending icon is the same in production modes A to C, but by changing the display mode of the first pending icon for each production mode, there are three types of display modes in the normal gaming state. The first pending icon may be displayed. In addition, although the display mode of the second hold icon is the same in the production modes D to G, the display mode of the second hold icon is different between the production modes D to E and the production mode F to G. The second pending icon may be displayed in two types of display modes in the gaming state.

In addition, the production mode (background image, display mode of production symbols, BGM, etc.) is updated according to the progress of the game, but depending on the operation of the production button 17 while waiting for a customer or during variable production. The player may be able to change the performance mode (background image, display mode of performance symbols, BGM, etc.). In addition, if an operation to change the production mode is performed during a fluctuating performance, the production mode may be changed at the time when the change operation is performed, or the production mode may be changed at the time the fluctuating performance in progress is completed. The mode may be changed, or the production mode may be changed when the next variable production starts.

For example, in the normal gaming state, if an operation to change the production mode is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable production), the next operation to be executed is the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable display). To change the performance mode (background image, display mode of performance symbols, BGM, etc.) even in a variable performance). In addition, in the normal gaming state, if the production mode change operation is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable production), the next thing to be executed is the variable display of the first special symbol (the first Change the production mode even if it is a variable production). In this way, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player in changing the performance mode (performance element used in the variable performance), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in a specific game state, if an operation to change the production mode is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable production), the next thing to be executed is the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable display). To change the performance mode (background image, display mode of performance symbols, BGM, etc.) even in a variable performance). In addition, in a specific game state, if an operation to change the production mode is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable production), the next thing to be executed is the variable display of the first special symbol (the first variable display). Change the production mode even if it is a variable production). In this way, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player in changing the performance mode (performance element used in the variable performance), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received, and if so, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command is performed. , or terminate the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, it performs processes such as outputting signals such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150.

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting performance processing by the performance control department)
The customer waiting performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting performance processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E300-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the customer waiting state designation command has not been received, the process moves to step E300-4, and if the customer waiting state designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E300-2 until the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance. The demo standby time determination table (see FIG. 23) for determining the standby time of is selected. Note that details of the demonstration standby time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demo standby time and sets it in the demo standby timer. Specifically, with reference to the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 23, one demonstration standby time is determined from among a plurality of demonstration standby times based on the current gaming state and the current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is on standby for a demonstration. Specifically, it is determined whether a demonstration standby timer is set. If the demo is not on standby, the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated as not to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance, and if the demo is on standby, the demo waiting timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. .

The sub CPU 130a determines whether the demo standby timer=0 in step E300-6. If the demo standby timer is not 0, it is assumed that the customer waiting demonstration performance has not yet been executed, and the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated.If the demo waiting timer = 0, the customer waiting demonstration performance is executed in step E300-7. The command is set in the transmission buffer and the current customer waiting performance process is ended. As a result, a customer waiting demonstration performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a customer waiting demonstration performance that appeals to the player to play the game is executed.

(Demo standby time determination table)
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a demonstration waiting time determination table that is referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration production.

In the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 23, the gaming state, the current state, and the selected demo standby time are associated with each other. Four types of demonstration standby times from 30 seconds to 80 seconds are set for the demonstration standby time in the normal gaming state, and four types of demonstration standby times from 35 seconds to 85 seconds are set for the demonstration standby time in the specific gaming state. is set.

The first characteristics of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The demonstration waiting time after the is displayed statically, the demonstration waiting time after the fluctuating display of the production symbol ends (the fluctuation time has elapsed) and the production symbol is statically displayed, and the demonstration symbol after the end of the customer waiting demo production. The difference is that the waiting time for the demonstration after it is displayed statically is different. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the current state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The second feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 23 is that the fluctuating display of the performance symbols ends (variation The point is that the demonstration waiting time is longer after the performance pattern is displayed statically after the time has elapsed. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The third feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the demonstration pattern waits for a longer time after the performance symbols are displayed statically on the image display device. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fourth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the waiting time for the demonstration after the design is statically displayed is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

A fifth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 23 is that the demonstration standby time is the shortest after the performance symbols are statically displayed after the end of the customer waiting demonstration performance. Therefore, the appeal of the game to players can be effectively increased, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The sixth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 23 is that each demonstration standby time in a specific gaming state (low probability time saving gaming state, high probability time saving gaming state) is longer than each demonstration waiting time in the normal gaming state. The point is that it is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Pre-reading performance processing by the performance control unit)
Using FIG. 24, the pre-reading performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be explained. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the pre-reading performance processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process for determining whether or not to perform the icon change effect, the mode of effect of the icon change effect, and the like. Note that details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a executes the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process in step E520 (changes the already displayed pending icon or the display mode of the icon). Perform execution processing. Note that details of the icon change effect execution process will be described later.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance determination process for determining whether to execute the continuous preview performance, the presentation mode of the continuous preview performance, and the like. Note that details of the continuous preview performance determination process will be described later.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance execution process for executing the continuous preview performance determined to be executed in the continuous preview performance determination process. Note that details of the continuous preview performance determination process will be described later.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process to execute a lamp change effect (lights up the prize opening lamp NR in a light emission mode corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed), and The prefetching performance processing ends. The details of the lamp change effect execution process will be described later.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing icon change performance determination processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E510-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process moves to step E510-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current icon change effect determination process is ended.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the performance contents (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for the icon change effect. If it is the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-7.

The "executable period of icon change performance" refers to a case where a jackpot game is not being executed, an icon change performance is not being executed, or an icon change performance is not scheduled to be executed. Note that any one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. In addition, if the received prefetch designation command is based on winning at the first starting port 45, it is a normal gaming state, and the received prefetching designation command is based on winning at the second starting port 47. In some cases, it may be provided that the game is in a specific gaming state (a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), or the like.

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a obtains a random value for determining the icon display mode for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-5. , selects the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 26) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Note that details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode in step E510-6. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. One icon final display mode is determined from among the icon final display modes.

In step E510-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a display mode (special icon) in which an icon change effect is executed. If the display mode is such that an icon change effect is executed, the process moves to step E510-9, and if the display mode is not a display mode that executes an icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-12.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 24) for determining a change scenario for the icon change effect. Note that details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the pending icon appears until it disappears.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, with reference to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. One change scenario is determined from among the change scenarios.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode initially displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and displays the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination process is ended. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , a predetermined sound effect will be output.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) will be output.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode. The type of notification sound when the icon is generated for each type is described.

The final icon display mode includes a white icon as a normal icon, a blue icon and a red icon as special icons that make you expect a jackpot game to be played (suggesting that a jackpot game may be played). , and a rainbow icon are set.

The expectation level of winning a jackpot related to special icons increases in the order of (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon, and the rainbow icon is an icon that is guaranteed to be a jackpot.

When the white icon is displayed on the image display device, the first occurrence alarm sound is output, when the blue icon is displayed, the second occurrence alarm sound is output, and when the red icon is displayed, the second occurrence alarm sound is output. , the third occurrence notification sound is output, and when the rainbow icon is displayed, the fourth occurrence notification sound is set to be output.

In addition, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 in the normal gaming state, which one of the first to fourth generation notification sounds is played depending on the display mode at the time when the display of the first hold icon based on the winning is started. However, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the normal gaming state, none of the first to fourth generation notification sounds are output.

In addition, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 47 in a specific gaming state, which one of the second to fourth generation notification sounds is generated depending on the display mode at the time when the display of the second hold icon based on the winning is started. is output (in the case of a white icon, the first generation notification sound is not output), but if a game ball enters the first starting port 45 in a specific game state, the first to None of the four occurrence notification sounds is output.

Here, the first feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 26 is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is varied according to the scheduled variation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the planned variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, special icons are selected at a higher rate than when the planned variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not result in reach. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, depending on the display mode of the hold icon, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Moreover, as a second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. An example of this is that the occurrence notification sound is more likely to be output when the game ball wins at 45. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the normal game state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the first starting hole 45 than in the specific game state in which the ball is hit right, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a third feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. An example of this is that the occurrence notification sound is more likely to be output when the game ball wins in 47. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in a specific game state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second starting port 47, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 26, the normal icon (white icon) is not selected as the icon final display mode in the case of a jackpot, but it may be selected. .

In addition, different notification sounds were set for each of the multiple icon display modes (4 types), but the notification sound when a white icon was generated changed to a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon. There may be two types of sound, including a time change notification sound, or the notification sound may not be output when a white icon is generated, and the notification sound may be output only when the icon changes to one of the modes. Further, for the rainbow icon that is certain to be a jackpot, a dedicated notification sound may be provided and there may be three types.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, the generated notification sound is not outputted, but the generated notification sound is output at a lower rate than when a game ball enters the first starting port 45. Instead of not outputting the notification sound when a game ball hits the first starting port 45 in a specific gaming state, the notification sound may be output more than when the game ball hits the second starting port 47. The occurrence notification sound may be output at a low rate.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the selected change scenario, and is used as a reference. Preliminary changes in each change scenario and how icons are updated in the changes are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation (the pending icon change effect is executed), but does not change during the execution of the variation (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, Scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation and during the execution of the variation (pending icon change effect and the icon change effect is executed) ) scenario (for example, scenario 15, etc.) is set.

In addition, in the change scenario determination table of this embodiment, a scenario is determined in which the display mode of the icon is changed regardless of whether or not a reach effect (a reach effect other than a normal reach effect may be performed) is executed in advance variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by a change scenario determination table that uses as a determining factor whether or not a reach effect that suggests that a jackpot game may be executed in advance variation is executed. Alternatively, the scenario in which the When using such a change scenario determination table, the icon display mode does not change during the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the icon display mode does not change during the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that changes in the display mode occur. In addition, the display mode of the icon changes during the pre-variation in which a reach effect is executed, and the pre-variation in which a reach effect is not executed, but the reach effect is lower than during the pre-variation in which a reach effect is executed. Various scenarios may be set in such a way that changes in the display mode of the icon occur at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation in which the change is not executed.

(Icon change performance execution processing of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance execution process of the performance control unit 130m will be described using FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing icon change performance execution processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E520-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a special figure variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process moves to step E520-2, and if the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the current icon change production execution process is ended.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E520-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to change (update) the display mode in the current variable performance. Determine whether there is an icon. If there is a pending icon that changes the display mode, the process moves to step E520-4, and if there is no pending icon that changes the display mode, the process moves to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table for hold icons (see FIG. 29) for determining a change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. Note that details of the change pattern determination table for pending icons will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a pending icon change pattern in step E520-5. Specifically, with reference to the pending icon change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 29, one of the multiple pending icon change patterns is selected based on the mode of pending icon change in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%). One pending icon change pattern is determined from the following.

In step E520-6, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change production command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and is displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the pending icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the pending icon will change, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) will be output.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the scenario (change scenario, non-change scenario) of the icon is stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the scenario of the icon is stored, the process moves to step E520-8, and if the scenario of the icon is not stored, the current icon change effect execution process is ended.

In step E520-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-9, and if there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the current icon change effect execution process is ended.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a selects from among the change pattern determination tables for a plurality of icons for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed in the current variation performance. A change pattern determination table (see FIG. 30) for the icon corresponding to the change stage at which the icon changes is selected. Note that details of the change pattern determination table for the icon according to the change stage will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-10. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for the selected icon shown in FIG. 30, based on the mode of the icon change in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, One icon change pattern is determined from among the plurality of icon change patterns.

In step E520-11, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect execution process. As a result, a change production command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the icon will change, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) will be output.

(Change pattern determination table for pending icon)
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for hold icons that is referred to when determining a change pattern for hold icons.

The pending icon change pattern determination table is associated with the pending icon change mode in the current variation performance, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the selected pending icon change pattern. For reference, the timing of occurrence of a pending icon change effect and the change stage in each pending icon change pattern are described.

The hold icon change pattern includes normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shifted and displayed (at the start of variation) in response to the icon disappearing. , normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes while changing with the output of a sound effect, and the display of the icon as a character appears and an action effect that acts on the icon from the character as a starting point is performed. A character action change pattern 01 in which the aspect changes, and a change notification pattern indicating that the display form of the icon changes as a result of the fluctuation effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and an effect effect that acts on the pending icon using the change notification pattern as a starting point. A symbol effect change pattern 01 is set in which the display mode of the pending icon changes as a result of this change.

The timing at which the pending icon change effect occurs is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect: when the variable effect starts (at the start of the change), when the change effect is being executed (during change), and when the change effect occurs during the change effect. There are times when the 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the pending icon includes 1UP, which changes the display mode of the jackpot winning expectation level to one level higher (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, or a change from a blue icon to a red icon), and a jackpot winning expectation level. 2UP (for example, change from a white icon to a red icon) is set to change the display mode to a two-step higher display mode.

Note that, although the change effect generation timing of the pending icon is set to the above three timings, it is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that a variable performance is being executed (during variation) until a reach is established, a normal reach is being executed, an SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, etc.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the icon that is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, and FIG. This is a table to be referred to, and FIG. 30(b) is a table to be referred to when changing the display mode of the icon in two steps.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of the icon change in the current variation performance, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the timing at which the icon change effect occurs and the change stage in each icon change pattern are described.

The icon change patterns include normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes at the start of the variation accompanied by the output of a sound effect, and normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes during the variation accompanied by the output of a sound effect. A change pattern 02 and a character effect change pattern 01 are set in which a character appears and an action effect is performed that acts on the icon starting from the character and the display mode of the icon changes.

The timing at which the change effect of the icon occurs is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and is classified as when the change effect is started (at the start of change), during the execution of the change effect (during change), and when the change effect is in progress. There are times when the 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the icon includes 1UP, which changes the display mode of the jackpot winning expectation to one level higher (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, a change from a blue icon to a red icon), and a jackpot winning expectation. 2UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a red icon, a change from a blue icon to a rainbow icon) is set to change the display mode to a higher level by two levels.

Note that in the change pattern determination table for the icon of this embodiment, the symbol effect change pattern 01 is not selected, but may be selected. For example, in a fluctuating performance that performs a pseudo-continuous performance, when the temporary stop display of the performance symbol 70a before the pseudo-variation is performed, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed.

"Pseudo continuous performance" is a fluctuating display of performance symbols as if multiple times in response to a jackpot determination based on winning (ball landing) in one starting hole (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47). In order to make it appear as if the game has been executed, all prizes will be awarded within the special figure fluctuation time determined for each winning (ball entering) into the starting hole (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47). This is a special form of fluctuating display of the performance symbol in which a re-fluctuation display in which the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops and then starts fluctuating again is performed once or multiple times. Further, a flame effect is displayed around the performance pattern 70a at the timing when the performance pattern 70a temporarily stops, and the color of the flame effect changes from blue to red each time the temporary stop and re-variation are repeated.

In addition, although the change effect generation timing of the said icon was set to the above-mentioned two timings, it is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that a variable performance is being executed (during variation) until a reach is established, a normal reach is being executed, an SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, etc.

(Continuous preview production decision processing by production control unit)
The continuous preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing continuous preview performance determination processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E530-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process moves to step E530-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current continuous preview performance determination process is ended.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the performance contents (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is an executable period for continuous preview presentation. If it is the executable period for continuous notice performances (pre-read action production, pre-read effect production, pre-read vibration production, pre-read zone production, pre-read chance production), the process moves to step E530-4, and the continuous notice production can be executed. If it is not within the period, it is assumed that the continuous preview effect based on the currently received prefetch designation command will not be executed, and the process moves to step E530-18.

In the "pre-reading motion performance", a special game is executed by executing an operation performance (notice performance) that operates the second movable member 74 in a predetermined manner at the timing immediately after the start of the variable performance in one or more variable performances. It is a performance that intermittently hints at the level of expectation.

"Pre-reading effect production" is an effect production (notice production) that displays an effect image of a predetermined color around the production pattern 70a at the timing immediately after the start of the variation production in one or more variation productions (during preparation, before scrolling). ) is a performance that intermittently suggests the expectation that a special game will be executed.

"Pre-reading vibration performance" is the expectation level that a special game will be executed by executing a vibration performance (notice performance) that vibrates the performance button 17 in a predetermined manner at the timing immediately after the start of the variable performance in one or more variable performances. It is a performance that intermittently suggests that.

"Pre-reading zone performance" refers to the level of expectation that a special game will be executed by executing a mid-zone performance (notice performance) that displays a zone image (zone background image) from a predetermined timing in one or more variable performances. It is a performance that continuously suggests the following.

"Look-ahead chance performance" is a performance that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by stopping and displaying the performance symbols 70a in an array with a predetermined regularity in one or more variable performances. It has become.

The "executable period of continuous notice performance" means that there is no continuous notice performance in advance pending, that the jackpot game is not in progress, and that a prefetch designation command based on winning in the first starting opening 45 is received. In this case, it is a normal gaming state, and when a prefetch designation command based on winning to the second starting port 47 is received, it is a specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), etc. Can be mentioned.

In step E530-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the continuous notice type determination table (see FIGS. 32 and 33) according to the current production mode, and in step E530-5, refers to the continuous notice type determination table and The type of notice (whether or not to execute a continuous notice performance, and the type of continuous notice performance to be executed) is determined. Note that details of the continuous notice type determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the type of continuous preview is to execute a continuous preview effect. If the continuous notice effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-18, and if the continuous notice effect is to be executed, in step E530-7, the continuous notice scenario determination table (Fig. 34 , see FIG. 35). Note that details of the continuous notice scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type for which the prefetch action effect is to be executed has been determined. If the prefetching motion effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-10, and if the prefetching motion effect is to be executed, in step E530-9, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referred to and the preview scenario of the prefetching motion effect is determined. is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type for which the prefetch effect production is to be executed has been determined. If the look-ahead effect performance is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-12, and if the look-ahead effect performance is to be executed, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referred to in step E530-11, and the preview scenario of the look-ahead effect performance is determined. is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous notice type for which the pre-read vibration effect is to be executed has been determined. If the pre-reading vibration effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-14, and if the pre-reading vibration effect is to be executed, in step E530-13, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to and the preview scenario of the pre-read vibration effect is determined. is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-14, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type for which the look-ahead zone effect is to be executed has been determined. If the lookahead zone effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-16, and if the lookahead zone effect is to be executed, in step E530-15, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referred to and the preview scenario of the lookahead zone effect is determined. is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-16, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type for executing the look-ahead chance effect has been determined. If the pre-reading chance effect is not to be executed, the current continuous notice effect determination process is ended, and if the pre-reading chance effect is to be executed, in step E530-17, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to and the pre-read chance effect is executed. A preview scenario for the eye effect is determined and set in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current continuous preview effect determination process is completed.

In step E530-18, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-previous scenario for the continuous preview performance (a preview scenario indicating that the continuous preview performance will not be executed), sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and executes the current continuous preview performance. End the determination process.

Note that the preview scenario or the non-previous scenario set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to in the above-described continuous preview performance execution process of step E540, and the process for executing the continuous preview performance or the continuous preview performance is executed. Steps will be taken to prevent this from happening.

As described above, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 31, in the normal game state, the look-ahead motion performance is not executed in the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance), so in the normal game state, The second movable member 74 operates (moves) more when the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect) is executed than when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable effect) is executed. It's getting easier. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect related to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable presentation) in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 31, in the normal game state, in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect), the look-ahead effect effect (effect image is displayed around the effect image 70a) On the other hand, in a specific game state, the look-ahead effect performance is not executed in the variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production), so the variation of the first special symbol during the normal gaming state is possible. The rate at which the look-ahead effect performance is executed differs depending on when the display (first variable performance) is executed and when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed during a specific game state. It looks like this. Therefore, it is possible to make a difference in the performance effect at the start of the first variable performance between the normal game state and the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 31, in a specific game state, a look-ahead effect effect (effect image is displayed around the effect image 70a) is displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect). On the other hand, since the look-ahead effect performance can be executed in the variable display of the second special symbol (the second variable display), the variable display of the first special symbol (the first The rate at which the look-ahead effect performance is executed is now different depending on when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable display) is executed during a specific gaming state. There is. Therefore, during a specific game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed in a specific game state, the look-ahead effect effect may be executed, and in this case, the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed. It is preferable to set the rate to be lower than that when (second variable effect) is executed.

Moreover, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. The vibration performance is easier to perform when the variable display of the first special symbol (variable performance) is performed than when the fluctuating display of the special symbol (fluctuation performance) is performed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect related to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable presentation) in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 31, in the specific game state, the pre-reading action performance is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (variable performance), so in the specific game state, the first The second movable member 74 operates (moves) more easily when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable effect) is executed than when the variable display of the special symbol (variable effect) is executed. ing. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance) in a specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Moreover, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. The vibration performance is easier to perform when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance) is performed than when the variable display of the special symbol (fluctuation performance) is performed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance) in a specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous preview effect determination process shown in FIG. 31, in the normal game state, the look-ahead zone effect (background change) can be executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect); In a specific game state, the look-ahead zone effect (background change) is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect), so the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is performed during the normal gaming state. When the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed during a specific game state, the pre-reading zone effect (background change) is more difficult to execute than when this is executed. Therefore, during the normal game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 31, in a specific game state, the look-ahead zone performance (background change) is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance), while the second Since the look-ahead zone effect can be executed in the variable display of special symbols (second variable effect), it is possible to execute the pre-read zone effect during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) than when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed during a specific game state. When the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) is executed during a specific game state, the look-ahead zone effect (background change) is easier to execute. Therefore, during a specific game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed in a specific gaming state, the look-ahead zone effect may be executed, and in this case, the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed. It is preferable to set the rate to be lower than that when (second variable effect) is executed.

According to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 31, in the normal game state, the look-ahead chance performance can be executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance), but in the specific game state, In this case, since the look-ahead chance effect is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect), it is more difficult than when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed during the specific game state. When the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed during the normal game state, the look-ahead chance effect is more likely to be executed. Therefore, during the normal game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 31, in a specific game state, the look-ahead chance performance is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance), while the look-ahead chance performance is Since the look-ahead chance effect can be executed in the variable display (second variable effect), the specific game is more effective than when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed during the specific game state. When the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) is executed during the state, the look-ahead chance effect is more likely to be executed. Therefore, during a specific game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

In addition, when a variable display of the first special symbol (first variable display) is executed in a specific game state, a look-ahead chance display may be executed, and in this case, the variable display of the second special symbol It is preferable to set the ratio lower than that when the display (second variable effect) is executed.

(Continuous notice type determination table)
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a continuous notice type determination table that is referred to in order to determine the continuous notice type in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. ) is a diagram showing a continuous preview performance determination table that is referred to in order to determine the continuous preview type.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the continuous notice type determination table associates the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each continuous notice type, and the selected continuous notice type. , Continuous notice types include ``non-execution'', which does not execute continuous notice effects, ``pre-read motion effect'', ``pre-read effect effect'', and ``pre-read vibration effect'', in which one type of continuous notice effect is executed. , ``Look-ahead zone performance'', ``Look-ahead chance performance'', ``Look-ahead effect performance & Look-ahead vibration performance'', and ``Look-ahead motion performance & Look-ahead zone performance'' where two types of continuous notice effects are executed. It is being

For example, if the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern) in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) is a loss and the SP reach performance is executed, "non-execution" is determined at 79%, and 6 % determines the "pre-reading effect effect", 5% determines the "pre-reading chance effect", 4% determines the "pre-reading motion effect", 3% determines the "pre-reading vibration effect", and 2% At 1%, the "look-ahead zone performance" is determined, and at 1%, the "look-ahead effect performance & look-ahead vibration performance" is determined.

(Continuous preview performance scenario determination table)
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a continuous notice scenario determination table for performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a continuous notice scenario determination table for performance modes D to G (specific gaming state). It is a diagram.

The continuous notice scenario determination table is associated with the number of special symbols on hold, the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario, and the selected notice scenario. Preliminary fluctuations (before 4 fluctuations, before 3 fluctuations, before 2 fluctuations, before 1 fluctuation) and the performance mode of continuous preview performance in the fluctuations are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

The presentation mode of "weak notice" differs depending on the type of continuous notice, and in the case of a look-ahead motion production, the second movable member 74 emits blue light and performs a weak motion, and a weak motion sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead effect production, a blue effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a, and a blue effect sound effect is output, and in the case of a look-ahead vibration production, the production button The vibrator for vibrating the zone 17 vibrates weakly for one second, and the production button 17 blinks white. In the case of a pre-read zone production, a blue zone image (zone background image) is displayed, This means that a zone sound effect is output, and in the case of a look-ahead chance performance, the performance symbols 70a are stopped and displayed in a predetermined arrangement of even-numbered symbols (for example, "224", "668", etc.).

The presentation mode of "strong notice" differs depending on the type of continuous notice, and in the case of a look-ahead motion production, the second movable member 74 emits red light and performs a strong motion, and a strong motion sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead effect production, a red effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a, and a red effect sound effect is output, and in the case of a look-ahead vibration production, the production button The vibrator for vibrating the zone 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds, and the production button 17 blinks in red. In the case of a pre-read zone production, a red heat zone image (zone background image) is displayed and , a heat zone sound effect is output, and in the case of a look-ahead chance effect, the effect symbols 70a are stopped and displayed in a predetermined arrangement of odd-numbered symbols (for example, "335", "779", etc.). be.

Continuous notice performance scenarios include scenarios in which weak or strong notices are not executed during advance fluctuations and weak notices or strong notices are executed during the fluctuations (for example, scenario 11), and scenarios where weak notices or strong notices are executed during the fluctuations in advance, A scenario (for example, scenario 22) in which a weak notice or a strong notice is executed is set therein.

The first feature of the various tables related to continuous preview effects shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that they are more useful when multiple types of continuous preview effects are executed than when a single type of continuous preview effect is executed. However, there is a point where the expectation of jackpot is high. Therefore, the expectations of the players can be effectively raised, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The second feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that the performance modes D to G (specific game state) are better than the performance modes A to C (normal game state). One of the points is that continuous preview performances are likely to be executed (execution rate is high), that is, the expectation level of jackpot when continuous preview performances are executed is low. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that instead of differentiating the execution rate of continuous preview performances between production modes A to C and production modes D to G, for example, continuous preview production is executed more in production mode B than in production mode A. For example, the execution rate of continuous preview performances may be made different between production modes A to C, or for example, continuous preview production may be made easier to execute in production mode E than in production mode D. The execution rate of the continuous notice performance may be made different between the performance modes D to G. In this way, the expectation of a jackpot in the continuous preview performance changes between performance modes, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that in the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), when the normal reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result), Also, in production modes D to G (specific game states), if the normal reach production is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result), continuous notice production (here, pre-reading effect production, pre-reading chance effect production, pre-reading action production) ) can be easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where there are more (super) shortening fluctuations than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

The fourth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that in the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), if the SP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result) In performance modes D to G (specific game states), when SP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result), continuous preview effects (here, pre-read effect effect, pre-read chance effect, pre-read One of the points is that it is easy to perform motion effects, look-ahead zone effects). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where there are more (super) shortening fluctuations than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

The fifth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that in the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), if the SPSP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result) In performance modes D to G (specific gaming states), when SPSP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result), continuous preview effects (here, pre-read effect effect, pre-read chance effect, pre-read) One of the points is that it is easy to perform motion effects, look-ahead zone effects). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where super shortening fluctuations tend to occur more frequently than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The sixth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that the full rotation reach performance is scheduled to be executed in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) (pre-read results). In the production mode D to G (specific game state), the case where the full rotation reach production is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) is better than the continuous preview production (here, pre-reading action production, pre-reading zone production). One point is that it is easy to implement. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where super shortening fluctuations tend to occur more frequently than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The seventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that the performance modes A to C (normal game state) are better than the performance modes D to G (specific game state). The point is that the pre-reading vibration performance (vibration performance without displaying the valid period of the performance button 17 or the operation promotion image) is easily executed (high execution rate = different jackpot expectation level). Therefore, in production modes A to C (normal gaming state) where the stay period is likely to be longer than production modes D to G (specific gaming states), it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the pre-reading vibration production, and increase the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the In addition, in production modes D to G (specific gaming states) where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than production modes A to C (normal gaming states), the pre-reading vibration production can be given rarity, improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

Note that the pre-reading vibration performance may be executed more easily (the execution rate may be higher) in the performance modes D to G than in the performance modes A to C. In addition, in the normal gaming state, by making it easier to execute pre-reading continuous effects in production mode A than in production modes B or C, the execution rate of pre-reading vibration effects can be reduced between production modes A to C. In a specific game state, the pre-read vibration effect can be executed more easily in the effect mode D than in the effect modes E-G. The performance execution ratio may be varied. In this way, it is possible to vary the expectation level of a jackpot when the pre-read vibration performance is executed between the performance modes, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the various tables related to continuous notice performances shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), specific reach performances (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, ) is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result), a specific reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) is scheduled to be executed in performance modes D to G (specific game state) ( If the result is a pre-read result, the pre-read vibration effect is more difficult to execute (the execution rate is lower). Therefore, in production modes D to G (specific gaming states) where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than production modes A to C (normal gaming states), it is possible to give rarity to the pre-reading vibration production and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

The ninth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that the performance modes D to G (specific game state) are better than the performance modes A to C (normal game state). One of the points is that the look-ahead motion effect is easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, in production modes D to G (specific gaming states) where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than production modes A to C (normal gaming states), it is possible to give rarity to the pre-reading vibration production and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

The tenth feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that when a continuous preview performance that ends with one variable performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state). In the case where a continuous preview performance that ends with one variable performance is executed in production modes D to G (specific game states), it is better to perform a reach performance (normal reach performance) in a variable performance that is the target of the continuous preview performance. , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) are difficult to execute (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that when a continuous preview performance that ends with two variable performances is executed in performance modes D to G (specific game states). In the case where a continuous preview performance that ends with two variable performances is executed in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), it is better to perform a reach performance (normal reach performance) in a variable performance that is the target of the continuous preview performance. , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) are easy to execute. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. In modes A to C (normal game state), a continuous preview performance with only one variable performance is executed, while in performance modes D to G (specific game state), a continuous preview performance with only one variable performance is executed. If it is executed, it is difficult to execute the reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) in the variable performance that is the preview target of the continuous preview performance. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 13th feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. , When a continuous preview performance that spans three variable performances is executed in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), the reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance) in the variable performance that is the target of the continuous preview performance , SPSP reach performance) can be easily executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourteenth feature of the various tables related to continuous notice performances shown in FIGS. , when a continuous preview performance that spans three variable performances is executed in production modes D to G (specific game states), it is better to perform a reach performance with a higher expectation of a jackpot in the variable performance that is the target of the continuous preview performance (for example, , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) are easy to execute. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that the movable members are the same in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to G (specific game state). (The second movable member 74) can be used to perform the pre-reading action effect, but the pre-reading action effect is not possible in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and in the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The difference is that the expected jackpot when executed is different. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 16th feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that the pre-read motion performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance mode D to G (specific game state). In this case, the ratio (100%) of operating the second movable member 74 not used in the final performance is higher than the ratio (0%) of operating the first movable member 73 used in the final performance described later. can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an inconvenience in which the player mistakenly assumes that there will be a jackpot just because the look-ahead motion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the first movable member 73 may be operated instead of operating the second movable member 74 at the strong notice of the pre-reading action performance. Even in this case, when performing the pre-reading action performance in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) and performance modes D to G (specific gaming state), the ratio of operating the first movable member 73 is , it is preferable that the rate at which the second movable member 74 is operated becomes higher.

The seventeenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 32 to 35 is that the pre-reading vibration performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance mode D to G (specific game state). In this case, the percentage of the production button 17 in the normal state (0%) is higher than the percentage of the production button 17 in the protruding state (0%). Therefore, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the performance button 17 being in the protruding state (it is in the protruding state only in the fixed performance described later), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the strong notice of the pre-read vibration performance, the performance button 17 may not be vibrated in the normal state, but may be vibrated in the protruding state. Even in this case, when executing the pre-reading vibration performance in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to G (specific game state), the ratio of the performance button 17 to the protruding state is , it is preferable to set the ratio of the normal state to be higher.

The 18th feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. During the high-speed fluctuation period), a weak preview of the look-ahead motion performance (weak motion of the first movable member 73 + blue light emission) and a weak notice of the look-ahead effect performance (display of a blue effect image around the performance pattern 70a) are executed. The point is that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when a weak preview of the pre-reading vibration effect (weak vibration of the effect button 17 for 1 second) is executed without displaying an operation promotion image than when the operation promotion image is displayed. can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations by using the operating means that the player can operate, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 19th feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. During the high-speed fluctuation period), a strong notice of the look-ahead action performance (strong action of the first movable member 73 + red light emission) and a strong notice of the look-ahead effect performance (display of a red effect image around the performance pattern 70a) are executed. One point is that the expectation level of a jackpot is higher when a strong preview of the pre-reading vibration performance (3 seconds of strong vibration of the performance button 17) is executed than when the pre-reading vibration performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations by using the operating means that the player can operate, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous preview performance execution processing by the performance control unit)
The continuous preview performance execution process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing continuous preview performance execution processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E540-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a special figure variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process moves to step E540-2, and if the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the current continuous notice performance execution process is ended.

In step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the preview scenario of the continuous preview effects (prefetch action effects, prefetch effect effects, prefetch vibration effects, and prefetch zone effects) stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and executes the step E540-2. At E540-3, it is determined whether a preview scenario for continuous preview performance is stored. If the preview scenario is stored, the process moves to step E540-4, and if the preview scenario is not stored, the current continuous preview performance execution process is ended.

In step E540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines the preview pattern (type of continuous preview performance, weak preview, strong preview) to be executed in the current variable performance according to the preview scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. Then, in step E540-5, a continuous preview presentation command corresponding to the determined preview pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a continuous notice performance command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and a continuous notice performance according to the determined notice pattern is executed. When this process is finished, the current continuous notice performance execution process is finished.

(Lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution process of the effect control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the lamp change effect execution process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether an icon change scenario is stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, it is assumed that an icon change effect is to be executed and the process moves to step E550-2; if the icon change scenario is not stored, the change scenario is stored from the sub-RAM 130c. Step E550-6 assumes that a command abnormality has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the pre-read information storage area due to the power supply being cleared or the winning command (special drawing reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) not being received normally. Transfer processing.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether it is time for the icon to change. If it is the icon change timing, the process moves to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the current lamp change effect execution process is ended.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, a lamp effect command is sent to the lamp control unit 150, and a lamp change effect is executed by changing the lighting mode (emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning slot lamp NR in accordance with the color change of the icon. It turns out.

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a lamp changing flag indicating that a lamp changing effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the current lamp change performance execution process ends; if the lamp changing flag is not set, the lamp changing flag is set, and the current lamp change performance is executed. End the execution process.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process moves to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current lamp changing effect execution process is ended.

In step E550-7, the sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c, and in step E550-8, sets a lamp effect end command in the transmission buffer, and executes the current lamp change effect execution process. finish. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp control section 150, and the lamp change effect that was being executed is ended.

As described above, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 37, the lamp change is performed by changing the light emission mode (emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning opening lamp NR in response to the change of the icon in the icon change effect. It is designed to perform a performance. Therefore, the presentation effect can be enhanced by the synergistic effect with the icon change presentation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 37, unlike the icon change effect or the continuous notice effect, even if the power is restored while the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect is executed again. It is designed not to. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the lamp change performance while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that when power is restored, such as in the icon change performance, the lamp change performance may be executed again in the variable performance that is started after the power is restored. In this case, it is preferable to perform the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that is started after the power is restored.

In addition, instead of executing the lamp change effect in response to the icon change effect, the final lighting mode of the prize opening lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the preliminary change to the relevant change, etc. are determined by lottery and the lamp change effect is executed. You can do it like this.

(Fluctuating performance pattern determination processing of the performance control unit)
The variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control section 130m, and this process is executed in the above-mentioned special figure special electric performance process.

First, in step E610-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command, and in step E610-2, selects the variation effect pattern determination table (FIGS. 39 and 40) according to the current effect mode. . The details of the variable effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E610-3, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected variable effect pattern determination table, determines one variable effect pattern from among the plurality of variable effect patterns, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E610-4, the sub CPU 130a sets a variable effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, a variable effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

(Fluctuating performance pattern judgment table)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C that is referred to in order to determine a variable performance pattern in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. It is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states) that is referred to in order to determine a variable performance pattern in D to G.

As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the variable effect pattern determination table associates the special figure variable pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each variable effect pattern, and the selected variable effect pattern. The performance configuration for each variable performance pattern is described as follows.

"Variation" in the production structure column indicates that a normal variation display in which a ready-to-win state is not formed due to the production symbol 70a is executed.
"Short variation" indicates that a shortened variation display in which a reach state is not formed is executed for a shorter time than a normal variation display.
"L fluctuation" indicates that a long fluctuation display in which a reach state is not formed for a longer time than a normal fluctuation display is executed.

"Pseudo-failure" refers to a pseudo-successful performance after the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped during the fluctuating display of one special symbol, and then a pseudo-sequential performance is performed to determine whether or not a pseudo-sequential performance will be executed. This indicates that a pseudo consecutive failure effect is executed, which results in the failure of the sequence.
"Pseudo-success" indicates that, after performing a performance that incites whether or not the pseudo-successful performance will be executed, a pseudo-successful performance that results in the pseudo-successful performance is performed.
"(Fluctuation → Pseudo Success) x 2" means a performance in which a pseudo consecutive success performance that results in a pseudo consecutive performance is performed after an inciting performance that incites whether or not the pseudo consecutive performance will be executed. This shows that two sets of effects will be performed, with 1 set being 1 set.
"(Fluctuation → pseudo-success) x 3" is a performance in which a pseudo-successful performance that results in a pseudo-successful performance is performed after an inciting performance that incites whether or not the pseudo-successful performance will be executed. This shows that three sets of performances will be performed, with 1 set being 1 set.

"N reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is executed.
"N '7'reach" indicates that the normal reach effect described above is executed in a state where the reach state is formed by the effect pattern 70a of "7".
"SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SP reach effect is executed.
"Special SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned special SP reach effect is executed.
"SPSP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SPSP reach effect is executed.
"Full rotation reach" indicates that the above-mentioned full rotation reach effect is executed.

"SP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SP reach effect will be executed is executed.
"SPSP development" indicates that a development effect that suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be executed is executed.
"Full rotation development" indicates that a development effect that suggests that a full rotation reach is executed is executed.

"CI" indicates that one of a plurality of cut-in performances with different jackpot expectation levels will be executed in accordance with the operation of the performance button 17 during the validity period or the passage of the validity period.
"Decision" indicates that a determination performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot game will be executed is executed in accordance with the operation of the performance button 17 during the validity period or the passage of the validity period.
"Failure" indicates that as a result of the deciding performance, a deciding failure performance indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed is executed.
"Success" indicates that as a result of the winning performance, a successful winning performance that suggests that a jackpot game will be executed is executed.

"Loss" means a temporary stop after forming a losing number (a losing display mode such as "358" or "948" which is different from the initial number described later) by the performance pattern 70a that does not include a character but only numbers. It shows.
"c pattern loss" means to form a loss result (a loss display form such as ``358'' or ``948'' which is different from the initial appearance described later) by the performance pattern 70a of the display form including the character and temporarily stop. It is shown that.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect (stop-suggestion effect) in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is displayed on the image display device is to be executed.
"Symbol alignment" indicates that a jackpot is formed (a jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") by the effect pattern 70a that does not include characters and includes only numbers, and the game is temporarily stopped.
"C symbols aligned" indicates that a jackpot is formed (a jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") by the production symbol 70a in a display mode including characters, and the game is temporarily stopped.

"Re-lottery" refers to whether or not the performance symbol 70a that is temporarily stopped at a jackpot (jackpot display mode) will become a jackpot that is advantageous for the player (from an even-numbered performance symbol that normally results in a jackpot, it will become a probability-variable jackpot). (Whether it will be an odd-numbered production symbol or not, or whether it will be a "7" production symbol where the most advantageous jackpot game will be executed), a promotion success production will be performed that will result in an advantageous jackpot. , indicates that a re-lottery performance is executed, such as a promotion failure performance that does not result in an advantageous jackpot.

"Strong vibration 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmed vibration performance) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 4 seconds.
"Strong vibration for 1 second" indicates that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second.

In the variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) shown in FIG. In this case, the ratio of the ready-to-win performance is performed with the even-numbered performance symbols 70a is 70%, and the ratio of the ready-to-reach performance with the odd-numbered performance symbols 70a other than "7" is 30%.
In the case of special symbol 00 (loss) and variable performance patterns 07 to 11 (SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 65%, and odd numbers other than "7" The rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 30%, and the rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed by the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 5%.

In the case of special symbol 01 (normal jackpot) and variable performance patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%. .
In the case of special symbol 02 (probable variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 18 to 19 (SP reach production), the ratio of reach production with even number production symbols 70a is 60%, and odd number production patterns other than "7" The rate at which reach effects are performed in 70a is 40%.

In the case of special symbol 02 (probable variable jackpot) and variable performance patterns 20 to 22 (SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 6%, and with odd numbered performance symbols other than "7" The rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed with 70a is 4%, and the rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 90%.
In the case of special symbol 03 (probable variable jackpot) and variable performance patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 60%, and “7 ” The proportion of reach effects performed with odd-numbered effect symbols 70a is 40%.

In the case of special symbol 10 (loss) and variable performance patterns 26 to 27 (special SP ready-to-win performance), the rate at which the ready-to-win performance is performed with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%.
In the case of special symbols 04 (normal jackpot) & 05 (probable variable jackpot) and variable performance pattern 27 (special SP ready-to-win performance), the ratio of ready-to-win performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%.

In the variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states) shown in FIG. The rate at which reach effects are performed is 100%.
In the case of special symbols 01 (normal jackpot), 02 (probable variable jackpot), 03 (probable variable jackpot) and variable production pattern 33 (special SP reach production), the ratio of reach production performed with even numbered production symbols 70a is 100%. It becomes.

In the case of special symbol 10 (loss) and variable performance pattern 36 (normal reach performance), 38 to 42 (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 60%, The rate at which the reach effect is performed with odd numbered effect symbols 70a other than "7" is 40%.
In the case of special symbol 04 (normal jackpot) and variable performance patterns 43 to 48 (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the rate at which reach performance is performed with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%. .

In the case of special symbol 05 (probable variable jackpot) and variable performance patterns 49 to 50 (SP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 60%, and with odd numbered performance symbols other than "7" The rate at which reach effects are performed in 70a is 40%.
In the case of special symbol 05 (probable variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 51 to 53 (SPSP reach production), the ratio of reach production with even number production symbols 70a is 3%, and odd number production patterns other than "7" The rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed with 70a is 2%, and the rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 95%.
In the case of special symbol 05 (probable variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 54 to 55 (full rotation reach production), the ratio of reach production with even number production symbols 70a is 20%, and odd number production other than "7" The rate at which a ready-to-reach effect is performed with the symbol 70a is 30%, and the rate at which a reach-to-reach effect is performed by the effect symbol 70a of "7" is 50%.

The first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that when the SP reach effect (excluding special SP reach effect) or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. An example of this is that an eye-catching effect suggesting this is executed and the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel strange due to the change in the display mode of the performance symbols 70a, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the performance symbols 70a will be stopped and displayed, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The second feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that in the case of a jackpot, there are variable effect patterns in which the winning effect is executed and the symbols are aligned, and variable effect patterns in which the symbols are aligned and the symbols are aligned and the winning effect is successful. One point is that there is a variable performance pattern in which the performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the case of a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that in the variable effect pattern that results in a jackpot, when the effect patterns 70a that do not include characters are aligned, the effect button 17 is pressed for 4 seconds. One point is that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is performed in which the machine vibrates strongly. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second when the effect patterns 70a including characters are aligned (c patterns aligned). One point is that a performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that the reach performance (normal reach The point is that the proportion of reach effects performed with even-numbered effect symbols 70a (the effect symbols that usually result in a jackpot when a jackpot roll is made) is higher than the proportion of effects that are performed (performance, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's joy when a jackpot is achieved with an odd-numbered performance symbol 70a other than "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that the rate at which reach effects are performed with even-numbered effect symbols 70a (effect symbols that usually result in a jackpot when the result is a jackpot) is The point is that the percentage of reach effects (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) being performed is lower with the production pattern 70a of "7" (the production pattern that is the most advantageous probability variable jackpot by getting a jackpot). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's joy when the player hits a jackpot with the performance symbol 70a of "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that the reach performance (normal reach Direction, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) One point to note is that the ratio of "reach performance" and "SPSP reach performance" is lower. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when he or she hits the jackpot with the performance symbol 70a of "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, when the ready-to-win performance is executed with an even-numbered performance symbol 70a or an odd-numbered performance symbol 70a other than "7", "7" When the ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect pattern 70a, the expectation of a jackpot is higher. Therefore, it is possible for the player to increase his or her expectations as to which type of performance symbol will be used to perform the ready-to-win performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are the most advantageous than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). In the case of a probability variable jackpot, a reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is likely to be executed with the performance symbol 70a of "7" (the performance symbol which becomes the most advantageous probability variable jackpot when the jackpot roll is made). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effects in performance modes D to G (specific game states), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), even if the reach effect is executed with the effect symbol 70a of "7", the jackpot is guaranteed. However, in performance modes D to G (specific game states), if the ready-to-win performance is executed with the performance symbol 70a of "7", a jackpot is guaranteed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effects in performance modes D to G (specific game states), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), the eye-catching performance ( However, in production modes D to G (specific game states), the eye-catching production (stop suggestion production) is not executed in the first variable production, so the first variation production can be executed during the normal gaming state. (Fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed, and when the first variable expression (Fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed during a specific gaming state, the eye-catching effect (stop suggestion effect) are executed at different rates. Therefore, it is possible to make a difference between the performance effects of the first variable performance in the normal game state and the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in performance modes D to G (specific game states), In this case, the eye-catching performance (stop-suggestion performance) is not executed, but when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the eye-catching performance (stop-suggestion performance) can be performed. Therefore, the rate at which the eye-catching performance (stop suggestion performance) is executed differs depending on when the first variable performance is executed during a specific gaming state and when the second variable performance is executed during a specific gaming state. It looks like this. Therefore, during a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the second variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

The thirteenth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) While it is possible to perform a pseudo-continuation inciting performance and a pseudo-continuation performance (a performance in which a flame effect is displayed around the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a), in production modes D to G (specific game states), When the first variation performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed, the pseudo-continuation inciting production and the pseudo-continuation production are not executed, so when the first variation production is executed during the normal gaming state, The rate at which the pseudo-continuation inciting performance and the pseudo-continuation performance are executed differs depending on when the first variable performance is executed during a specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to make a difference between the performance effects of the first variable performance in the normal game state and the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourteenth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in performance modes D to G (specific game states) , while the pseudo continuous inciting effect and the pseudo continuous effect (the effect in which a flame effect is displayed around the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a) are not executed, the second variable effect (the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed. In this case, it is possible to execute a pseudo-continuation inciting effect and a pseudo-continuous effect, so there is a case where the first variable effect is executed during a specific game state, and a case where the second variable effect is executed during a specific game state. The rate at which the pseudo-continuation incitement effect and the pseudo-continuation effect are executed differs depending on the case. Therefore, during a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the second variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

The fifteenth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state), In this case, while it is possible to execute the decisive effect (effective suggestion effect indicating that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective), the second variable effect (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is not executed. In this case, the decisive effect (effective suggestion effect indicating that the operation of the effect button 17 may be valid) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 16th feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in performance modes D to G (specific game states) In this case, when the decisive effect (effective suggestion effect indicating that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective) is not executed, but the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed. Another advantage is that it is possible to execute a final effect (a valid suggestion effect that suggests that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventeenth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state), In this case, the re-lottery performance is more easily executed than when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighteenth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is that when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in performance modes D to G (specific game states), The re-lottery effect is more likely to be executed when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable performance pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance is always performed, but a variable performance pattern may be provided in which the ready-to-win performance is not performed even if the pseudo-continuous performance is performed.

In addition, if you stop temporarily due to a loss after a cut-in performance or a failed decision performance, it is guaranteed to be a loss, but a resurrection performance that is guaranteed to be a jackpot after a cut-in performance or a failed decision performance. may also be executed.

Furthermore, when the first variable effect (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in a specific gaming state, the eye-catching effect (stop suggestion effect) may be executed, and in this case, the second It is preferable to set the rate to be lower than that when the variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed.

In addition, instead of only executing an eye-catching effect as a stop suggestion effect, when the C symbols are aligned, a light emitting effect effect is executed to display a light emitting effect on the effect pattern 70a to suggest that the effect pattern 70a will stop. In this case, when the first variable effect is executed in a specific gaming state, the light emitting effect effect is not executed when the loss effect symbol temporarily stops, and the light emitting effect effect is performed when the jackpot effect symbol temporarily stops. is executed, and when the second variable effect is executed in a specific game state, when the losing effect symbol temporarily stops without performing the reach effect, the light emitting effect effect is not executed, and the losing effect symbol is performed with the reach effect. When the symbol temporarily stops or the jackpot effect pattern temporarily stops, a light emitting effect effect may be executed.

In addition, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in a specific game state, a pseudo continuous performance (a performance in which a flame effect is displayed around the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a) is executed. In this case, it is preferable to set the rate lower than when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed.

(Timer performance determination process)
Next, the timer performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the timer performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E620-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the current variation performance pattern, and in step E620-2, a reach performance that is higher than the SP reach performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance) is executed. Determine whether or not. If a ready-to-win performance that is greater than or equal to the SP ready-to-reach performance is to be executed, the process moves to step E620-3, and if a ready-to-win performance that is greater than or equal to the SP ready-to-reach performance is not to be executed, the current timer performance determination process is ended.

In step E620-3, the sub CPU 130a uses the event timer number determination table (see FIG. 42) to determine the number of times the event timer effect is executed during the current variable effect (from "0 times" to "2 times"). do. Specifically, the jackpot lottery results, variable performance patterns, etc. are checked against the event timer count determination table. Details of this event timer count determination table will be described later using FIG. 42.

An event timer effect indicates that any one of multiple suggestive events (excluding icon changes) will occur during the execution process of the variable effect, and indicates the timing at which the suggestive event will occur. However, when the event timer effect is executed, it is difficult for the player to determine the type of suggestion event, and it becomes possible for the player to determine the type of suggestion event at the time the suggestion event occurs. There is.

Suggestive events include normal reach performance, pseudo-continuation, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance, valid period, jackpot symbol stop, and the like.

In step E620-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined number of event timer effects is one for executing the event timer effect. If the event timer effect is to be executed (the number of event timer effects is "once" or "twice"), the process moves to step E620-5, and if the event timer effect is not to be executed (the event timer effect is "once" or "twice"), the process moves to step E620-5. If the number of performances is "0"), the current timer performance determination process is ended.

In step E620-5, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined number of event timer effects is one. If it is once, the process moves to step E620-6, and if it is not once but twice, the process moves to step E620-9.

In step E620-6, the sub CPU 130a uses the one-time timer suggestion event determination table (see FIG. 43) to determine the suggestion event suggested by the event timer presentation and the timer type classified according to the type and length of the timer. Determine. Specifically, the variable effect pattern, etc. is checked against the suggestion event determination table for one timer. Details of this one-time timer suggestion event determination table will be described later using FIG. 43.

The timer types include short timer, which is a classification of short timer time, middle timer, which is a classification of long timer time, and long timer, which is a classification of long timer time. Note that the timer times set by the three timer types are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

In step E620-7, the sub CPU 130a uses the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 45) to determine the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the event timer effect. Specifically, the timer type, jackpot lottery results, etc. are checked against the update pattern determination table. Details of this update pattern determination table will be described later using FIG. 45.

In step E620-8, the sub CPU 130a sets the timer effect pattern command indicating the suggested event and the update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current timer effect determination process. As a result, the timer effect pattern command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

In step E620-9, the sub CPU 130a uses the first suggestion event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 44(a)) to determine the suggestion event suggested by the first event timer presentation and the timer. Determine timer types classified by type and length. Specifically, the variable effect pattern, etc. is checked against the first suggestion event determination table for the two-timer. The details of this first suggestion event determination table for two timers will be described later using FIG. 44(a).

In step E620-10, the sub CPU 130a uses the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 45) to determine the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the first event timer effect. Specifically, the timer type, jackpot lottery results, etc. are checked against the update pattern determination table. Details of this update pattern determination table will be described later using FIG. 45.

In step E620-11, the sub CPU 130a sets a timer effect designation command indicating a suggested event and an update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, a timer effect designation command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the first event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

In step E620-12, the sub CPU 130a uses the second suggestion event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 44(b)) to determine the suggestion event suggested by the second event timer presentation and the timer. Determine timer types classified by length. Specifically, the variable effect pattern, etc. is checked against the second suggestion event determination table for the two-timer. Details of the second suggested event determination table for the two-timer will be described later using FIG. 44(b).

In step E620-13, the sub CPU 130a uses the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 45) to determine the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the second event timer effect. Specifically, the timer type, jackpot lottery results, etc. are checked against the update pattern determination table. Details of this update pattern determination table will be described later using FIG. 45.

In step E620-14, the sub CPU 130a sets a timer effect pattern command indicating a suggested event and an update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the current timer effect determination process. As a result, a timer effect designation command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the second event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

(Event timer count determination table)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an event timer number determination table that is referred to when determining the number of event timer performances performed during a variable performance. The event timer number determination table associates the jackpot lottery result, the variable performance pattern, the distribution ratio (%) for each number of event timer performances, and the determined number of event timer performances.

The number of event timer effects includes "0 times" which means the event timer effect will not be executed, "1 time" which means the event timer effect will be executed once, and "1 time" which means the event timer effect will be executed twice. Three types of "twice" are set.

The first feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the event timer effect is more likely to be executed when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a loss, and also when the jackpot lottery result is a reach with a low jackpot expectation. One point is that the event timer performance is more likely to be executed when a reach-for-win performance with a high expectation of a jackpot is executed than when a performance is executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the execution of the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that the number of times the event timer effect is executed is likely to be greater when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a loss. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the number of executions of the event timer effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a third feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. An example of this is that the number of executions of the performance tends to increase. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the execution of the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. When executed, the timer effect (update effect) is less likely to be executed during the variable effect.

In other words, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed during the normal gaming state, the reach performance other than the special SP reach is executed, while the first variable performance is executed during the specific gaming state. When (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed, the special SP reach effect is executed without executing the reach effect other than the special SP reach effect, so the first variation causes a loss during the normal gaming state. The timer performance (updated performance) is more difficult to execute when the first variable performance that results in a loss is executed during a specific game state than when the performance is executed. By doing so, during the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the first variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved. becomes possible.

In addition, the first variable performance (variation of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot during a specific gaming state is more effective than the case where the first variable performance (fluctuation display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot during the normal gaming state is executed. When the display) is executed, the timer effect (update effect) is less likely to be executed. By doing so, during the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the first variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved. becomes possible.

In addition, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed during a specific gaming state, the special SP reach performance is executed without performing other reach performances other than the special SP reach performance, When the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed during a specific gaming state, a reach effect other than the special SP reach is executed, so the first variable effect is executed during the specific gaming state. The timer effect (update effect) is more likely to be executed when the second variable effect is executed during the specific game state than when the timer effect is executed. By doing so, during a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the second variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved. becomes possible.

Although the timer effect is executed when the special SP ready-to-reach effect is executed, the timer effect may not be executed when the special SP ready-to-reach effect is executed. In this case, if the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal gaming state, and if the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific gaming state, If it is executed, the timer effect will not be executed.

(Suggestive event determination table for one timer)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a suggestion event determination table for a single timer that is referred to when determining a timer type and a suggestion event when an event timer production is executed once during a variable production. The suggestion event determination table for one timer is associated with a variable performance pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each suggestion event, a suggestion event to be determined, and a timer type.

Seven types of suggestion events are set: normal reach, pseudo consecutive, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect, valid period, and jackpot symbol stop.

Furthermore, three types of timers are set: a short timer, which is a classification of short timer times, a middle timer, which is a classification of long timer times, and a long timer, which is a classification of long timer times. Note that the timer times set by the three timer types are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

The first feature of the one-time timer suggestion event determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the types of suggestion events are set to differ depending on the variable performance pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variations of the timer effect, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the one-timer suggested event determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that an event (for example, a pseudo consecutive, normal reach) are more likely to be determined as suggestion events than events that are executed late in the variable performance (for example, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance, valid period, jackpot symbol stop). can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation over a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the suggestion event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. Another point is that events that are executed at a later stage of the variable performance (for example, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance, valid period, jackpot symbol stop) are more likely to be determined as suggestion events. By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation over a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the one-time timer suggestion event determination table shown in FIG. The higher the degree, the more likely it is that a long timer will be determined as the timer type. By doing this, the longer the timer time in the timer effect, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so the player will have a sense of expectation regarding the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

The fifth feature of the suggested event determination table for one-time timer shown in FIG. When an event timer effect that suggests the occurrence of a specific event (valid period) is executed, it is better to press the production button in the final phase (late stage) of a variable effect than when an event timer effect that suggests the occurrence is executed. 17 is likely to enter a special state. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding which type of event is the suggestion event, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the one-time timer suggestion event determination table shown in FIG. (In the final stage), the effect button 17 tends to be in a special state (protruding state). By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players regarding the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the one-time timer suggestion event determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that when a long timer is determined as the timer type, the final phase ( One point is that the performance button 17 tends to be in a special state (protruding state) in the final stage). By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players regarding the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Suggestion event determination table for two timers)
FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a suggestion event determination table for a two-time timer that is referred to when determining a timer type and a suggestion event when an event timer production is executed twice during a variable production. In the suggestion event determination table for two timers, a variable performance pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each suggestion event, a suggestion event to be determined, and a timer type are associated with each other.

Note that FIG. 44(a) is a diagram showing a first suggestion event determination table for two timers for determining the type of the first suggestion event and the type of timer type, and FIG. ) is a diagram showing a second suggestion event determination table for two timers for determining the type of the second suggestion event and the type of timer type.

Seven types of suggestion events are set: normal reach, pseudo-continuation, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, valid period, full rotation reach effect, and jackpot symbol stop.

Furthermore, three types of timers are set: a short timer, which is a classification of short timer times, a middle timer, which is a classification of long timer times, and a long timer, which is a classification of long timer times. Note that the timer times set by the three timer types are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

The first feature of the suggestion event determination table for the two-timer timer shown in FIG. 44 is that the types of suggestion events are set to differ depending on the variable performance pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variations of the timer effect, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second feature of the two-timer suggestion event determination table shown in FIG. One point is that both events that are executed late in the variation performance are likely to be determined as suggestion events. By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation over a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the third feature of the suggestion event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 44 is that the higher the expectation of a jackpot is in the variable performance pattern, the more likely it is that the timer type for which a longer timer time will be set is determined ( The higher the expectation of a jackpot, the more likely it is that a long timer will be determined as the timer type. By doing this, the longer the timer time in the timer effect, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so the player will have a sense of expectation regarding the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

Furthermore, as a fourth feature of the suggestion event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. When an event timer effect suggesting the occurrence of an event (valid period) is executed, the effect button 17 is more likely to enter a special state in the final phase (late stage) of the variable effect. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding which type of event is the suggestion event, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the fifth feature of the two-timer suggestion event determination table shown in FIG. However, the effect button 17 tends to be in a special state (projected state) in the final phase (final stage) of the variable effect. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players regarding the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Update pattern determination table)
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an update pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a timer update pattern (effect mode). The update pattern determination table is associated with the timer type, jackpot lottery result, allocation ratio (%) for each update pattern, and update pattern to be determined.For reference, the timer time, timer display mode, and timer display mode for each update pattern are associated. The timer display position and whether or not a standby display indicating that execution of the timer effect is on standby are described.

The "normal pattern" is a normal update pattern in which the timer displayed in a predetermined area of the first image display device 70 is decremented by 1 from the initial number of seconds until it reaches 0 seconds.
A "special pattern" means that after the timer displayed in a predetermined area of the first image display device 70 is decremented by 1 from the initial number of seconds until it reaches 0 seconds, the timer (number of seconds) is rewound. This is a special update pattern in which the time is subtracted by 1 until it reaches 0 seconds again.

The jackpot expectation for each update pattern corresponding to the short timer is normal pattern 1<normal pattern 2<normal pattern 3.
The jackpot expectation for each update pattern corresponding to the middle timer is normal pattern 11<normal pattern 12<normal pattern 13.
The expected jackpot for each update pattern corresponding to the long timer is normal pattern 21<normal pattern 22<normal pattern 23<normal pattern 24<normal pattern 25<special pattern 1<normal pattern 26<normal pattern 27<special pattern 2< The normal pattern is 28.

In this way, in the timer effect, multiple timer times (update patterns) are set, but by counting down to 0 seconds, the timer effect can be used for predetermined events (icon change effect, various reach effects, zone effect, count up). This is a performance that suggests the timing of a predetermined event, so no matter what timer time (update pattern) , the count value is counted up to the final arrival point (in this embodiment, 0 seconds).

The first feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that, regardless of the timer type, the update pattern has a longer timer time when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a loss. There are some points that are easy to determine. By doing this, the longer the timer time in the timer effect, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so the player will have a sense of expectation regarding the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

A second feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that even if the timer time is the same, the jackpot expectation level differs depending on the timer display mode (font color). By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the display mode of the timer, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Specifically, the jackpot expectation level according to the timer display mode (font color) is white < blue < red < rainbow (jackpot confirmed).

A third feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the longer the timer type is determined, the more timer display modes (font colors) are available. By doing so, it is possible to give an impression that the longer the timer type is determined, the higher the expectation of a jackpot is, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that although the font color is illustrated as an example of the display mode of the timer, it may be a font other than the font color, a decorative part that decorates the timer, or a combination thereof.

The fourth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. The same color as some of the icon colors (white, blue, green, red, zebra, rainbow) set as the display mode is set. In other words, the icon color set as the icon final display mode includes all the font colors set as the timer display mode. By doing this, it becomes easy to understand which character color of the timer has a higher jackpot expectation, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, the order of the jackpot expectation level indicated by the color types is also common between the icon color type set as the icon final display mode and the font color type set as the timer display mode.

Note that the type of font color set as the display mode of the timer and the type of icon color set as the final icon display mode may be exactly the same type.

In addition to the final display mode of the icon, we also provide effects (other effects) that suggest the degree of jackpot expectation using the display (emission) color, so that all of the font colors set as the timer display mode, or Some parts may be set to the same color. Also in this case, it is preferable that the permutation of the jackpot expectation level indicated by the color type is the same between the timer display color and other effects.
Here, the other effects include, for example, in a speech preview effect, multiple lines may be displayed in different colors, or in a step-up preview effect, each time a step progresses, the effect color or the light emitting color of the frame lighting device 10 may be set. It may be something that changes, and various performances can be imagined.

A fifth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the jackpot expectation varies depending on the display position of the timer (the closer to the center of the screen, the higher the jackpot expectation). By doing so, the player becomes interested in the display position of the timer, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, since the display size of the timer differs depending on the display position of the timer, it can be said that the expectation of a jackpot varies depending on the display size of the timer (the larger the size, the higher the expectation of a jackpot).

The sixth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the timer subtraction starts after the standby display is displayed, rather than when the standby display indicating that execution of the timer effect is not performed. The expectation of a jackpot will be higher if the bet is played. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players even before the timer is decremented, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that when the timer time (total) is the same, the jackpot expectation is higher when the timer is updated with a special pattern than with a normal pattern. There are some points where it gets expensive. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the pattern is a special pattern, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the expectation level of jackpot is different. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the rewind time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the initial timer time in the special pattern and the timer time after rewinding are different (the timer time after rewinding is shorter than the initial timer time). can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of anticipation until the rewinding is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in this embodiment, events that are suggested by the timer effect and events that are not suggested (jackpot preview effect) are set. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variations of the variable performance, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

It can also be said that the number of events suggested by the timer performance and the number of events not suggested (jackpot preview performance) are different. Specifically, there are more events that are suggested by the timer effect than events that are not suggested (jackpot preview effect). Note that the number of events that are not suggested by the timer effect may be greater than the number of events that are suggested.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, it always counts up to "0 seconds", but it is made so that it may end midway without counting up to "0 seconds". Also good. If the program ends in the middle like this, it is sufficient to not suggest any predetermined events (so-called fake presentation).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as an update effect, a timer effect is executed in which the timer (quantity) displayed on the image display device is subtracted, but the quantity image displayed on the image display device is added. Then, a count-up performance may be performed that suggests the degree of jackpot expectation (for example, the type of reach performance, etc.) based on the quantity indicated by the finally displayed quantity image. Even in this case, whether or not to execute the count-up effect is the same as the roulette preview effect (in the case of a special SP reach effect, it is more important than when a reach effect other than the special SP reach effect is executed). It is recommended that the count-up effect be determined so that it is difficult to perform the count-up effect.

(Jackpot preview production decision process by production control department)
The jackpot preview performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the jackpot preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m, and this process includes the variable performance pattern determination process in the above-mentioned special figure special electric performance process (variable performance pattern based on the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command). (determining process).

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable performance pattern to be executed in the current variable performance, and in step E650-2, determines that the jackpot game will be executed in the performance period (high-speed fluctuation period) before reach. A ready-to-reach advance notice determination table (FIG. 47, FIG. 48) for determining a notice pattern of a ready-to-reach advance notice performance that the player expects is selected, and a notice pattern is determined. Note that the details of the pre-reach notice determination table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the ready-to-reach preview performance is one for executing a dialogue preview performance. If the dialogue preview performance is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-4, and if the dialogue preview performance is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-6.

"Speech preview performance" means that a valid period occurs during a variable performance (high-speed fluctuation period), and according to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period or the elapse of the valid time, the image display device indicates the expectation of a jackpot. This is a type of jackpot preview performance in which a dialogue image is displayed and a sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9.

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue preview pattern determination table (see FIG. 49) for determining a dialogue preview pattern for the dialogue preview performance, and determines a dialogue preview pattern. Set a dialogue preview production command according to the preview pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, a line preview performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a line preview performance according to the line preview pattern is executed during the fluctuating performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Note that details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the ready-to-reach preview performance is one for executing a step-up preview performance. If the step-up preview effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-7, and if the step-up preview effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-9.

"Step-up notice performance" means multiple steps from the 1st step (first stage) to the 5th step (final stage) without causing the effective period of the performance button 17 during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). This is a type of jackpot preview performance in which step performances are executed in a predetermined order until reaching one of the steps.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects the step-up notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 50) for determining the step-up notice pattern of the step-up notice performance, determines the step-up notice pattern, and executes the step-up notice pattern in step E650-7. At step 8, a step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a step-up notice performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a step-up notice performance according to the step-up notice pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Note that details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect. If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-10, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that does not perform a pseudo continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-12.

In step E650-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 51) for determining the pseudo continuous effect pattern of the pseudo continuous effect, and determines the pseudo continuous effect pattern, and in step E650-11. At , a pseudo continuous effect command corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a pseudo continuous performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pseudo continuous performance according to the pseudo continuous performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The details of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation performance pattern is a variation performance pattern that executes a development performance (SP development performance, SPSP development performance, full rotation development performance). If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a developed effect, the process moves to step E650-13, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a developed effect, the process moves to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub CPU 130a selects the development performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 52) for determining the development performance pattern of the development performance and determines the development performance pattern, and in step E650-14, the development performance pattern is determined. Set the advanced production command according to the pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development effect command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the development effect according to the development effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Note that details of the advanced performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute the roulette notice using the roulette notice determination table (see FIG. 53) for determining whether or not to execute the roulette notice, and in step E650-16, executes the roulette notice. Determine whether or not to execute. If the roulette preview effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-17, and if the roulette preview effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-19.

"Roulette preview performance" means that before or after the start of the reach performance, one of the multiple options is selected by operating the performance button 17 during the valid period or after the valid period has elapsed. This is a performance that is selected as follows, and the type of selected option indicates the performance that will be executed later (the performance that will be executed most recently).

In step E650-17, the sub CPU 130a selects the stop option determination table (see FIG. 54) for determining the stop option of the roulette notice, and determines the stop option, and in step E650-18, Set the roulette preview production command in the transmission buffer. As a result, a roulette preview performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a roulette preview performance corresponding to the stop option is executed during the variable performance. Note that details of the stop option determination table will be described later.

In step E650-19, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern for executing a reach performance (post-reach performance). If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a ready-to-win performance, the process moves to step E650-20, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that executes a ready-to-win performance, the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended.

In step E650-20, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-21, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-23.

In step E650-21, the sub CPU 130a selects the cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIGS. 55 and 56) for determining the cut-in effect pattern of the cut-in effect, determines the cut-in effect pattern, and executes step E650-21. At E650-22, a cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a cut-in effect command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and a cut-in effect according to the cut-in effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Note that details of the cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-23, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern for executing a fixed performance. If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process moves to step E650-24, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process moves to step E650-26.

In step E650-24, the sub CPU 130a selects the deciding performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 57) for determining the deciding performance pattern of the deciding performance, and determines the deciding performance pattern. Set the determined production command according to the pattern in the sending buffer. As a result, a fixed performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a fixed performance according to the fixed performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. Note that details of the fixed performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-26, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a re-lottery effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a re-lottery effect, the process moves to step E650-27, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a re-lottery effect, the process moves to step E650-29.

In step E650-27, the sub CPU 130a selects the re-lottery effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 58) for determining the re-lottery effect pattern of the re-lottery effect, and determines the re-lottery effect pattern, and in step E650-28 At , a re-lottery performance command corresponding to the re-lottery performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a re-lottery performance command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and a re-lottery performance according to the re-lottery performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The details of the re-lottery performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-29, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern that allows execution of a confirmed performance that definitively informs that the current variable performance pattern will be a jackpot (results in a jackpot). If the variable performance pattern is such that a confirmed performance can be executed, the process moves to step E650-30, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that allows a confirmed performance to be executed, the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended.

In step E650-30, the sub CPU 130a selects the final performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 59) for determining the final performance pattern of the final performance and determines the final performance pattern, and in step E650-31, the final performance pattern is determined. A confirmed performance command corresponding to the pattern is set in the transmission buffer, and the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended. As a result, a confirmed performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a confirmed performance according to the confirmed performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The details of the confirmed performance pattern determination table will be described later.

(Pre-reach notice determination table)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a pre-reach advance notice determination table that is referred to when determining the notice pattern of the pre-reach advance notice performance for production modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. It is a diagram showing a ready-to-reach pre-notice determination table that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for a ready-to-reach pre-notice performance for G (specific gaming state).

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the pre-reach notice determination table is associated with the production mode, jackpot determination result, variable production pattern type, selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and selected notice pattern. There is.

There are three pre-reach preview patterns: ``No notice'' in which the pre-reach preview is not executed, ``Speech preview'' in which the dialogue preview is executed, and ``Step-up notice'' in which the step-up notice is executed. The types are set, and the expectation level for the jackpot game to be executed (the rate at which the vibrating effects associated with the alignment of the symbols described above are executed) is as follows: no advance notice < dialogue advance notice performance < step-up advance notice performance.

The first feature of the pre-reach preview determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that the pre-reach preview performance is more likely to be executed when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot than when the jackpot determination result is a loss, and when the jackpot determination result is The point is that the pre-reach preview performance is more likely to be executed when a variable performance pattern with a high jackpot expectation level is determined than when a variable performance pattern with a low probability is determined. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the execution of the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that there is a higher chance of losing in production modes D to G (specific gaming state) than in production modes A to C (normal gaming state). In this case, a pre-reach preview performance (both a line preview performance that allows a vibration performance to be executed with the validity period of the production button 17, and a step-up preview performance that allows a vibration performance to be executed without the validity period of the production button 17) The problem is that it is difficult to implement (execution rate is low). Therefore, in performance modes D to G (specific game states) in which the variable time tends to be short, wasteful pre-reach preview performances are less likely to be executed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the reach pre-notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that production modes D to G (specific gaming state) are more likely to win jackpots than production modes A to C (normal gaming state). Even in this case, when the variable performance pattern is a pattern for performing a normal reach performance and a pattern for performing a SP ready-to-reach performance, the ready-to-reach advance notice performance is difficult to be executed (the execution rate is low). Therefore, in performance modes D to G (specific game states) in which the variable time tends to be short, wasteful pre-reach preview performances are less likely to be executed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that the step-up without the effective period of the effect button 17 is more effective than when the dialogue advance notice effect with the effective period of the effect button 17 is executed. When a preview performance is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot (rate of execution of the vibration performance in conjunction with the above-mentioned pattern alignment, rate of execution of vibration performance in the deciding performance described later, etc.) is higher. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed during the normal gaming state (long variation When the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a loss is executed (long variable performance pattern, special SP reach performance pattern) than when the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed (other than the performance pattern and special SP reach performance pattern), One of the points is that it is difficult to execute (the rate of execution is low) the dialogue preview effect (operation effect) that involves the effective period (operation) of the effect button 17. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A sixth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 47 and FIG. The effect is better when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach effect pattern) than when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (reach effect pattern other than the effect pattern and the special SP reach effect pattern). One of the points is that it is difficult to execute a line preview performance (operation performance) that involves a valid period (operation) of the button 17 (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 47 and FIG. When the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed during a specific gaming state (other than the long variable performance pattern, special SP reach performance pattern) (other than the long fluctuation performance pattern, special SP reach performance pattern) Pattern) has the disadvantage that the dialogue preview performance (operation performance) accompanied by the effective period (operation) of the performance button 17 is more difficult to execute (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during the normal gaming state (special SP When the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during a specific gaming state (special SP reach performance pattern), it is better than when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during a specific gaming state (a special SP reach performance pattern) One of the points is that it is difficult to execute (the rate of execution is low) the dialogue preview effect (operation effect) that involves the effective period (operation) of the effect button 17. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed during a specific gaming state (long variation performance pattern, special SP reach performance pattern), when the second variable performance that results in a loss (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed (other than the long variable performance pattern and special SP reach performance pattern), One of the points is that the dialogue preview performance (operation performance) accompanied by the effective period (operation) of the performance button 17 is likely to be executed (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A tenth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during a specific gaming state (special SP When the second variable effect (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (reach effect pattern other than the long variable effect pattern and special SP reach effect pattern), the effect is better than the reach effect pattern (reach effect pattern). One of the points is that the dialogue preview performance (operation performance) accompanied by the valid period (operation) of the button 17 is likely to be executed (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the ready-to-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 is that when the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state (long variable performance pattern, special SP In the reach performance pattern), while the dialogue preview performance can be executed, the step-up preview performance is not executed. Therefore, the rate at which pre-reach effects are executed and the number of types of pre-reach effects that can be executed are made different between when the first variable effect is executed and when the second variable effect is executed in the normal gaming state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 47 and FIG. In the reach performance pattern), while the dialogue preview performance can be executed, the step-up preview performance is not executed. Therefore, the rate at which pre-reach effects are performed and the number of types of pre-reach effects that can be executed are made different between when the first variable effect is executed and when the second variable effect is executed in a specific gaming state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when the step-up notice performance is executed, the jackpot expectation level (the rate at which the vibration performance associated with the alignment of symbols mentioned above is performed, and the success performance described later) is higher when the dialogue preview performance is executed. (e.g., the rate at which accompanying vibration effects are performed) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) that results in a loss is executed during the normal gaming state, or the first fluctuation performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss during the specific gaming state. ) is executed, the line preview performance (operation performance) or step-up notice performance (non-operation performance) may not be executed, or the second variable performance (second When a special symbol variable display) is executed, or when a first variable effect that results in a jackpot (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed during a specific gaming state, a dialogue preview effect (operation effect) or The step-up notice effect (non-operation effect) may not be executed.

(Serif notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a dialogue preview pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a preview pattern for a dialogue preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 49, the dialogue announcement pattern determination table is associated with the production mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each dialogue announcement pattern, and selected dialogue announcement pattern. For reference, the production structure (effective suggestive production, validity period, content of production) of each line preview pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the dialogue preview performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that encourages the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque performance button image imitating the performance button 17 is displayed at a specific position, and The effect is to display a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal Button White" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Button state" indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" in the button state column indicates a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude.

"Normal dialogue (black)" in the dialogue production mode column indicates that normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is displayed in black letters, and that the normal dialogue is output as audio. It shows.
"Chance speech (black)" indicates that a chance speech that has a possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in black letters, and that the chance speech is outputted as voice.
"Reach line (black)" indicates that the reach line that confirms the execution of the reach effect is displayed in black letters, and that the reach line is output as audio.
"Reach line (red)" indicates that the reach line that confirms the execution of the reach effect is displayed in red letters, and that the reach line is output as audio.

"Heat dialogue (red)" indicates that a heat dialogue that has a high possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in red letters, and that the heat dialogue is outputted as a voice.
The term "hot line (gold)" indicates that a line with a very high probability of winning a jackpot game is displayed in golden letters, and at the same time, the line is outputted as a voice.
The "confirmed line (rainbow)" indicates that the confirmed line that confirms the execution of the jackpot game is displayed in rainbow-colored characters, and that the confirmed line is outputted as voice.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 starts from the time the lines start to be displayed (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly for seconds is to be executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 is strong for 1 second from the time the dialogue starts to be displayed (= when the production button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). This indicates that a strong vibrating effect will be executed.

The expected jackpot for each dialogue production mode is: "Normal dialogue" < "Chance dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (red)" < "Heat dialogue (red)" < "Extreme heat" ``Serif (gold)'' < ``Confirmed line (rainbow)''. In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration performance is "weak vibration performance" < "strong vibration performance".

The first feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that when a line with high expectation of jackpot (hot line or higher) is displayed, a vibration effect can be executed in which the effect button 17 is vibrated. There are several points. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that the line preview performance of the hot line, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the hot line, is executed, compared to the case where the line preview performance of the hot line is executed. In this case, the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the dialogue preview effect of the heat dialogue is executed. One point is that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when it is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the dialogue preview effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a line with a high probability of winning a jackpot (hot line or higher) is displayed has a relatively short duration. Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are several types of points. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the line notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), it is possible to vibrate the production button 17 (vibration production) in the dialogue preview production, but when the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) that results in a loss is executed (special SP reach production) Pattern) includes the fact that the vibration of the performance button 17 (vibration performance) is not performed in the dialogue preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the line notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. In the reach production pattern), it is possible to vibrate the production button 17 (vibration production) in the dialogue preview production, but when the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) that becomes a jackpot is executed ( The special SP reach effect pattern) includes the point that the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is not executed in the dialogue preview effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), it is possible to vibrate the production button 17 (vibration production) in the dialogue preview production, but in a specific game state, the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed. (Long variable performance pattern, special SP reach performance pattern) includes the point that the vibration of the performance button 17 (vibration performance) is not executed in the dialogue preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the line notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. In the reach effect pattern), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) can be executed in the speech preview effect, while the first variable effect (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that becomes a jackpot can be executed in a specific game state. When executed (special SP reach performance pattern), the vibration of the performance button 17 (vibration performance) is not performed in the dialogue preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the line notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. SP reach performance pattern), when the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) is not executed in the dialogue preview production, but the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) that results in a loss is executed (long variation (Other than the performance pattern and the special SP reach performance pattern), there is a point that vibration of the performance button 17 (vibration performance) can be executed in the dialogue preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the line notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that in a specific game state, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach performance pattern) In the case where the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) is not executed in the dialogue preview production, but the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) that becomes a jackpot is executed (long variation production pattern and special SP The reach performance pattern other than the reach performance pattern) includes the ability to vibrate the performance button 17 (vibration performance) in the dialogue preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as the vibration effects performed during the dialogue preview production, but it is also possible to use only the weak vibration effects or only the strong vibration effects, or the vibration effects may be stronger than the vibration duration of the weak vibration effects. The vibration time may be increased.

Furthermore, the expected level of jackpot when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed during the dialogue preview effect is the same in effect modes A to C (normal game state) and effect mode D to G (specific game state). However, the expectation level of jackpot may be higher in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), or the expectation level of jackpot may be higher in production modes D to G (specific gaming state). You can also do this. In this way, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is also possible to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G, which are advantageous to the player, and improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, the effective period ends and the dialogue preview performance is executed by operating the performance button 17 or by elapse of the effective time, but if the effective period ends due to the elapse of the effective time, the dialogue preview performance is executed. You may choose not to execute it.

Also, although the dialogue preview performance is executed with a valid period, it is also possible to execute the dialogue preview performance without generating a valid period. It is also possible to perform only a weak vibration effect for 1 second or only a strong vibration effect for 1 second.

Furthermore, when a second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) that results in a loss is executed during the normal gaming state, vibration of the performance button (vibration performance) may be performed during the dialogue preview performance. However, even in this case, it is preferable to set the rate lower than when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed during the normal gaming state.

Furthermore, when a second variable effect (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during the normal gaming state, vibration of the effect button (vibration effect) may be executed during the dialogue preview effect. However, even in this case, it is better to set the ratio lower than when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss during the normal gaming state is executed. It is preferable to set the rate higher than when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed.

Furthermore, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed during a specific game state, vibration of the performance button (vibration performance) may be performed in the dialogue preview performance. However, even in this case, it is preferable to set the rate to be lower than when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a loss is executed during the specific game state.

Furthermore, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during a specific game state, vibration of the performance button (vibration performance) may be performed during the dialogue preview performance. However, even in this case, it is better to set the ratio to be lower than when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during a specific gaming state. It is preferable to set the rate higher than when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed.

(Step-up notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a step-up notice pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for a step-up notice performance.

As shown in FIG. 50, the step-up notice pattern determination table is associated with the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each step-up notice pattern, and selected step-up notice pattern. For reference, the performance structure of each step-up notice pattern (step-up (SU) performance mode, button vibration) is described.

"1→2" in the step-up effect mode column indicates that the first to second step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3" indicates that the first to third step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4" indicates that the first to fourth step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4→5" indicates that the first to fifth step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→5" indicates that after the first to third step effects are executed in order, the fourth step effect is skipped and the fifth step effect is executed.
In each step-up performance mode, the performance time of the step performance before the last step performance is 1 second, and the performance time of the last step performance is 3 seconds.

"Weak vibration (1 second) at '5'" in the button vibration column means a weak vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the start of the 5th step effect. indicates that it will be executed.

The jackpot expectation for each step-up production mode is "1 → 2" < "1 → 2 → 3" < "1 → 2 → 3 → 4" < "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5" < "1 → 2 → 3 → 5".

The first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that it is possible to perform a vibration effect that vibrates 17. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are several points that can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is the vibration mode (vibration intensity, vibration One point is that there is only one predetermined type of time (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, in the step-up preview performance in which the player does not operate the performance button 17 and it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration performance, it is possible to suppress the performance form from becoming complicated, and improve the interest of the game. becomes possible.

The fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. , Step-up preview performances with low expectations are difficult to execute (execution rate is low). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the weak vibration effect is easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the expectation of a jackpot is high when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 without a valid period (display of an operation promotion image) is executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. When the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a loss is executed (long variable effect pattern, special SP reach effect pattern) than when the second variable effect (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed (long variable effect pattern, special SP reach effect pattern) than when the special SP reach effect pattern) In the performance, the vibration of the performance button 17 (vibration performance) is difficult to perform (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, performance modes A to C (normal game state) are better than performance modes D to G (specific game state) when the performance button 17 does not have a valid period (display of an operation promotion image) in the step-up notice performance. The expectation level of a jackpot may be increased when the vibration effect is executed. Even in this case, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G that are advantageous to the players, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

(pseudo continuous performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a performance pattern for a pseudo-continuous performance.

As shown in FIG. 51, the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table associates the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each pseudo-continuous performance pattern, and selected pseudo-continuous performance pattern. The performance structure (effective suggestive performance, effective period, performance content) of each pseudo-continuous performance pattern is described for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the pseudo continuous performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that encourages the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque performance button image imitating the performance button 17 is displayed at a specific position, and The effect is to display a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal Button White" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Protruding button white" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 emits white light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Protruding" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state.

"Pseudo-failure" in the pseudo-sequence production mode column means that the normal production pattern 70a temporarily stops without the pseudo-symbol suggesting the execution of a pseudo-sequence as the central production pattern 70a, and the failure sound effect is emitted. This indicates that the outputted pseudo consecutive failure performance will be executed.
"Pseudo success" means that the pseudo symbol 70a in the center that suggests the execution of a pseudo series temporarily stops, a success sound effect is output, the second movable member 74 moves weakly, and the pseudo series is executed. This indicates that a pseudo consecutive success performance will be executed.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 starts when the pseudo pattern temporarily stops (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly for one second will be executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a strong vibration effect will be executed.

The jackpot expectation level of each promotional performance is "normal button white" < "protruding button white". Moreover, the jackpot expectation level of each button state is "normal" < "prominent". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration performance is "weak vibration performance" < "strong vibration performance".

The first feature of the pseudo consecutive effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that a vibration effect that causes the button 17 to vibrate may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are several points that can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pseudo consecutive effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types of points depending on the situation. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51 is that the same performance device (performance button vibration Although it is possible to execute a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance) using the motor, second movable member 74, etc., it is possible to execute a pseudo continuous performance using the performance modes D to G (specific gaming state) rather than performance modes A to C (normal gaming state). ) has a higher expectation of a jackpot when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo continuous success performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G, which are advantageous to the players, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the pseudo-sequence performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are cases in which a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive success performance) is executed using a button vibration motor that vibrates. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the performance button 17 may be in a protruding state during the valid period when a pseudo consecutive success performance is performed in a variable performance pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot, but it may not be in a protruding state.

Further, although there are a weak vibration performance and a strong vibration performance as the vibration performance executed in the pseudo consecutive success performance, only the weak vibration performance or only the strong vibration performance may be used.

In addition, although a valid period is generated to execute a pseudo consecutive success effect or a pseudo consecutive failure effect, it is also possible to execute a pseudo continuous success effect or a pseudo continuous failure effect without generating a valid period. The vibration performance that is often performed during the pseudo consecutive success performance may be only a 3-second weak vibration performance or only a 3-second strong vibration performance, or only a 1-second weak vibration performance or only a 1-second strong vibration performance. You can also do this.

Furthermore, performance modes A to C (normal game state) are better than performance modes D to G (specific game state) because they are simulated using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.). The expectation level of a jackpot when a consecutive performance (pseudo successive success performance) is executed may be set higher, and performance mode B or C may be higher than performance mode A using the same performance device (performance button vibration). The expectation level of a jackpot when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo continuous success performance) using a motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed may be made higher, and performance modes D~ than performance mode G may be set. Even if F is made to have a higher jackpot expectation when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo continuous success performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. good.

Further, in the pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo continuous successful performance), the motion performance using the second movable member 74 is performed, but the motion performance using the first movable member 73 may be performed. In this case, it is preferable that the execution rate of the motion performance using the second movable member 74 is higher than that of the motion performance using the first movable member 73.

(Development performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an advanced performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a performance pattern for advanced performance.

As shown in FIG. 52, the advanced performance pattern determination table includes the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, advanced performance type to be determined for the advanced performance pattern, selection rate (%) of each advanced performance pattern, The selected advanced performance patterns are associated with each other, and the performance configuration (effective suggestive performance, valid period, and performance content) of each advanced performance pattern is described for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
``None'' in the effective suggestion effect column indicates that the effective suggestion effect is not executed, and ``Yes (gase)'' indicates that the effective suggestion effect is executed but the validity period does not occur after that. This indicates that this is an effective suggestion effect, and "present" indicates that the effective suggestion effect will be executed and then a valid period will occur.

The "validity period (long press for 4 seconds)" indicates that the advanced performance progresses step by step by long pressing the performance button 17, and that the valid period of the advanced performance ends when 4 seconds have elapsed.
The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is a effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, as a result of a plurality of translucent effect button images gathering at a specific position, an opaque effect is created. The button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal Button White" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Normal button red" means that, as the opaque effect button image described above, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is not protruding in its normal state and emits red light is displayed, and the effect button 17 also emits red light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Protruding" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state.

"SP notification" in the column of development performance mode means that as a result of the development performance, an SP development design that suggests development to SP reach performance is derived and displayed, and an SP development performance that outputs the first development sound effect is executed. Which indicates that.
"SPSP notification" indicates that as a result of the development performance, an SPSP development design is derived and displayed that suggests development to the SPSP reach performance, and a SPSP development performance is executed that outputs a second development sound effect. .
"Full rotation notification" refers to the execution of a full rotation development effect that derives and displays a full rotation development symbol that suggests development to a full rotation reach effect as a result of the development effect, and outputs a third development sound effect. It shows.

The "weak motion" in the accessory motion column is a weak motion effect in which the second movable member 74 emits blue light and performs a weak motion with a small motion width when various symbols are displayed (at the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.
"Strong motion" means that a strong motion performance is executed in which the second movable member 74 emits red light and performs a strong motion with a large swing width when various symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). It shows.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 is weak for 1 second from the time when various advanced symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). This indicates that a weak vibration effect will be executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" is a weak vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from the time when various symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.

The jackpot expectation level of each action performance is "weak action" < "strong action". In addition, the jackpot expectation level of each vibration performance is "weak vibration" < "strong vibration".

The first feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that a vibration effect may be executed in which the effect period of the button 17 is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the development performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and when the SPSP development effect is executed, the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed. One point is that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect is executed. Therefore, when the SPSP development effect is executed, the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed can be increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. One of the points is that the vibration performance is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is the vibration of the vibration performance that is executed when the advanced performance (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed in a variable performance pattern with high expectation of jackpot. There are two types of strength depending on the degree of jackpot expectation. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that the same performance device (performance button vibration motor , second movable member 74, etc.), but the performance modes D to G (specific game state) are more effective than the performance modes A to C (normal game state). On the other hand, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when an advanced performance is executed using a performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G, which are advantageous to the players, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), it is possible to vibrate the production button 17 (vibration production) in the development production, but when the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) that results in a loss is executed (special SP reach production pattern ) is that the vibration of the performance button 17 (vibration performance) is not executed in the advanced performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), it is possible to vibrate the production button 17 (vibration production) in the development production, while when the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) that becomes a jackpot is executed (special SP reach production pattern ) is that the vibration of the performance button 17 (vibration performance) is not executed in the advanced performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), it is possible to vibrate the production button 17 (vibration production) in the development production, but in a specific game state, when the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed ( Special SP reach performance) includes the point that the vibration of the performance button 17 (vibration performance) is not executed in the advanced performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. In the reach performance pattern), the vibration of the performance button 17 (vibration performance) can be executed in the developed performance, while in the specific game state, the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that becomes a jackpot can be executed. In the case (special SP reach effect pattern), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) is not executed in the advanced effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that in a specific gaming state, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed (special SP reach performance pattern) In the case where the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) is not executed in the development production, and the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) that results in a loss is executed (other than the special SP reach production pattern) A point that can be mentioned is that the vibration of the performance button 17 (vibration performance) can be executed in the advanced performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 52 is that in a specific gaming state, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach performance pattern) In the case where the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) is not executed in the development production, but the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) that becomes a jackpot is executed (reach other than the special SP reach production pattern) In the performance pattern), the vibration of the performance button 17 (vibration performance) can be executed in the advanced performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as the vibration effects executed in the advanced effect, only the weak vibration effects or only the strong vibration effects may be used.

In addition, production modes A to C (normal gaming state) are more advanced than production modes D to G (specific gaming states) using the same production device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.). The expectation level of a jackpot when a performance (SPSP advanced performance, etc.) is executed may be set higher, and performance mode B or C may be set higher than performance mode A using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, etc.). , the second movable member 74, etc.), the expectation level of a jackpot may be higher when an advanced effect is executed using the second movable member 74, etc. The expectation level of a jackpot may be increased when an advanced presentation is performed using the device (the presentation button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.).

Furthermore, when the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) that results in a loss is executed during the normal gaming state, the vibration of the performance button (vibration performance) may be executed in the development performance. Even in this case, it is preferable to set the rate to be lower than when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed during the normal gaming state.

Furthermore, when a second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during the normal gaming state, vibration of the performance button (vibration performance) may be performed in the advanced performance. Even in this case, it is preferable to set the ratio lower than when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss during the normal gaming state is executed, and the percentage results in a loss during the normal gaming state. It is preferable to set the rate higher than when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed.

Furthermore, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed during a specific game state, the vibration of the performance button (vibration performance) may be performed in the development performance. Even in this case, it is preferable to set the rate to be lower than the case where the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a loss is executed during the specific game state.

Furthermore, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during a specific gaming state, vibration of the performance button (vibration performance) may be performed in the advanced performance. Even in this case, it is better to set the ratio lower than when the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot during a specific gaming state is executed, and that results in a loss during the specific gaming state. It is preferable to set the rate higher than when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed.

(Roulette notice decision table)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a roulette preview determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a roulette preview performance to be executed during a variable performance. The roulette preview decision table is associated with the jackpot lottery result, the variable performance pattern, and the distribution ratio (%) of whether or not the roulette preview performance can be executed.

The first feature of the roulette notice determination table shown in FIG. When executed, the roulette preview performance is less likely to be executed during the variable performance.

In other words, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed during the normal gaming state, the reach performance other than the special SP reach is executed, while the first variable performance is executed during the specific gaming state. When (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed, the special SP reach effect is executed without executing the reach effect other than the special SP reach effect, so the first variation causes a loss during the normal gaming state. The roulette notice performance (selection performance) is more difficult to execute when the first variable performance that results in a loss is executed during a specific game state than when the performance is executed. By doing so, during the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the first variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved. becomes possible.

In addition, the first variable performance (variation of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot during a specific gaming state is more effective than the case where the first variable performance (fluctuation display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot during the normal gaming state is executed. If the roulette preview effect (selection effect) is executed, the roulette preview effect (selection effect) is more difficult to execute. By doing so, during the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the first variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved. becomes possible.

In addition, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed during a specific gaming state, the special SP reach performance is executed without performing other reach performances other than the special SP reach performance, When the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed during a specific gaming state, a reach effect other than the special SP reach is executed, so the first variable effect is executed during the specific gaming state. The roulette notice performance (selection performance) is more likely to be executed when the second variable performance is executed during the specific game state than when the roulette preview performance (selection performance) is executed. By doing so, during a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, the performance effect related to the second variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved. becomes possible.

In addition, when the special SP reach effect is executed, the roulette preview effect is executed, but when the special SP reach effect is executed, the roulette preview effect may not be executed. . In this case, if the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal gaming state, and if the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed during the specific gaming state, If it is executed, the roulette preview effect will not be executed.

(Roulette notice stop option determination table)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a roulette preview stop option determination table that is referred to when deciding which option to stop in the roulette preview presentation. The stop option determination table for the roulette notice is associated with a variable performance pattern, a distribution ratio (%) of stop options, a determined stop option, and a type of option to be displayed.

Six types of stop options are set: "dregs", "pseudo continuous", "chance", "SP", "SPSP", and "full rotation".

"Cast" is not an option that suggests any performance, but an option that suggests that the expectation of winning a jackpot is low (lose).
"Pseudo-continuation" is an option that suggests that a pseudo-continuation effect will be executed.
"Chance" is not an option that suggests any performance, but an option that suggests that the expectation of winning a jackpot is higher than "Cast".
"SP" is an option that suggests that SP reach effect is executed.
"SPSP" is an option that suggests that SPSP reach effect is executed.
“Full rotation” is an option that suggests that a full rotation reach effect will be executed.

The first feature of the roulette notice stop option determination table shown in FIG. 54 is that the jackpot expectation level varies depending on the type of option displayed. Specifically, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when there is no "scrap" than when it is included, and the probability of a jackpot is higher when it does not include "chance" than when it is included. The level of expectation is high, and the level of expectation for a jackpot is higher when the game includes ``full rotation'' than when it does not include ``full rotation.'' By doing so, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the degree of jackpot expectation based on the types of choices, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the roulette notice stop option determination table shown in FIG. However, the point is that the roulette preview performance that includes options with a high expectation of jackpot is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) than when the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed. It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the roulette notice stop option determination table shown in FIG. However, in a specific gaming state, a roulette preview performance that includes an option with a high expectation of a jackpot is more likely to be executed than when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed (special SP reach) ( The most important point is that the execution rate is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the roulette notice stop option determination table shown in FIG. When the second variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed (other than special SP reach), the roulette preview display that includes options with high expectation of jackpot is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is (high) points. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the roulette notice stop option determination table shown in FIG. In a specific game state, when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed (other than special SP reach), the roulette preview performance that includes options with high expectation of jackpot is more likely to be executed ( The most important point is that the execution rate is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Cut-in production pattern determination table)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a cut-in performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the performance pattern of cut-in performance for performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. It is a diagram showing a cut-in performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the performance pattern of the cut-in performance for G (specific game state).

As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the cut-in effect pattern determination table includes the effect mode, jackpot determination result, variable effect pattern type, selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, and selected cut-in effect pattern. are associated with each other, and the production structure (effective suggestive production, effective period, content of production) of each cut-in production pattern is described for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 4 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the cut-in performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or when 4 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, and specifically, as a result of executing the effective suggestion performance without performing the effective suggestion performance, An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal Button White" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 also emits a rainbow light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" indicates a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Protruding" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state.

"Blue cut-in" in the cut-in effect mode column means that a blue cut-in effect is executed in which a blue frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a first cut-in sound effect is output. It shows that it will be done.
“Green cut-in” indicates that a green cut-in effect is executed in which a green frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a second cut-in sound effect is output. .
“Red cut-in” indicates that a red cut-in effect is executed in which a red frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a third cut-in sound effect is output. .

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means when the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 starts displaying the cut-in image (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the validity period ends) This indicates that a weak vibration performance in which weak vibrations are produced for 3 seconds is to be executed.
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 vibrates for 3 seconds from the start of displaying the cut-in image (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a strong vibration effect in which the camera vibrates strongly will be executed.

The expected jackpot for each cut-in is "Blue Cut-in" < "Green Cut-in" < "Red Cut-in". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration performance is "weak vibration performance" < "strong vibration performance".

The first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that when a cut-in image with high expectation of jackpot is displayed (cut-in effect is executed), the validity period of the effect button 17 is set. One point is that a vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that the vibration effect executed when a cut-in image with high expectation of jackpot is displayed (cut-in effect is executed) is relatively One point is that it takes a long time. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is the vibration intensity of the vibration effect executed when a cut-in image with a high expectation of jackpot is displayed (cut-in effect is executed). There are two types of jackpots depending on the level of expectation of jackpot. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the cut-in performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed in the normal gaming state (special SP (other than reach), the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) in the cut-in production is better than when the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) that results in a loss is executed (special SP reach). One of the points is that it is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the cut-in performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed in the normal gaming state (special SP (other than reach), the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) in the cut-in production is better than when the second variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach). One of the points is that it is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the cut-in performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed in the normal gaming state (special SP The vibration of the production button 17 in the cut-in production is better when the first variable production (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed (special SP reach) in a specific game state (other than reach). (Vibration effect) is easy to execute (execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the cut-in performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed in the normal gaming state (special SP The vibration of the performance button 17 in the cut-in performance is better when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (special SP reach) in a specific game state (other than reach). (Vibration effect) is easy to execute (execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the cut-in performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed in a specific game state (special SP When the second variable effect (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) that results in a loss is executed (other than special SP reach), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) in the cut-in effect is more One of the points is that it is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A ninth feature of the cut-in performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is that when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed in a specific gaming state (special SP When the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed (other than special SP reach), the vibration of the effect button 17 (vibration effect) in the cut-in effect is more One of the points is that it is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as the vibration effects executed in the cut-in effect, only the weak vibration effects or only the strong vibration effects may be used.

Also, although the cut-in effect is executed with a valid period, it is also possible to execute the cut-in effect without generating a valid period. It may be possible to have only a weak vibration performance for 3 seconds or only a strong vibration performance for 3 seconds, or only a weak vibration performance for 1 second or only a strong vibration performance for 1 second.

In addition, when the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) that results in a loss is executed during the normal gaming state, or the first fluctuation performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss during the specific gaming state. ) is executed, the vibration of the production button 17 (vibration production) may be prevented from being executed in the cut-in production, or the second variation production (variation of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot during the normal gaming state. The vibration (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 in the cut-in effect also occurs when the first variable effect (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed during a specific gaming state. ).

Furthermore, when the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal gaming state, the cut-in performance including the effective suggestion performance may not be executed, or the effective suggestion performance may be A cut-in effect that is not executed may be executed, or if a first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during a specific game state, a cut-in effect including an effective suggestion effect may be executed. may not be executed, or a cut-in effect may be executed in which the effective suggestion effect is not executed.

(Decision production pattern determination table)
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a fixed effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a fixed effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 57, the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each determination performance pattern, and selected performance pattern are associated with the final performance pattern determination table. For reference, the production structure (effective suggestion production, validity period, production content) of each fixed production pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which button images are moved and displayed at 70, and button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the final performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or when 5 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, and specifically, as a result of executing the effective suggestion performance without performing the effective suggestion performance, An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal Button White" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 also emits a rainbow light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" indicates a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Protruding" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state.

"Failure" in the column of winning presentation mode refers to a failed presentation indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed because the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color. indicates that it will be executed.
"Success" means that the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position and emits rainbow-colored light, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that a jackpot game is executed. This indicates that a successful performance will be executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the button vibration column is determined by the button vibration motor to vibrate the performance button 17 and is determined by the start of a successful performance (= when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period ends. This shows that a strong vibration performance (decision success vibration performance) is executed in which the strong vibration is performed for 4 seconds from the time of 10 minutes, and then the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the button light emission column is determined by the effect button LED for causing the effect button 17 to emit light and starts from the start of a successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This shows that rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the strong vibration of the production button 17).

The jackpot expectation of each promotional performance is ``normal button white'' < ``protruding button red'' < ``protruding button rainbow.'' Moreover, the jackpot expectation level of each button state is "normal" < "prominent".

The first feature of the final effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 57 is that when a successful successful effect is executed, a vibration effect that generates a valid period and vibrates the effect button 17 is executed. . Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively notify that a jackpot game will be executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 57 is that the valid period of the performance button 17 that occurs during the variable performance is the longest period. Therefore, inconveniences such as the player missing the operation of the performance button 17 can be suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 57 is that the performance button 17 vibrates for the longest period as a strong vibration performance that occurs during a variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of successful performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 57 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17. Therefore, even after the vibration of the performance button 17 ends, the player's feeling of exhilaration can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the decision performance (decision success performance), the motion performance using the first movable member 73 is performed, but the motion performance using the second movable member 74 may also be performed. In this case, it is preferable that the execution rate of the motion performance using the first movable member 73 is higher than that of the motion performance using the second movable member 74.

(Re-lottery performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 58, the re-lottery effect pattern determination table includes the effect mode, whether there is promotion (promotion is planned), the selection rate (%) of each re-lottery effect pattern, and the selected re-lottery effect pattern. They are associated with each other, and the performance structure (effective suggestion performance, validity period, performance content) of each re-lottery performance pattern is described for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the re-lottery performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is a effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and specifically, displays an opaque effect button image at a specific position without executing the effective suggestion effect. At the same time, a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal Button White" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Normal button red" means that, as the opaque effect button image described above, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is not protruding in its normal state and emits red light is displayed, and the effect button 17 also emits red light. It is shown that.
"Normal button rainbow" means that, as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting rainbow light is displayed, and the effect button 17 also emits a rainbow light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. It shows.

"Promotion failure performance" in the re-lottery performance mode column refers to non-promoted symbols that do not result in a performance symbol that is advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery performance (for example, even number design → even number design, odd number design other than "7" → This indicates that an odd number symbol other than "7" is derived and displayed (temporarily stopped) and a non-promoted sound effect is output.
"Promotion success performance" means that promotion symbols that are advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery production (for example, even number symbols → odd number symbols, odd number symbols other than "7" → "7" symbols) are derived and displayed. (temporary stop) and a promotion sound effect is output.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the time the promotion symbol is derived (= the end of the valid period). This indicates that a strong vibration effect will be executed.

"Rainbow light emission (4 seconds)" in the button light emission column means that the production button LED for causing the production button 17 to emit light is activated for 4 seconds (when the production button 17 is activated) from the time when the promotion symbol is derived (= the end of the valid period). This shows that rainbow light is emitted over a period longer than the period of strong vibration.

The expected jackpot for each promotional performance is ``normal button white'' < ``normal button red'' < ``normal button rainbow.''

The first feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that when a promotion success effect is executed, a vibration effect is executed that generates a valid period and vibrates the effect button 17. It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the effect symbol has been promoted to an advantageous effect symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, even after the strong vibration effect ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that although the re-lottery effect (promotion failure effect, promotion success effect) is executed by generating a valid period, the re-lottery effect may be executed without generating a valid term.

(Fixed performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a confirmed performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the performance pattern of the confirmed performance.

As shown in FIG. 59, the confirmed performance pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each confirmed performance pattern, and confirmed performance pattern to be selected. The performance structure (execution timing, performance content) of each confirmed performance pattern is described.

"-" in the execution timing column indicates that the confirmed performance is not executed, and "○" indicates that the confirmed performance is executed.
The "confirmation sound" in the audio column indicates that a confirmation sound indicating that a jackpot game will be executed is output.
"Handle rainbow light emission" in the light emission column means that the handle LED for making the firing handle 15 emit light will emit rainbow colors from the time the final sound is output until the variation stops (for more than 4 seconds until the production pattern stops displaying). It shows that.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the time the final sound is output. It shows.

The first feature of the confirmed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that when a confirmed effect is executed, a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 without generating a valid period is executed. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a jackpot game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the confirmed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59 is that the rainbow emission of the firing handle 15 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, even after the strong vibration effect ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the confirmed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the confirmed effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) than when the second variable effect (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed (special SP reach). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the confirmed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 59, in a specific game state, the second The point is that when the variable effect (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed (other than special SP reach), the confirmed effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed during the normal gaming state, or when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed during the specific gaming state Alternatively, the final effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) may not be executed.

(Summary of various tables shown in Figures 39 to 59)
Here, the first feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that a vibration effect (weak vibration for 1 second or strong vibration for 1 second) is executed in a dialogue preview effect with a validity period of the effect button 17. When the vibration performance (weak vibration 1 second) is executed as a step-up notice performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, the jackpot expectation level (vibration performance associated with pattern alignment (strong vibration 4) The high rate of performance (seconds) and the high rate of vibration performance (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds) in the final performance, etc. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is more effective in a dialogue preview effect with a valid period of the effect button 17 than when the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed in a step-up preview effect without the effect period of the effect button 17. 2 seconds or strong vibration 1 second) is executed, the jackpot expectation level (rate of execution of the vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) accompanying the alignment of the symbols mentioned above, the vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) with the deciding effect described later) 4 seconds → 5 seconds)) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that the vibration performance that is executed as a jackpot preview performance includes a first vibration performance that has a relatively short vibration period (during the dialogue preview performance, step-up Vibration performance (1 second) during preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, etc.) and second vibration performance (during cut-in performance, decisive success performance) with a longer vibration period (performance period) than the first vibration performance There is a vibration performance (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) that is longer than 1 second, such as during the time and confirmed performance, and after the first performance period (pre-reach performance), there is a second performance period (normal reach performance). ) and a variable performance with a third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance), the first vibration performance is more likely to be executed during the first performance period (higher execution rate) than during the second performance period. There are several points. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player without making him or her mistake that he or she will win the jackpot, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, regarding the look-ahead vibration performance, the first vibration performance has a relatively short vibration period, but even if the look-ahead vibration performance is included, the second performance will start after the first performance period (pre-reach performance). In a variable performance that has a period (normal reach performance) and a third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance), the first vibration performance is easier to be executed (performed) during the first performance period than during the second performance period. The ratio is high). Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player without making him or her mistake that he or she will win the jackpot, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that after the first performance period (pre-reach performance), the second performance period (normal reach performance), and the third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance). In a fluctuating performance in which there is a vibration performance (direction), the first vibration performance (during dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, etc.) is more likely to occur during the first performance period than during the third performance period. An example of this is that the performance (1 second) is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player without making him or her mistake that he or she will win the jackpot, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that the vibration performance executed as a jackpot preview performance includes a first vibration performance with a short vibration period (during dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance). , a vibration performance (1 second) during a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance with a longer vibration period than the first vibration performance (such as during a cut-in performance, a successful decision performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) There are vibration effects that are longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), there is a second effect period (normal reach effect) and a third effect period ( In a variable performance with SP/SPSP reach performance), the second vibration performance is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) during the second performance period than during the first performance period. Therefore, the expectations of the players can be effectively raised, and the interest in the game can be improved.

A fifth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that after the first performance period (pre-reach performance), the second performance period (normal reach performance), and the third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance). In a variable performance that has a second vibration performance (vibration performance that is longer than 1 second, such as during cut-in performance, successful decision performance, confirmed performance, etc.), the third performance period is longer than the first performance period. (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)) is easy to execute (has a high execution rate). Therefore, the expectations of the players can be effectively raised, and the interest in the game can be improved.

A sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that during the first performance period (pre-reach performance), the rate at which the first vibration performance (1 second) is executed with the performance button 17 in the normal state is This is higher than the rate of executing the first vibration performance with the performance button 17 in the protruding state. Therefore, the expectations of the players are not excessively aroused during the first performance period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A seventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that during the third performance period (during SP/SPSP reach performance), the performance button 17 is in the protruding state and the second vibration performance (for 3 seconds or more) is activated. The point is that the rate of execution is higher than the rate of execution of the second vibration performance with the performance button 17 in the normal state. Therefore, the expectations of the players are not excessively aroused during the first performance period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that the vibration performance executed as a jackpot preview performance includes a first vibration performance with a short vibration period (during dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance) , vibration effects (1 second) during pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, etc.), and second vibration effects (during cut-in effects, successful performance, etc.) that have a longer vibration period (effect period) than the first vibration effects. There are vibration performances that are longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and a continuous performance (pseudo continuous performance) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). In a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed, the second vibration performance is more likely to be executed when the first vibration performance is executed than when the first vibration performance is not executed (the rate of execution is high) ) points can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding whether or not the first vibration effect will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A ninth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that the vibration performance executed as a jackpot preview performance includes a second vibration performance (performance period) that has a longer vibration period (performance period) than the first vibration performance. There are vibration effects that are longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) during cut-in effects, successful decision effects, confirmation effects, etc., and during production modes A to C (normal gaming state). In the fluctuating performance, the reach performance using the second type of performance symbols (even numbered symbols) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) than the reach performance using the first type of production symbols (odd numbered symbols other than "7"). ), the reach effect is more difficult to execute with the third type of effect symbol (the “7” effect symbol) than the reach effect with the second type of effect symbol (the rate of execution is lower), The point is that the second vibration performance is easier to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) when the ready-to-reach effect is executed using the third type of effect pattern than when the ready-to-reach effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of effect symbols used to execute the ready-to-reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A tenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that in the jackpot variation performance in which the reach performance is executed, the vibration performance (display of the operation promotion image) without the validity period (display of the operation promotion image) during the pre-reach performance ( Vibration effects without a valid period (display of operation promotion images) during post-reach effects (development effect, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, confirmation effect) are more effective than the number of executions of pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmed effects). ) is likely to be executed more often. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation during the post-reach performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that a specific reach performance (SP reach performance) is preferable to a jackpot variable performance in which a predetermined reach performance (normal reach performance, full rotation reach performance) is executed. , SPSP reach effect) is executed more frequently than the jackpot fluctuation effect in which vibration effects without a validity period (development effect, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, fixed effect) are more likely to be executed during the post-reach effect. can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that in the loss fluctuation performance where the reach performance is executed, the vibration performance (development performance, pattern alignment, C The point is that the number of executions of vibration effects without a validity period (pre-read vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmed effect) during the pre-reach effect tends to be greater than the number of executions of patterns matching, confirmed effect). . Therefore, the expectation level of a jackpot can be suggested by the vibration performance without a validity period, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that when a pre-reach preview performance (line preview performance, step-up notice performance) is executed in a variable performance, When a post-reach preview performance (cut-in performance) with high expectations for a jackpot is executed, the vibration performance of the production button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and a pre-reach preview performance When the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the vibrating effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the pre-reach preview effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that the post-reach preview performance is better in performance modes D to G (specific game state) than in performance modes A to C (normal game state). In this case, the expectation level of a jackpot increases when a vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of an operation promotion image) is executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in production modes A to C (normal gaming state) than in production modes D to G (specific gaming states), vibrations accompanying the validity period of the production button 17 (display of operation promotion image) in the post-reach preview production are more effective than in production modes D to G (specific gaming states). The expectation level of a jackpot when the performance is performed may be increased. Even in this case, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G that are advantageous to the players, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

As a fifteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59, during the first performance period (before reach) in the variable performance, the vibration of the performance button 17 is lower than when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is not executed. The jackpot expectation level is higher when the effect is executed, and in the jackpot variable effect, regardless of whether the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed during the pre-reach effect, the after-reach effect (decision success effect) In the later period), the vibration performance of the performance button 17 (vibration performance when the symbols are aligned or the C symbols are aligned) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of a jackpot through the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 16th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is a vibration performance (during dialogue preview performance, pseudo One of the vibration performances such as continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, etc.) is executed in one of multiple types of vibration modes (weak vibration, strong vibration) with different jackpot expectations, A vibration performance that does not involve the valid period of the performance button 17 (display of an operation promotion image) that is executed during a variable performance (one of the vibration performances during a step-up notice performance, when the symbols are aligned, when the C symbols are aligned, etc.) is executed in one predetermined vibration mode. Therefore, in the case where it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration mode because there is no validity period, it is possible to suppress the presentation mode of the vibration performance from becoming complicated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A seventeenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that during the pre-reach performance period in the jackpot fluctuation performance, the vibration performance (line preview performance) accompanied by the valid period of the performance button 17 (display of the operation promotion image) After that, ( Vibration performances (vibration performances for 3 seconds or more such as successful execution, when the symbols are aligned, when the C symbols are aligned, etc.) are executed at different rates during the post-reach performance period) and are not accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17. (Vibration performance during step-up notice performance) is easier to execute (execution rate is higher) during normal game states (performance modes A to C) than during specific game states (performance modes D to G). can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 18th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed, the types of jackpot effect symbols (even symbols, "7") that match the symbols (including the C symbols) It is possible to change the execution mode of the vibration effect (execution or non-execution, execution timing, etc.) in the jackpot notice effect depending on odd number symbols other than "7" symbol, but depending on the execution of the winning effect or confirmed effect. When performing the vibration effect, the vibration mode is the same regardless of the type of jackpot effect symbols that match the symbols (including the C symbols). Therefore, while increasing the expectation of a jackpot through the vibration performance, it is possible to uniformly celebrate the jackpot, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 19th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that after a vibration performance (decision success performance, etc.) with a validity period (display of an operation promotion image) is executed in a jackpot fluctuation performance, the validity period ( It is possible to perform vibration effects (symbol alignment, C pattern alignment, etc.) that are not accompanied by operation promotion images (display of operation promotion images), and vibration effects (decision effects, etc.) that involve a valid period (display of operation promotion images) can be performed by operating the effect button 17. The point is that while the timing to start the vibration varies depending on the timing, the timing to start the vibration is predetermined for vibration performances (symbol alignment, C pattern alignment, etc.) that do not have a validity period (display of operation promotion images). It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to perform the vibration effect at an appropriate timing depending on whether or not the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) is involved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twentieth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that the same movable member (second Although it is possible to perform specific performances (pseudo continuous performances, advanced performances, etc.) using the movable member 74), specific performances can be executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to G (specific game state). The difference is that the expected jackpot is different when executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-first feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) and the performance modes D to G (specific gaming state) have multiple tables with different jackpot expectations. It is possible to perform stage performances (step-up preview performances, pseudo-continuation performances, etc.) that progress to any of the stages, but in production modes A to C (normal game state) and production modes D to G (specific game state). If the stage effects (step-up preview effects, pseudo continuous effects, etc.) are the same stage (if the step-up preview effects are any of the 3rd step effects, 4th step effects, or 5th step effects; if the pseudo continuous effects are the same, One point is that the expected level of jackpot is different if the game progresses to 1 or 2 times. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) and the performance modes D to G (specific gaming state) have multiple tables with different jackpot expectations. In addition to being able to execute any of the operation promotion effects, it is also possible to execute operation effects (any of the development effects, cut-in effects, and final effects) according to the operation of the effect button 17, and the effect modes A to C (normal The expected level of jackpot when the same operation promotion effect (for example, normal button white) is executed is different between production modes D to G (specific gaming states) and production modes A to C (normal gaming state). ) and performance modes D to G (specific game states), when the operation performance is executed, the effective suggestion performance is executed and the operation is promoted more than when the operation promotion performance is executed without the effective suggestion performance. One point to note is that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the effective suggestion performance will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 39 to 59 is that the vibration performance with a relatively short vibration period (for example, 1 second) that is executed in conjunction with the jackpot preview performance is There are cases in which it is executed with a validity period and cases in which it is executed without a validity period, but vibration performances with a relatively long vibration period (more than 3 seconds) that are executed in conjunction with jackpot preview performances. is executed with a validity period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect for the operation of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Summary of various tables shown in Figures 32 to 59)
Here, the first feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state, the specific In the game state, operation performances that involve operation of the performance button 17 (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, One of the points is that it is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high) (decision performance, re-lottery performance). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in a specific game state, the second variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is When the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the operation effects that involve operating the effect button 17 (line preview effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-lottery effect) are One of the points is that it is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in the normal gaming state, the first variable effect (variable effect of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed. It is easier to operate the performance button 17 before the reach when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (the reach effect is performed) is executed in a specific gaming state than when the reach effect is executed. An example of this is that it is difficult to execute (the rate of execution is low) operation performances (such as dialogue preview performances, roulette preview performances, etc.) that involve the following. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in the normal gaming state, the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (ready-to-reach performance is performed) is executed. The operation that involves operating the performance button 17 is better when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed in a specific gaming state than when the One of the points is that the number of executions of performances (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, roulette preview performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance, re-lottery performance) is likely to decrease (the rate of decrease is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in a specific gaming state, a first variable performance (a variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed. In the case where the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot (where the reach effect is performed) is executed, the operation performance (which involves operating the performance button 17 before reaching the reach) is more effective than when the reach effect is performed. One of the points is that pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue announcement performances, roulette announcement performances, etc.) are easy to execute (execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in a specific gaming state, a first variable performance (a variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed. When the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach performance is performed) is executed, the operation performance that involves the operation of the performance button 17 (the line preview performance) , pseudo-continuous performance, advanced performance, roulette preview performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance, re-lottery performance) are likely to be executed frequently (increase rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a seventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59, in the normal game state, the specific game In this state, if the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed, the vibration performance that vibrates the performance button 17 (pre-reading vibration performance, line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development) One of the points is that it is difficult to execute (a low rate of execution) such as performances, roulette preview performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, etc. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in a specific game state, the loss is more likely to occur than when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed. When the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the vibration performance that vibrates the performance button 17 (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, roulette preview performance) , cut-in performance, decisive performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) are easy to execute (execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A ninth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in the normal gaming state, the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (ready-to-reach performance is performed) is executed. It is better to vibrate the effect button 17 before the reach when the first variable effect (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (the reach effect is performed) is executed in a specific game state than when the reach effect is executed. One of the points is that it is difficult to execute (the rate of execution is low) the vibration performances (pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, roulette preview performances, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A tenth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in the normal gaming state, the first variable effect (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed. The operation that involves operating the performance button 17 is better when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed in a specific gaming state than when the The point is that the number of executions of performances (pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, roulette preview performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) tends to decrease (the rate of decrease is high). It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

An eleventh feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in a specific gaming state, a first variable performance (a variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed. It is better to perform a vibrating effect (pre-reading) that vibrates the effect button 17 before reaching the jackpot when the second variable effect (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot (receives a reach effect) is executed than when Vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, roulette preview performance, etc.) are easy to execute (execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twelfth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in a specific gaming state, a first variable performance (a variable display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot (a reach effect is performed) is executed. When the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot (ready-to-reach performance is performed) is executed, the operation performance (pre-reading vibration performance) that involves the operation of the performance button 17 is better than when , line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, roulette preview performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) are likely to be executed many times (increase rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A thirteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in the normal gaming state, the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific gaming state. When the first variable display (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, the number of types of preview effects that can be executed is greater (the former includes timer effects, line preview effects, development effects, They are a roulette preview performance, a cut-in performance, and a confirmed performance, and the latter includes various look-ahead performances, timer performances, dialogue preview performances, step-up preview performances, pseudo-continuation performances, development performances, roulette preview performances, cut-in performances, final performances, (determined performance). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in the normal game state, the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state. When the first variable effect (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed, the execution timing is before the reach (various look-ahead effects, line preview effects, step-up preview effects, pseudo continuous effects, etc.) The problem is that the number of executions is likely to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in a specific game state, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, When the second variable effect (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed, the execution timing is before the reach (various look-ahead effects, line preview effects, step-up preview effects, pseudo continuous effects, etc.) The problem is that the number of executions is likely to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A sixteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in the normal game state, the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state. When the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed, the specific performance (pre-reading motion performance, pseudo-coupling) that involves the movement of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is better. One of the points is that it is easy to execute performances (directions, advanced performances, final performances, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A seventeenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in a specific game state, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, When the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, it is better to perform a specific performance (pre-reading motion performance, pseudo-coupling) that involves the movement of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74). One of the points is that it is easy to execute performances (directions, advanced performances, final performances, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in the normal game state, the specific game In this state, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed, the movement performance (pre-reading motion) of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) The problem is that it is difficult to perform performances (directions, pseudo-continuous performances, advanced performances, decisive performances, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 19th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in a specific gaming state, the loss is more likely to occur than when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a loss is executed. When the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed, the movement performance (pre-reading movement performance, pseudo continuous performance, One of the points is that it is easier to execute (developmental effects, final effects, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A 20th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in the normal gaming state, the specific game In this state, when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed, the movement performance (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is The problem is that it is difficult to perform pre-reading action effects, pseudo-continuation effects, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-first feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in the normal gaming state, the specific game In this state, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) that results in a jackpot is executed, the movement performance (pre-reading movement performance) of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is better. , pseudo-continuous performance, advanced performance, final performance, etc.) are likely to decrease (the rate of decrease is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in the normal game state in which the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-second feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in a specific gaming state, the jackpot is more likely to be hit than when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that is a jackpot is executed. When the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed, the movement performance (pre-reading movement performance, pseudo One of the points is that it is easy to perform a continuous performance, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in a specific gaming state, a jackpot is more likely to occur than when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) that is a jackpot is executed. When the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed, the movement performance (pre-reading movement performance, pseudo continuous performance, An example of this is that the number of executions (e.g., development performance, final performance, etc.) tends to increase (the rate of increase is high). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect in a specific game state in which the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is likely to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-fourth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) in which the reach effect is performed in a specific gaming state, before the reach The point is that operation performances (line preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance) that involve operating the performance button 17 are more likely to be executed after the reach. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect after the reach, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in a specific game state, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) in which the reach effect is performed, before the reach The vibration effects that vibrate the effect button 17 (pre-reading vibration effect, line preview effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, roulette preview effect, cut-in effect, decisive effect, re-lottery effect, etc.) are more effective after reaching than before. The point is that it is easy to implement. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect after the reach, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 32 to 59 is that in a specific gaming state, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) in which the reach effect is performed, before the reach The point is that the movement effects (pre-read movement effects, pseudo-sequence effects, development effects, decisive effects, etc.) of the movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) are more easily executed after the reach than before. It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect after the reach, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the overall control unit)
The main processing of the overall control unit 141 will be explained using FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control section 141. This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by supplying power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the central CPU 141a.

First, the supervising CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, the initial settings of the CPU such as the settings of built-in registers, permission to access the general RAM 141c, initialization (clearing to 0) of all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c, and CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating timer interrupts are performed. ), and in step T3, all interrupts are permitted.

The overall CPU 141a performs adjustment mode switching processing in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 and the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 70, Adjustment of the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the image display device 71), and adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and light intensity (whether the volume can be adjusted, whether the light amount can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any one from 0 to 5) ), the initial value of the light intensity value (any of 0 to 5), the adjustment range of the volume value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5), and the adjustment range of the light intensity value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)). Perform processing.

Note that setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value using the changeover switch 22 can be performed at any time as long as the gaming machine 1 is in a power-on state (after activation of the general control unit 141).

The supervising CPU 141a performs volume adjustment processing in step T5. Specifically, the sound is output from the audio output device 9 based on a detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Performs processing to adjust the volume (value) of the performance sound.

The supervising CPU 141a performs light amount adjustment processing in step T6. Specifically, the display device (the first image display A process for adjusting the amount of light (value) of the backlight of the device 70 and the second image display device 71 is performed.

Note that the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the cross key 19 is regulated (limited) at the start of the variable effect and at the end of the variable effect (stopping of the effect pattern 70a), and for a predetermined period (for example, 0 .5 seconds) have elapsed. In addition, during the period from power ON to the start of game progress control (specifically, during setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode, initial operation of various drive sources of board unit 500, etc.) (until a timer interrupt is started on the main control board 110), important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power restoration, unauthorized prize winning) that should be notified with priority over tray full errors and payout abnormalities , abnormal prize winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) are also restricted (restricted) during notification (output of notification sound).

In addition, while the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various performance sounds output from the audio output device 9 When the volume of BGM (BGM, etc.) is lowered than the previous volume and the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of various performance sounds is returned to the volume before the drop.

The overall CPU 141a performs eco-mode control processing in step T7. Specifically, processing is performed to control the start and end of an eco mode that reduces power consumption by reducing the amount of backlight of the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71).

In step T8, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the production instruction command or the notification instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 130m has been received. If the production instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process moves to step T11, and if the production instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process moves to step T9.

The supervising CPU 141a performs animation pattern setting processing in step T9. Specifically, a process is performed in which an animation pattern is determined from the type of animation group corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command, and is set in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c.

The supervising CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process is performed in which a sound pattern is determined from the type of sound group corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command and is set in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether a frame switching flag is set in the supervising RAM 141c, indicating that it is frame update timing to update the display image of the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). Determine whether or not. If there is a frame switching flag, the process moves to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4.

Note that the frame switching flag is a V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 seconds (the scheduled time when drawing and displaying one frame of effect images is completed) to the general control unit 141. It is set in the V blank interrupt processing that is executed every time a blank is received. Therefore, the processes of steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

The supervising CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the supervising RAM 141c in step T12, and performs scene update processing in step T13. Specifically, with reference to the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter that are updated in the V blank interrupt processing described above, the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9 above. , performs a process of updating the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The supervising CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a group of drawing control commands based on the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the anime scene at the updated address, according to the priority order (drawing order) of the anime group to which the anime scene belongs. It generates a display list, outputs this display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and performs a process of instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws a display image based on the display list on the drawing frame buffer, and also transfers the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn on the display frame buffer to the display device ( Processing for displaying on the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71) will be performed. In other words, the frame update timing is the start timing of various effects performed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 (image display and sound output such as pending display, variable effect, jackpot preview effect, look-ahead effect, etc.) The timing has come to end.

In addition, performances that are directly controlled by the performance control unit 130m and the lamp control unit 150 (a reservation display by the sub-first reservation display 83 and the sub-second reservation display 84, performances by the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) (Operation) may match the frame update timing or may not match the frame update timing.

The overall CPU 141a performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a process is performed in which a voice control command is generated from the sound information at the updated address, and this voice control command is output to the voice control unit 148 (audio LSI).

As a result, the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) performs a process of outputting various performance sounds and notification sounds from the audio output device 9 based on the audio control command. When this process is finished, the process moves to step T4.

In this way, at the start of the variable presentation and at the end of the variable presentation (stopping of the presentation pattern 70a), it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, but Volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are regulated (limited). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to miss important points such as the start of the variable performance and the end of the variable performance, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power restoration, unrecoverable error, unauthorized prize winning, abnormal prize winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, During notification (output of notification sound) of a door opening error, it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by a game store clerk, but it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. has come to be regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment on the game parlor side, while avoiding the inconvenience that a player who is trying to adjust the volume and light intensity does not notice the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, while the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various performance sounds output from the audio output device 9 When the volume of BGM (BGM, etc.) is lowered than the previous volume and the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of various performance sounds is returned to the volume before the drop. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing abnormality notification sounds due to various performance sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

Note that during abnormality notification (output of notification sound), setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player may be disabled, or the adjustment range of the volume value and light intensity value may be disabled. may be limited to, for example, between 0 and 2.

(Specific example of operating the operation panel while waiting for a customer)
With reference to FIG. 61, a specific example will be described in which the operation section (production button 17, cross key 19) is operated while waiting for a customer.

As shown in FIG. 61(a), when the state shifts to a customer waiting state in which variable effects and jackpot effects are not executed, effective suggestion effects (introductory effects) indicating that the validity period may occur are not executed. Valid period while waiting for a customer during which the operation of the production button 17 and cross key 19 is valid (The valid period while waiting for a customer is maintained until the start of the variable production, so it is longer than the various valid periods that occur during the variable production. (which can occur over a long period of time) is initiated.

At this time, a guide image AG (operation promotion image) is displayed on the lower right side of the first image display device 70 to guide the game assistance function started by operating the effect button 17 and the cross key 19. Specifically, the first image (an image imitating the effect button 17) that suggests that a menu is displayed by operating the effect button 17, and the volume adjustment being possible by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key 19. The second image suggests that the light intensity can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 (the image that imitates the cross key 19 with bright up and down buttons) and the third image (the left and right buttons are A light-colored image imitating the cross key 19) is displayed.

When the production button 17 is operated in this state, the menu image MG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the production pattern 70a without the production button 17 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 61(b), and the menu image MG The display sound is output.

The menu image MG includes an "end" item for ending the menu display, a "model explanation" item for explaining the model, a "performance customization" item for setting the appearance rate of a predetermined effect (for example, confirmed effect, etc.), A "Pachilog" item has been set up to manage gaming history in conjunction with a mobile device (smartphone, etc.), and currently selected items are displayed in bright colors, while currently unselected items are displayed in dark colors. It is now displayed.

When the effect button 17 is operated with the "end" item selected, the menu image MG is erased without the effect button 17 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 61(c). Further, a sound for erasing the menu image MG is output, and the guide image AG is displayed again.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated in this state, the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value is displayed without the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 61(d). At the same time, a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is displayed, the volume value of the effect sound increases by +1 without the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 61(e). Updated. Then, the volume value image OG is updated to a volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

If a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) passes without the cross key 19 being operated in this state, the volume value image OG is erased and the guide image AG is displayed again, as shown in FIG. 61(f). .

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 61, the production buttons 17 related to various preview productions (line preview production, pseudo continuous production, development production, cut-in production, final production, etc.) that occur during the variable production are Even if the effect button 17 or cross key 19 is operated during the customer waiting period, which can occur for a period longer than the valid period, a vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate (because the effect button 17 vibrates) (including indirect vibrations of the cross key 19 that are transmitted) are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the production button 17 or cross key 19 is operated while waiting for a customer, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player. becomes.

In addition, the valid period of the cross key 19 related to the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occur during the fluctuating performance (variable display of special symbols) and the jackpot performance (jackpot game) will also differ depending on the various preview performances (speech lines) that occur during the fluctuating performance. This can occur over a period longer than the effective period of the warning effect, pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.), but during the effective period of the four-way controller 19 related to volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment. Even if the cross key 19 is operated, the vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate (including the indirect vibration of the cross key 19 transmitted by the vibration of the effect button 17) is not executed. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised during the variable performance or the jackpot performance, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 61, regarding the validity period while waiting for a customer, the validity suggestion effect (introduction performance) that suggests that the validity period may occur before the validity period occurs is not executed. It looks like this. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though information useful to the player (effects that make the player expect a jackpot game to be executed) is not executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as

In addition, regarding the valid period of the cross key 19 related to the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occur during variable effects (variable display of special symbols) and jackpot effects (jackpot games), effective suggestion effects (introduced) before the effective period occurs. (direction) will not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though information useful to the player (effects that make the player expect a jackpot game to be executed) is not executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 61, during the customer waiting period that can occur for a period longer than the period of validity of the performance button 17 (the display period of the operation promotion image) that occurs during the variable performance, The effective period (operation) of the production button 17 related to various preview productions (line preview production, pseudo-continuation production, development production, cut-in production, final production, etc.) that occur during variable production is more important than when the production button 17 is operated. When the effect button 17 is operated during the display of the promotion image, the vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate is more likely to be executed. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 61, the effective period of the effect button 17 related to various preview effects that occur during the variable effect includes a relatively short first effective period (operation promotion related to dialogue preview effects, etc.). There is a relatively long second validity period (validity period accompanied by the display of images) and a relatively long second validity period (validity period accompanied by the display of operation promotion images related to fixed performances, etc.), but the validity period of the production button 17 that occurs during variable production When the performance button 17 is operated during the second valid period, the performance button 17 will be It is easier to perform a vibrating effect. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period while waiting for a customer, a vibration effect may be executed in which the effect button 17 vibrates at a predetermined rate. At a lower rate than when the production button 17 is operated during the effective period of the production button 17 related to various preview productions (line preview production, pseudo-continuation production, development production, cut-in production, decisive production, etc.) that occur during the period. It is best to perform a vibration effect.

(Specific example when variable performance starts from customer waiting state)
A specific example of when a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state will be explained using FIGS. 62 to 64. FIG. 62 is a timing chart in which the variable performance is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance corresponding to.

First, the timing T0 is the 0th frame after the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, subtraction of the waiting time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(a), on the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are in a stopped display state. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the reservation icon and the icon TI are not displayed. .

The timing of T1 is the timing when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (4th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, a non-animated increase display of the first special figure reservation number and a non-animation increase display of the first reservation icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first occurrence, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, is performed. The output of the notification sound starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". ", and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display section 70B1. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a first occurrence notification sound (picot).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved special symbols (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) based on the normal variable pattern starts (start of customer waiting state). 5th frame). At this timing, the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol pending number is displayed as a non-animated decrease, and the first pending icon is displayed as an animated change (decrease display). will be started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0". ”, and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 displayed on the first display section 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Moreover, the special symbol TZ starts scrolling at the same time that the performance symbol 70a starts to be reduced in size (preparation operation) in a state where it is not scrolled (updated to another performance symbol).

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the output of the first notification sound starts (the 14th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first pending icon (white icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C continues, and the presentation The reduced display (preparation operation) of the symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame after the change display (decreasing display) of the first hold icon starts (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the changing display of the first pending icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 that has been moved from the first display section 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C and When the icon becomes TI, the reduced display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the 40th frame after the start of the variable effect (45th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area, the center variable display Scroll (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the 50th frame after the start of the variable effect (55th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the center variable display area, the right variable display Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started, and the effect pattern 70a is in a scrolling state in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the 225th frame from the start of the variable effect (230th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(h), in the first image display device 70, the "3" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the left variable display area, and The character image of the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a performs a movement performance in which the character image moves its head, and the scrolling of the performance pattern 70a continues in the center and right variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the 255th frame after the start of the variable effect (260th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(i), in the first image display device 70, the "5" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the right variable display area, and The character image of the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a performs a movement performance of moving its head, and the scrolling of the performance pattern 70a continues in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the 285th frame after the start of the variable effect (290th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(j), in the first image display device 70, the "6" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the central variable display area, and The character image of the stopped performance pattern 70a performs a movement performance in which the character image moves its head, and a state is reached in which a combination of the performance patterns 70a indicating a loss is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect (305th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64(k), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that had been temporarily stopped in the left center right variable display area is stopped and displayed, and the special pattern TZ is It is stopped and displayed at the same combination "365" as the symbol 70a. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the number of reserved special drawings increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, the number of reserved numbers and the non-animated increase of the reserved icon will be displayed for the shortest time, 1 frame. Since it ends in a period (hour) of minutes, it is possible to immediately shift to a variable effect (displaying a decrease in the pending number and displaying a change in the pending icon) to avoid delays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, the occurrence notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending digits and the pending icon is a frame after the timing (frame update) at which the increasing display of the pending digits and the pending icon ends (frame update). Since this continues until the update timing, it is possible to make the player reliably aware that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of reserved special drawings decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), a non-animated reduction display of the reserved number and an animated change display of the reserved icon to the corresponding icon are performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reliably aware that the number of reserved special figures has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the timing at which the display of the decrease in the number of pending numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed (frame update), the special figure is pending. While presenting the effect that the number changes, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased due to the reserved numbers, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, until the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed, the effect pattern will not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern will be changed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update). Since the scrolling (updating to the next effect symbol) starts, it becomes easier to understand the progress of the game, in which the variable effect starts after the pending memory decreases, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the number of special drawings on hold increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, instead of displaying an increase in the number of hold icons without animation, it is displayed instead of increasing the number on hold. The animation may be executed over multiple frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to understand the increase in the number of reserved special drawings, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the display of a decrease in the pending number and the display of the change of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (decrease display) at the same timing (frame update), the display of the decrease in the pending number is completed (frame update). You can start either one first, if it's faster. By doing this, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special figures has decreased while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the scrolling of the effect symbols (updating to the next effect symbol) at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) (the start is delayed than usual), the change display of the pending icon is It may be possible to start scrolling (updating to the next effect pattern) of the effect pattern at a timing slightly before completion (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases during variable performance)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases during a variable performance will be explained using FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. 65 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance, and FIGS. 66(a) to 66(c) are diagrams showing performance examples corresponding to (a) to (c) in FIG. 65.

First, the timing T1 is the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Further, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the corresponding icon (white icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (60th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number and the animated increasing display of the first pending icon are started, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, is started. Ru.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". '', and the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size on the first display section 70B1, and enlarged display starts. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a first occurrence notification sound (picot).

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (70th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increasing display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display section 70B1 is finished, and the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of special drawings on hold increases, the number on hold is displayed non-animated and the number on hold is displayed as an animation. This makes it possible to make the game more interesting.

In addition, the number of reserved special drawings changes because the timing at which the increase in the number of pending numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the increase in the number of pending icons is completed (frame update). While presenting this effect, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special symbols has increased based on the reserved numbers, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Additionally, if the number of special drawings on hold increases during the execution of a variable effect, the increased display of the holding icon will be executed for a longer period of time compared to the case where the number of special drawings on hold increases while waiting for a customer. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reliably aware that the number of reserved special figures has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon ends in synchronization with the timing when the increasing display of the pending icon ends (frame update), the special figure pending It is possible to effectively represent the increase in the number of games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the period for displaying an increase in the number of pending icons (10 frames) is shorter than the period for displaying a change in the number of pending icons (20 frames), so it is easy to know that the variable effect will start. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the increasing display of the pending digits and the increasing display of the pending icon at the same timing (frame update), if the timing for the increasing display of the pending digits to complete (frame updating) is earlier, which one? may be started first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special drawings has increased, while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, instead of making the period for displaying an increase in the number of pending icons shorter than the period for displaying a change in the number of pending icons, the period for displaying an increasing number of pending icons may be made longer. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of reserved special drawings has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, instead of making the period for displaying an increase in the number of pending icons shorter than the period for displaying a change in the number of pending icons, both periods may be made to have the same length.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing, and FIGS. 68(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in FIG. 67.

First, the timing T0 is the fifth frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(a), on the first image display device 70, the performance symbols 70a of "4", "6", "8" indicating a loss, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state. It becomes. Further, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1, a first hold icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display section 70B2, and the icon TI is not displayed. It is in a state.

The timing of T1 is the timing at which the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) based on the normal variation pattern is started (the 20th frame after the performance symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol pending number is displayed as a non-animated decrease, the first pending icon is displayed as an animated change to the corresponding icon, and the first pending icon is displayed as a non-animated change. Animated display of decrease starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". ”. Further, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 displayed on the first display section 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 that was displayed on the second display section 70B2 1 hold icon (white icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display section 70B1. Further, the performance symbol 70a starts to be reduced in size (preparation operation) without being scrolled (updated to another performance symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (30th frame after the production symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number starts, but since the first pending icon is changing and decreasing, the first pending icon is increasing and the icon The output of the occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound at the time of occurrence, is put on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". ”, and the reduced display (preparatory action) of the effect pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 20th frame after the change display of the first pending icon and the start of the decrease display (40th frame after the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the first pending icon end. Further, the animation of the first pending icon that has been on standby starts to be displayed in increasing numbers, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(d), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 that has moved from the first display section 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C and When the icon becomes TI, the first pending icon H12 that has moved from the second display section 70B2 is located at the center of the first display section 70B1, and the reduced display (preparation operation) of the performance symbol 70a stops. Further, the first hold icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display section 70B2 and starts to be enlarged, and at the same time, the output of the first occurrence notification sound (picot) from the audio output device 9 is started. Ru.

The timing of T4 is the 5th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (45th frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increasing number of the first hold icons and the output of the first occurrence notification sound continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display section 70B2, and the enlarged display continues. At the same time, the output of the first occurrence notification sound (pico) from the audio output device 9 continues. Further, scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the 10th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (50th frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display section 70B1 is finished, and the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed. Further, scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, if the number of special drawings on hold increases while displaying a change in the pending icon to the corresponding icon and displaying a decrease in the number of pending icons, this change display and decrease display will be completed. (Frame update) Even before the timing, the number on hold will start to increase, so even if the number on hold icon is changing and displaying a decrease, the player will be able to see that the number on hold has increased. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special drawings on hold increases while displaying a change in the hold icon to the corresponding icon and displaying a decrease in the number of hold icons, the display of an increase in the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound will be on standby ( (restriction), and at the timing when the change display and decrease display of the hold icon is completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are started, so the change in the number of special drawings held It is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to grasp, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon that is executed after the increase display of the hold number, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number. Good too.

In addition, instead of starting to display an increase in the number of pending icons and outputting the occurrence notification sound at the timing when the display of the pending icon changes and decreasing display is completed (frame update), (the start is delayed from normal), The increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound may be started at a timing (frame update) slightly before the changing display of the pending icon and the decreasing display are completed (frame update). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the change in the number of reserved special drawings from becoming difficult to grasp, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special drawings on hold increases while the number of hold icons is increasing, the display of the number of hold icons will increase and the output of the occurrence notification sound will be on standby in the same way as when the number of hold icons is changing or decreasing. On the other hand, it is sufficient to start displaying an increasing number of pending digits, and to start displaying an increasing number of pending icons and outputting an occurrence notification sound at the timing when displaying an increasing number of pending icons is completed (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases during a specific reach effect will be explained using FIGS. 69 to 70. FIG. 69 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach effect, and FIGS. 70(a) to 70(f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in FIG. 69. .

First, the timing T1 is the 400th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal reach effect executed before the SP reach effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the center variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Furthermore, the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1, and the icon (white icon) TH is also displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (430th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development performance for developing into the SP reach performance is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the "5" effect pattern 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect pattern 70a scrolling in the center variable display area are displayed on the screen. The movement to the upper left and the reduced display are started, and the effect pattern 70a changes to a simple display mode in which only the numbers are enlarged.

The timing of T3 is the 15th frame after the start of the development effect (the 445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development performance for developing into the SP reach performance is continuing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(b), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "75" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol 70a is displayed in the center variable display area. The scrolling performance pattern 70a is displayed at a position close to the upper left of the screen, and is also displayed in a smaller size than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the 30th frame after the start of the development effect (460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, while the development performance ends, the SP reach performance starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a in the variable display area at the center left is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and at the center of the screen. A confrontation performance in which an ally character C2 and an enemy character C3 confront each other begins. In addition, the pending icons (here, (only the first hold icon) is hidden together with the hold icon display area. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ becomes a ready-to-reach state with the same “7” symbol as the performance symbol 70a.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (820th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number starts, but since the SP reach effect (showdown effect) is being executed, the first pending icon increases and the icon occurs at this timing. The output of the occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound of the time, will not be performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(d), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". ”, and the final performance of the showdown performance (a decisive performance to notify whether or not it is a jackpot) is executed.

The timing of T6 is the 420th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final performance (decisive performance) of the confrontation performance is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(e), on the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 wins against the enemy character C3, and an effect pattern 70a that is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen is displayed. The game will temporarily stop (it will be in an oscillating state) at the combination ("555") that indicates a jackpot.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, regardless of whether the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) or the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the performance symbols In the SP/SPSP reach effect where 70a is a display mode of only numbers without character images, even if the central effect pattern 70a temporarily stops, the motion effect of the character image is not performed.

The timing of T7 is the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the first pending icon is returned to the non-animated state and is displayed in an increased manner.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that had been displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state). become). Further, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display section 70B1, and the first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed in normal size on the second display section 70B2.

Then, the effect pattern 70a, which had been temporarily stopped in the left-center right variable display area, returns to the display mode consisting of characters and numbers, and finally, the effect pattern 70a stops displaying, and the special pattern TZ It is stopped and displayed at the same combination "555" as the production pattern 70a. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of a specific production (SP reach production), even before the timing when this specific production ends (frame update), the number of pending numbers will increase. Since the increase display starts, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved special drawings increases during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), the execution of the increase display of the pending icon is put on standby (restricted), and the specific performance ends (the display is reduced). Since the number of pending icons starts to be displayed at the same time as the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is enlarged (frame updated), it is possible to prevent the change in the number of reserved special symbols from becoming difficult to grasp, improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, when starting to display an increase in the number of pending icons at the timing when a specific performance (SP reach performance) ends, the number of pending icons is increased by non-animation that can be completed in one frame, so the timing when the number of reserved special drawings increases Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of displaying an increased number of pending icons and the timing of displaying an increased number of pending icons, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when starting to display an increasing number of pending icons at the timing when a specific performance (SP reach performance) ends, the occurrence notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbols on hold increases at the timing when the specific performance ends due to the occurrence notification sound. This makes it difficult for players to misunderstand that they have played the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special drawings on hold increases multiple times during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), while displaying an increase in the number of reservations, the system waits for the display of an increase on the reservation icon to be executed (restriction). It is preferable to display the increased number of pending icons in one frame at the timing when the specific effect is finished (frame update).

In addition, if the number of special symbols on hold increases during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), instead of not outputting the occurrence notification sound, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the display of the increase in the number of reservations. Good too.

Moreover, although the SP reach-to-reach performance has been illustrated as the specific performance, the specific performance may include the SPSP reach-to-reach performance or may include the full-rotation reach-to-reach performance.

(Specific example of when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state)
A specific example in which the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state will be explained using FIGS. 71 to 73. FIG. 71 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state, and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance corresponding to (i).

First, the timing T1 is the 400th frame after the last (100th) variable performance in the specific gaming state is started. At this timing, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72(a), "1" is displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. ing. In addition, the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, and second pending icons (white icons) H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively. and the icon TI is displayed. Furthermore, at the top of the screen, the number of variable effects that can be performed in a specific gaming state (here, "0 times remaining") is displayed, and at the top right of the screen, the game ball is displayed toward the right area of the game area 5a. A right-handed image MU is displayed that encourages firing.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (415th frame after the start of the variable production). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number starts, but since the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the notification sound when the icon occurs Therefore, the output of the occurrence notification sound will not be performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". ”, and the scrolling of the effect pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 430th frame after the start of the variable effect. At this timing, the performance symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left-center-right variable display area temporarily stop at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the variable display area on the left center right. A state is reached in which a combination of performance symbols 70a indicating a loss is displayed.

In addition, in a specific game state, regardless of whether the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) or the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the performance symbols Since 70a is in a display mode of only numbers without character images, no matter what variation effect pattern the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops, the motion effect of the character image is not performed.

The timing of T4 is the 15th frame after the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops (445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a result display is started showing the results of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72(d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG becomes dark, and "Special Time End" indicating the end of the specific gaming state and a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. The characters "Jackpot x 1" are displayed, indicating the number of jackpot games played during the game. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the 15th frame after the start of the result display (460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72(e), the first image display device 70 displays the words "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period. Additional information will be displayed.

The timing of T6 is the 30th frame after the start of the result display (475th frame from the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that had been temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen and is stopped, and the special pattern TZ It is stopped and displayed at the same combination "285" as the production pattern 70a. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing when the last (100th) variable performance in the specific gaming state ends and the first variable performance in the normal gaming state starts (490th frame from the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the second pending number is displayed as a non-animated decrease, the second pending icon changes to the corresponding icon through animation, and the second pending icon is decreased due to animation. display, non-animated return display of the first pending icon, and non-animated increased display of the first pending icon.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73(g), in the first image display device 70, the second reservation number in the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3", The second hold icon (white icon) H21 displayed on the first display section 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and is displayed on the second display section 70D2 to fourth display section 70D4. The second pending icons (white icons) H22 to H24 that have been displayed start moving (shifting) toward the next adjacent display section.

In addition, the first pending icon display area returns and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is restored and displayed on the first display section 70B1, and the first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display section 70B2. Displayed in normal size. Further, the performance symbol 70a starts to be reduced in size (preparation operation) without being scrolled (updated to another performance symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling. Further, a left-handed hitting image HU is displayed at the upper left of the screen, which prompts the user to shoot the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon (510th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73(h), in the first image display device 70, the second pending icon H21 that has moved from the first display section 70D1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C and As soon as the icon becomes TI, the second pending icons H22 to H24 that have been moved from the second display section 70D2 to the fourth display section 70D4 are located at the center of the adjacent display section, and the reduced display (preparation operation) of the performance symbol 70a is Stop.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame after the end of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon (520th frame from the start of the previous fluctuating effect). At this timing, the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73(i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled in the center variable display area. Scrolling (downward movement) is started.

In this way, when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases during a specific gaming state, while waiting (restricting) the increasing display of the first pending icon, the increasing display of the first special figure pending number is Therefore, the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even during execution of a specific performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the first special figure pending number (U1) increases during a specific gaming state, an increase in the first pending icon will be displayed at the timing when the specific gaming state (the last variable effect) ends (frame update). Even if you miss the display of an increase in the number of reserved first special drawings that was executed before, you can recognize that the number of reserved first special drawings has increased, increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

In addition, when starting to display an increasing number of first pending icons at the timing when a specific gaming state (the last variable effect in) ends, the number of pending icons is increased by non-animation that can be completed in one frame, so the special figure pending Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing at which the number increases and the timing at which the display of an increased number of pending icons is executed, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when starting to display an increasing number of pending icons at the timing when a specific gaming state (the last variable effect) ends, the occurrence notification sound is not output, so the special image is displayed at the timing when the specific gaming state ends due to the occurrence notification sound. This makes it difficult to mislead people into thinking that the number of reservations has increased, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, until the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed, the effect pattern will not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern will be changed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update). Since the scrolling (updating to the next performance symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the performance during the variable performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of first special figures on hold increases by multiple numbers during a specific gaming state, while displaying an increase in the number of pending numbers, the display of an increase in the number of pending icons is on standby (restricted). It is only necessary to display an increase in the number of pending icons in one frame at the timing when the specific game state (the last variable effect) ends (frame update).

Further, when the number of first special symbols on hold increases during a specific gaming state, instead of not outputting the occurrence notification sound, the occurrence notification sound may be output in synchronization with the display of the increase in the number on hold.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are set (displayed), but the second pending icon display area 70D is set (displayed). ), only the first pending icon display area 70B may be set (displayed).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not a specific performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance) is being executed during the variable performance. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of a specific effect, or the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of a specific effect. The icon may be hidden.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special figure reserved number display area 70E and the second special figure reserved number display area 70F were set (displayed) on the first image display device 70, but the second image display device 71 It may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display different from the image display device (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, etc.). If a dedicated LED is used, the number of reserved special symbols may be displayed by the lighting color and lighting/blinking mode of the LED.

(Example of performance when the player changes the performance element during the first variable performance in a specific game state)
With reference to FIG. 74, an example of a performance when a player changes a performance element during the first variable performance in a specific game state will be described.
Here, an example is shown in which the specific game state is a variable probability game state, but the same is basically true for the time-saving game state.

First, as shown in FIG. 74(a), on the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped state. When a game ball enters the first start opening 45 in this state, the first special figure reservation number (U1) becomes "1" and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1". However, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not set (displayed) in the specific gaming state, the first pending icon is not displayed, and any generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9. Never.

When the first variable performance is started from this state with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to " 0", but the shift display (decreasing display) of the hold icon is not performed, the production symbol 70a starts to display a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and the current volume value "4" is changed to "0". BGM is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume corresponding to "."

Further, in the specific game state, a left-handed hit error notification based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting port 45 is carried out over a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed hitting error image HUE that suggests firing a game ball toward the right side area of the gaming area 5a is displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen in a larger size than the right-handed hitting image MU, and the audio output device From 9, a left-handed hitting error voice saying "Please hit right-handed" is output.

Note that in a specific gaming state, the left-handed hit error is not notified when one game ball enters the first starting port 45, but when a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls enter the first starting port 45. A left-handed hitting error may be notified based on this.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, the second special figure reservation number (U2) becomes "1", a generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9, and the second special figure is reserved. The number display area 70F becomes "1". Further, a hold icon H21 (white icon) is displayed on the first display section 70D1 of the second hold icon display area 70B.

Note that the left-handed hit error notification may be terminated at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 47, and in this case, the left-handed hit error image HUE is erased before the left-handed hit error sound. Alternatively, the left-handed player error sound may be deleted before the left-handed player error image HUE.

After that, when the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 74(c), the volume value image OG shows the current volume value "4" without the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 vibrating. is displayed, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is displayed, the volume value of the effect sound increases by +1 without the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 74(d). The BGM that is updated and currently being output is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value "5". Then, the volume value image OG is updated to a volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

In this state, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. 74(e), the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a is stopped and displayed with a losing number of "379". At the same time, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at the loss of "379". Further, the volume value image OG is erased in response to the stop display of the effect pattern 70a.

After that, when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the first variable performance ends, and the second variable performance is started with the start of the variable display of the next second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 74(f) As shown in , the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", and the second reservation icon (white The icon) H21 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. In addition, the production pattern 70a starts to display a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and the volume ( BGM continues to be output in the performance element).

Here, an example was shown in which the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase the volume value during the first variation performance in a specific game state, but the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated to decrease the volume value. The same is basically true for cases as well.

Also, when the left button or right button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase or decrease the light amount value during the first variation performance in a specific game state, the light amount value is not displayed as the volume value image OG by the operation of the cross key 19. It is basically the same except that an image is displayed and the light amount of various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76, image display device, etc.) changes in accordance with the increase/decrease in the light amount value.

In addition, if the second variable performance is executed after the first variable performance in a specific game state, and the performance button 17 is operated during the first variable performance to change the performance mode, the background The image is changed to a background image according to the changed performance mode, and the BGM is changed to BGM according to the changed performance mode. In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the first variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed from the start of the next second variable effect to the changed effect mode. good. Furthermore, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Further, in a specific game state, even if the performance mode is changed, the display manner of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is not changed, but the display manner of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ may not be changed.

Also, in the case where the second variable performance is executed after the first variable performance in the normal gaming state, and the performance button 17 is operated during the first variable performance and the performance mode is changed, The background image is changed to a background image according to the changed performance mode, and the BGM is changed to BGM according to the changed performance mode. In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the first variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed from the start of the next second variable effect to the changed effect mode. good. Furthermore, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Further, in the normal game state, when the performance mode is changed, the display mode of the performance symbol 70a is changed, but the display mode of the special symbol TZ is not changed.

As described above, according to the production example shown in FIG. 74, by operating various operation units (production button 17, cross key 19) during execution of the first variable production in a specific game state, the second variable production to be executed next It is possible to change the performance elements (volume value, light amount value, performance mode, etc.) used in the variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player and to increase the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 74, even if a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 during a specific game state in which the first hold icon is not displayed, the occurrence notification sound (winning sound) is not output. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is confused due to only the occurrence notification sound being output even though the first hold icon is not displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 74, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the specific game state, if the normal icon (white icon) is displayed, the generation notification sound ( If a special icon is displayed without a winning sound (winning sound) being output, a notification sound corresponding to the type of special icon is output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is fed up with the generated notification sound in a specific game state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that at the start of the first variation performance, the pending icon is not shifted and displayed, but the icon is not displayed, but the pending icon may be displayed instead of being shifted. .

(Example of performance when the player changes the performance element during the second variable performance in a specific game state)
With reference to FIG. 75, an example of a performance when a player changes a performance element during the second variable performance in a specific game state will be described.
Here, an example is shown in which the specific game state is a variable probability game state, but the same is basically true for the time-saving game state.

First, as shown in FIG. 75(a), on the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped state. When a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in this state, the second special figure reservation number (U2) becomes "1", the second special figure reservation number display area 70F becomes "1", and the second reservation icon A hold icon H21 (white icon) is displayed on the first display section 70D1 of the display area 70B. Note that even if a game ball wins in the second starting port 47 during the specific gaming state, a white icon is displayed, so no notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9 (a special icon is displayed) (If this occurs, an alarm sound corresponding to the type of special icon is output.)

When the second variable performance is started from this state with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to " 0'', and the second pending icon (white icon) H21 displayed on the first display section 70D1 of the second pending icon display area 70D starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), the special pattern TZ starts to scroll, and BGM is outputted from the audio output device 9 at a volume corresponding to the current volume value "4".

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first start opening 45, the first special figure reservation number (U1) becomes "1" and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1". However, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not set (displayed) in the specific gaming state, the first pending icon is not displayed, and any generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9. Never.

Further, in the specific game state, a left-handed hit error notification based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting port 45 is carried out over a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed hitting error image HUE that suggests firing a game ball toward the right side area of the gaming area 5a is displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen in a larger size than the right-handed hitting image MU, and the audio output device From 9, a left-handed hitting error voice saying "Please hit right-handed" is output.

Note that in a specific gaming state, the left-handed hit error is not notified when one game ball enters the first starting port 45, but when a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls enter the first starting port 45. A left-handed hitting error may be notified based on this. Furthermore, the left-handed hitting error notification may be terminated at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 47. In this case, the left-handed hitting error image HUE is erased before the left-handed hitting error sound. Alternatively, the left-handed player error sound may be deleted before the left-handed player error image HUE.

After that, when the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 75(c), the volume value image OG shows the current volume value "4" without the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 vibrating. is displayed, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is displayed, the volume value of the effect sound increases by +1 without the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 75(d). The BGM that is updated and currently being output is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value "5". Then, the volume value image OG is updated to a volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

In this state, when the variable time of the second special symbol has passed and the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. 75(e), the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a is stopped and displayed with a losing number of "379". At the same time, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at the loss of "379". Further, the volume value image OG is erased in response to the stop display of the effect pattern 70a.

After that, when the stop time of the second special symbol has elapsed and the second variable effect ends, and the first variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 75(f) As shown in , the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", but the shift display (decrease display) of the reservation icon is not performed, and the production symbol 70a is displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation). At the same time, the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and the BGM continues to be output at the volume (performance element) according to the volume value "5" that was adjusted (changed) during the previous second variation performance. .

Here, an example was shown in which the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase the volume value during the first variation performance in a specific game state, but the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated to decrease the volume value. The same is basically true for cases as well.

Also, when the left button or right button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase or decrease the light amount value during the first variation performance in a specific game state, the light amount value is not displayed as the volume value image OG by the operation of the cross key 19. It is basically the same except that an image is displayed and the light amount of various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76, image display device, etc.) changes in accordance with the increase/decrease in the light amount value.

In addition, if the first variable performance is executed after the second variable performance in a specific game state, and the performance button 17 is operated during the second variable performance to change the performance mode, the background The image is changed to a background image according to the changed performance mode, and the BGM is changed to BGM according to the changed performance mode. However, the period during which the performance mode can be changed during the second variable performance (only during the pre-reach performance) is shorter than the period during which the volume value and the light amount value can be changed (other than when the fluctuation starts and when the fluctuation stops).

In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the second variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed from the start of the next first variable effect to the changed effect mode. good. Furthermore, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Further, in a specific game state, even if the performance mode is changed, the display manner of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is not changed, but the display manner of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ may not be changed.

Also, in the case where the first variable performance is executed after the second variable performance in the normal gaming state, and the performance button 17 is operated during the second variable performance and the performance mode is changed, The background image is changed to a background image according to the changed performance mode, and the BGM is changed to BGM according to the changed performance mode. However, the period during which the performance mode can be changed during the second variable performance (only during the pre-reach performance) is shorter than the period during which the volume value and the light amount value can be changed (other than when the fluctuation starts and when the fluctuation stops).

In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the second variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed from the start of the next first variable effect to the changed effect mode. good. Furthermore, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Further, in the normal game state, when the performance mode is changed, the display mode of the performance symbol 70a is changed, but the display mode of the special symbol TZ is not changed.

As described above, according to the production example shown in FIG. 75, by operating various operation units (production button 17, cross key 19) during execution of the second variable production in a specific game state, the first variable production to be executed next It is possible to change the performance elements (volume value, light amount value, performance mode, etc.) used in the variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player and to increase the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 75, even if a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 during a specific game state in which the first hold icon is not displayed, the occurrence notification sound (winning sound) is not output. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is confused due to only the occurrence notification sound being output even though the first hold icon is not displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 75, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the specific game state, if the normal icon (white icon) is displayed, the generation notification sound ( If a special icon is displayed without a winning sound (winning sound) being output, a notification sound corresponding to the type of special icon is output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is fed up with the generated notification sound in a specific game state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that at the start of the first variation performance, the pending icon is not shifted and displayed, but the icon is not displayed, but the pending icon may be displayed instead of being shifted. .

(Example of performance when pre-reading action performance and step-up notice performance are executed)
With reference to FIGS. 76 and 77, an example of a performance when a prefetch action performance and a step-up notice performance are executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 76(a), on the first image display device 70, the production symbol 70a of "468" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped display state. Further, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the variation effect (corresponding to advance variation) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. The two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the first performance of the look-ahead motion performance that spans three variable performances is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits blue light, performs a weak motion of moving toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion sound effect. be done.

Thereafter, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon (left end in the figure) that is the target of the preview action effect changes to a blue icon, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size, as shown in FIG. 76(c). (Preparation operation) is completed, a scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in the normal size is started, and then the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position and the first performance of the pre-reading action performance is completed. In addition, the prize opening lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and a lamp change effect is started.

Then, when the variable time period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 76(d), the performance symbol 70a stops displaying when a losing number is "365", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying when a losing number shows "365". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production symbol has elapsed and the next variable production (corresponding to advance variation) is started, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E is set to "2" as shown in FIG. 102(e). to "1", and the two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the second performance of the look-ahead motion performance is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits blue light, performs a weak motion of moving toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion sound effect. be done.

After that, immediately after the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, when the pending icon that is the preview target of the look-ahead motion performance changes to a red icon, the reduced display (preparation motion) of the performance symbol 70a is displayed as shown in FIG. 76(f). After finishing, a scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in the normal size is started, and then the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the second performance of the look-ahead motion performance is completed. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR (not shown) emits the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp change effect continues.

Then, when the variable time period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 77(g), the production pattern 70a stops displaying when a losing number is "635", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying when a losing number shows "635". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production symbol has elapsed and the variation production (corresponding to the variation) that is the subject of advance notice of the look-ahead motion production is started, as shown in FIG. 77(h), the number of reserved special symbols is displayed. As the area 70E changes from "1" to "0", one pending icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the third performance of the look-ahead motion performance is started. Specifically, as a strong preview of the look-ahead motion performance, the second movable member 74 emits red light, performs a strong motion of moving toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a strong motion sound effect. be done.

After that, when the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 77(i), the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect pattern 70a is finished, the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in the normal size is started, and then The second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the third performance of the pre-reading motion performance is completed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the performance symbol 70a, the first step performance of the step-up preview performance is started, as shown in FIG. 77(j). Specifically, the first step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the first step sound effect is output. After that, the second to fourth step effects are sequentially executed.

Furthermore, when the fourth step effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 77(k), the fifth step effect is started, the fifth step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the fifth step sound effect is is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second while the effect button 17 remains off. However, since the execution of this weak vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. Although the effect sound (sound effect) at the time of the game is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

When one second passes, as shown in FIG. 77(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends, and two seconds after that, the fifth step effect ends. After that, according to the variable performance pattern, the SP ready-to-reach performance is executed after the normal ready-to-reach performance is performed, or the SPSP ready-to-reach performance is performed after the normal reach performance is performed.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, after the number of reserved special symbols displayed in the special symbol reserved number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (the production pattern 70a starts the preparation operation). The pre-reading operation effect (light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started before the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect pattern 70a is started. Therefore, while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the pre-read motion performance is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the look-ahead motion production is performed after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable production, but before the movement of the pending icon is completed. (Light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started. Therefore, while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the pre-read motion performance is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the vibration production is not performed during the first to fourth step production of the step-up notice production, but the vibration production is performed during the fifth step production, which has the highest expectation level. It is set to run. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the 5th step production is longer than the execution period (3 seconds) of the 5th step production of the step-up notice production. seconds) is shorter. Therefore, the vibration effect does not surpass the appearance of the fifth step effect, and it is possible to improve the effect of the step-up notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the vibration production executed at the time of the fifth step production does not involve the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image). The sound effect when displaying the opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period (operation sound effect, movable member operation sound effect, etc.) are no longer output. There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, even during the vibration effect of the effect button 17, the effect light emission and lamp change effects by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continue. Therefore, by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the effect light emission or lamp change effect due to the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect can be maintained and the interest of the game can be improved. Become.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production executed during the fifth step production in the step-up notice production, but the production button 17 can be held in a predetermined mode (for confirmation of jackpot) during the execution period of the vibration production. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the rainbow color that is the emitted light color, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.). In this way, it becomes easier to understand that the vibration effect is being executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during a vibration effect that does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, it is possible to draw attention to the effect button 17 by the lighting mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emitting light toward the effect button 17, etc.). It is also possible to perform a dramatic light emission.

(Example of production when pre-reading vibration production and dialogue preview production are executed)
With reference to FIGS. 78 and 79, an example of a performance when a pre-reading vibration performance and a dialogue preview performance are executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 78(a), on the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "468" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped state. Further, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the variation effect (corresponding to advance variation) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. The two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the first performance of the pre-reading vibration performance that spans three variable performances is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the pre-read vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for one second, and the effect button 17 flashes white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues.

After that, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon (left end in the figure) that is the preview target of the pre-read vibration effect changes to a blue icon, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size, as shown in FIG. 78(c). (Preparation operation) is completed, a scroll display in normal size (high-speed fluctuation) is started, and then the weak vibration and white blinking of the performance button 17 are stopped, and the first performance of the pre-read vibration performance is completed. In addition, the prize opening lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and a lamp change effect is started.

Then, when the variable time period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 78(d), the performance symbol 70a stops displaying when a losing number is "365", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying when a losing number shows "365". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production symbol has elapsed and the next variable production (corresponding to advance variation) is started, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes to "2" as shown in FIG. 78(e). to "1", and the two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the second performance of the pre-read vibration performance is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the pre-read vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for one second, and the effect button 17 flashes white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon that is the preview target of the pre-reading vibration effect changes to a red icon, the reduced display (preparation action) of the effect pattern 70a is displayed as shown in FIG. 78(f). After the end, a scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, and then the weak vibration and white blinking of the performance button 17 are stopped, and the second performance of the pre-reading vibration performance is completed. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR (not shown) emits the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp change effect continues.

Then, when the variable time period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 79(g), the production pattern 70a stops displaying when a losing number is "635", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying when a losing number shows "635". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the performance symbol has elapsed and the fluctuation performance (corresponding to the fluctuation) that is the subject of advance notice of the pre-reading vibration performance is started, as shown in FIG. 79(h), the number of reserved special symbols is displayed. As the area 70E changes from "1" to "0", one pending icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the third performance of the pre-reading vibration performance is started. Specifically, as a strong preview of the pre-read vibration performance, the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds, and the performance button 17 flashes in red for 3 seconds. However, since the execution of this strong vibration does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the sound effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, when the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 79(i), the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect pattern 70a ends and the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) starts, but the pre-reading vibration effect The strong warning will remain in place. Thereafter, the strong vibration and white flashing of the performance button 17 are stopped, and the third performance of the pre-read vibration performance is completed.

Then, when the third performance of the pre-read vibration performance is completed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 79(j), the valid period of the performance button 17 (single press 3 seconds) occurs and the dialogue preview performance starts. be done. Specifically, an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed in the dialogue window image SW, and the operation promotion image SG is At the same time as the display sound effect is output, the effect button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the heat line "What is this!? It's hot!!" is displayed in red letters, as shown in FIG. 79(k). , a sound (direction sound) corresponding to the heated dialogue is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second while the effect button 17 is turned off, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and The lamp change performance continues.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 79(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, a pseudo continuous effect is executed according to the variable effect pattern, a normal reach effect is executed, an SP reach effect is executed after a normal reach effect, or an SP SP reach effect is executed after a normal reach effect. It will be executed.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, after the number of reserved symbols displayed in the first special symbol reserved number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (the production pattern 70a moves to prepare) The pre-reading vibration effect (vibration of the effect button 17, flashing white) is started before the start of the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation). Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the pre-read vibration performance is being executed while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the pre-reading vibration production is performed after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable production, but before the movement of the pending icon is completed. (Vibration of production button 17, flashing white) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the pre-read vibration performance is being executed while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, when performing the pre-read vibration effect, the effect button 17 is made to flash white, although the effect period of the effect button 17 is not accompanied. Therefore, even when the performance button 17 is not operated, it is possible to easily make the player aware that the pre-read vibration performance is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the lighting mode of the production button 17 in the pre-reading vibration production is different from the one shown in FIG. This is different from the lighting mode of the performance button 17 during the valid period in (performance, fixed performance, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of causing the player to misunderstand that the effective period of the performance button 17 has expired in the pre-read vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the pre-reach preview performance (line preview performance, step-up preview performance) is not executed until the pre-reading vibration performance ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to notice due to the pre-ready notice performance that a pre-read vibration performance that is difficult to judge visually is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed until the pre-read vibration effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to notice that a pre-reading vibration performance that is difficult to judge visually is being executed due to the pseudo-continuous performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production performed during the speech preview production is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the speech preview production. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the dialogue preview performance without the vibration performance being superior to the appearance of the dialogue preview performance. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the vibration production performed during the pre-reading vibration production does not involve the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image). The display sound effect when displaying the production button image, gauge image) and the production sound when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period (operation sound effect, movable member operation sound effect, etc.) are no longer output. There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the vibration production executed during the dialogue preview production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image). A display sound effect when displaying a button image, a gauge image) and a production sound (operation sound effect, dialogue voice, etc.) when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the dialogue preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the execution period of the vibration production that is executed during the speech preview production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the timing of the operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission and lamp change effect by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continue. There is. Therefore, by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the effect light emission or lamp change effect due to the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect can be maintained and the interest of the game can be improved. Become.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production that is executed during the dialogue preview production, but the production button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color, which is the emitting color that guarantees a jackpot) for the duration of the vibration production. It is also possible to emit light in a color other than the above, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.).

Furthermore, regarding the vibration performance that is executed during the dialogue preview performance, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated) The vibration effect may be executed until 0.5 seconds after (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, during a vibration effect that does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, it is possible to draw attention to the effect button 17 by the lighting mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emitting light toward the effect button 17, etc.). It is also possible to perform a dramatic light emission.

(Timer effect and execution timing)
Next, using FIG. 80, a timer effect of a variable effect pattern in which a timer effect may be executed and the execution timing of the timer effect will be explained.

The timer effects include event timer effects such as ``pseudo continuous occurrence timer effect'' that suggests the occurrence of a pseudo continuous effect, ``normal reach occurrence timer effect'' that suggests the start of a normal reach effect, and ``SP reach effect'' that suggests the start of a SP reach effect. ``SPSP reach occurrence timer effect'' that suggests the start of the SPSP reach effect, ``Full rotation reach occurrence timer effect'' that suggests the start of the full rotation reach effect, indicating the occurrence of the effective period of the effect button 17 There is a ``validity period occurrence timer effect'' and a ``jackpot symbol stop timer effect'' that suggests that the jackpot symbol will be stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), in the case of variable performance patterns 6, 14, and 19, there is a possibility that three of the pseudo continuous occurrence timer performance, normal reach occurrence timer performance, and SP reach occurrence timer performance will be executed.

In this case, the pseudo continuous timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Further, the normal reach occurrence timer effect is started between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Further, the SP reach occurrence timer effect starts between T5 and T6 and ends at T6.

As shown in FIG. 80(b), in the case of variable performance patterns 7, 15, and 20, four of the following are executed: normal reach occurrence timer performance, SP reach occurrence timer performance, SPSP reach occurrence timer performance, and valid period occurrence timer performance. There is a possibility that

In this case, the normal reach occurrence timer performance starts between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Further, the SP reach generation timer effect starts between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Further, the SPSP reach occurrence timer effect is started between T5 and T6 and ends at T6. Further, the valid period generation timer effect is started between T5 and T7 and ends at T7.

As shown in FIG. 80(c), in the case of variable performance patterns 11 and 22, four types can be executed: pseudo continuous occurrence timer performance, normal reach occurrence timer performance, SPSP reach occurrence timer performance, and valid period occurrence timer performance. There is sex.

In this case, the pseudo continuous timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Further, the normal reach occurrence timer effect is started between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Further, the SPSP reach occurrence timer effect is started between T5 and T8 and ends at T8. Further, the valid period occurrence timer effect is started between T7 and T9 and ends at T9.

(Example of timer performance)
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a presentation example in which two timer presentations are executed during a variable presentation will be described. Here, in the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the execution of the variable performance pattern 22, the pseudo continuous timer performance (normal pattern 7), and the valid period occurrence timer performance (normal pattern 21) has been decided.

First, as shown in FIG. 81(a), when the white character timer STW is displayed and the timer effect is being executed (the timer time is subtracted), the same "7" as the left and right effect symbols is temporarily stopped. When the reach state is formed, the normal reach effect will start.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(b), after the white character timer STW reaches "0 seconds left", the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle area as a pseudo continuous success effect, and a success sound effect is output. , the pseudo 2 fluctuation period ends (the red flame effect accompanying the pseudo continuous effect is omitted from the illustration).

Then, as shown in FIG. 81(c), the effect pattern 70a changes again and "x3" indicating the number of pseudo changes (that the stage of the effect has progressed) is displayed in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81(d), the SPSP development pattern temporarily stops in the middle area, a temporary stop sound effect is output, and a strong action effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits blue light and moves. be done. At this time, when the effective period generation timer effect is started, a white character timer YTW of "35 seconds remaining" which is a normal display is displayed on the image display device 70, and subtraction of the timer time is started.

After that, the screen whites out and the development effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 81(e), the effect pattern 70a in the middle area changes again, and the three effect patterns 70a are displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen. SPSP reach performance starts. It should be noted that with the start of the SPSP reach effect, the pending icon and the icon are hidden. At this time, the white text timer YTW indicates "33 seconds left", which is the timer time being subtracted.

Then, when the SPSP reach performance reaches its final stage, as shown in FIG. 81(f), an effective suggestion performance that suggests that the operation of the performance button 17 may be effective for the decisive performance starts. be done. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are gathered from the four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen. At this time, the white character timer YTW indicates "2 seconds left", which is the timer time being subtracted.

Then, after the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen and the white text timer YTW reaches "0 seconds remaining", the effective period of the effect button 17 (single press 5 seconds), an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that protrudes from a specific position in the center of the screen and emits red light, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period. is displayed, the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output, and the production button 17 is in a protruding state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a success effect is started as shown in FIG. 81(h). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, after strongly vibrating the production button 17 for 4 seconds, a strong vibration production (decision success vibration production) is started in which the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between, and at the top left of the screen. It temporarily stops when three performance symbols 70a of "7" are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

(Example of a performance where a roulette preview performance is performed before a reach performance and a pseudo continuous performance is executed)
With reference to FIG. 82, an example of a performance in a case where a pseudo continuous performance is executed before a ready-to-reach performance will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 82(a), an SPSP development symbol suggesting development to SPSP reach performance, an SP development symbol suggesting development to SP reach performance, a pseudo symbol suggesting execution of a pseudo continuous performance, and a jackpot. A roulette preview performance is executed in which a plurality of options, such as chance symbols that suggest that the winning expectation is higher than the waste symbols, rotate and fluctuate like a roulette. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 82(b), it is notified that the pseudo symbols among the plurality of options are stopped and the pseudo continuous performance is executed.

After that, when the roulette preview effect ends, as shown in FIG. 82(c), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area and a success sound effect is output (the blue effect associated with the pseudo continuous effect is omitted). . In addition, as shown in FIG. 82(d), the second movable member 74 emits blue light and makes a weak movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect pattern 70a changes again. “×2” indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations (the progress of the production stage) is displayed in blue.

After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 82(e), in the first image display device 70, the "6" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area, and the "5" effect pattern is temporarily stopped in the right area. 70a is temporarily stopped, the fluctuating display of the performance pattern 70a continues in the middle area, and a pseudo-inciting performance is executed in the medium area to incite whether or not the pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of a pseudo series is temporarily stopped. At this time, the validity period of the production button 17 occurs, and an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and the operation promotion image SG is displayed. The display sound effect of the promotion image SG is output, and the production button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 82(f), the pseudo symbols are temporarily stopped in the middle area as a pseudo consecutive success effect, and a success sound effect is output. (The red flame effect accompanying the pseudo-sequence effect is omitted from the illustration). In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 82(g), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light and makes a strong movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect pattern 70a changes again and the number of pseudo changes (the stage of the effect progresses). ``x3'' indicating what has been done) is displayed in red.

After that, when the strong operation time (1 second) of the second movable member 74 has elapsed, the pseudo consecutive success effect ends, and as shown in FIG. is temporarily stopped and the normal reach effect is executed, and after that, the normal reach effect is executed according to the variable effect pattern, and then the SP reach effect corresponding to the SP development symbol that did not stop on the roulette is executed, or the normal reach effect is executed. After being executed, the SPSP ready-to-win effect corresponding to the SPSP development symbol that did not stop on the roulette will be executed.

(Example of a performance when a pseudo continuous performance is executed after a reach performance)
With reference to FIG. 83, an example of a performance in a case where a pseudo continuous performance is executed after a ready-to-win performance will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 83(a), in the first image display device 70, a "6" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area, a "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the right area, In the middle area, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues. At this time, the pseudo consecutive success performance is started without the validity period of the performance button 17 occurring. Specifically, an inciting effect is executed in the middle region to incite whether or not a pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of a pseudo continuous effect will be temporarily stopped. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

After that, when the inciting effect ends, as shown in FIG. 83(b), the pseudo pattern temporarily stops in the middle area and a success sound effect is output (the blue flame effect accompanying the pseudo continuous effect is omitted). ). In addition, as shown in FIG. 83(c), the second movable member 74 emits blue light and makes a weak movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect pattern 70a changes again. “×2” indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations (the progress of the production stage) is displayed in blue.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 83(d), the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83(e), when the pseudo-continuation effect is started, a pseudo-inciting effect is executed in which the pseudo-symbols suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuation are incited to determine whether or not to temporarily stop in the middle area. At this time, the validity period of the production button 17 occurs, and an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and the production promotion image SG is displayed. Button 17 emits white light. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 83(f), the pseudo symbols are temporarily stopped in the middle area as a pseudo continuous success effect, and a success sound effect is output ( (The red flame effect accompanying the pseudo-reaction is omitted from the illustration). In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After one second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 83(g), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light and makes a strong movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect pattern 70a changes again and the number of pseudo changes (the stage of the effect progresses). ``x3'' indicating what has been done) is displayed in red.

After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 83(h), the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and the normal reach effect is executed, and thereafter, according to the variable effect pattern. After the normal reach effect is executed, the SP reach effect is executed, or after the normal reach effect is executed, the SPSP reach effect is executed.

In this way, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the vibration effect can be executed when the pseudo continuous effect is executed with the occurrence of the valid period of the effect button 17 in the pseudo continuous effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production performed during the pseudo consecutive success production is longer than the execution period (2 seconds) of the pseudo consecutive success production. It's shorter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive success performance without the vibration performance being superior to the appearance of the pseudo consecutive success performance. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the vibration production executed during the pseudo-continuous production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image). Display sound effects when displaying a button image, gauge image) and performance sounds (operation sound effects, success sound effects, etc.) when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pseudo continuous performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the execution period of the vibration production executed in the pseudo-sequence production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the timing of the operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, when the pseudo-continuous production is executed after the ready-to-reach production, the type of production symbol that forms the ready-to-win state after the execution of the pseudo-continuous production is the pseudo-continuous production. Downgrade from the type of production symbol that formed the reach state before execution (downgrade from reach with odd numbered symbols to reach with even numbered symbols, reach from reach with "7" symbol to reach with even numbered symbols or odd numbered symbols other than "7") (downgrade to 1). Therefore, the player will not feel dissatisfied with the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance, and the interest in the game will not be improved.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the performance light emission due to the vibration performance accompanied by the valid period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production executed during the pseudo continuous production, but the production button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color, which is the emitting color that guarantees a jackpot) over the execution period of the vibration production. It is also possible to emit light in a color other than the above, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.).

In addition, regarding the vibration performance executed during the pseudo continuous performance, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated) The vibration effect may be executed until 0.5 seconds after (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Furthermore, although the effective period of the effect button 17 is generated during the pseudo continuous effect and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed, the effective period of the effect button 17 is not generated during the pseudo continuous effect. The vibration effect may be executed, or the effect period of the effect button 17 may be made to occur, but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SP reach production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 84, an example of a performance in a case where the development performance is executed and the SP ready-to-reach performance is executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 84(a), the performance symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach performance is executed. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 84(b), it is announced that the SP development symbol will temporarily stop in the middle area as a result of the roulette preview performance and will develop into the SP ready-to-win performance.

After that, the screen becomes white out and the development effect ends, and as shown in FIG. It will be displayed in a reduced size in the corner and the SP reach effect will start. It should be noted that the icon becomes hidden with the start of the SP reach effect.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SPSP reach production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 85, an example of a performance in a case where the development performance is executed and the SPSP ready-to-reach performance is executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85(b), during the normal reach performance, a valid suggestion performance that suggests that the operation of the performance button 17 may be valid is started. Specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are moved and displayed, and an effect is performed in which the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position at the lower right of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position at the bottom right of the screen, the effective period of the effect button 17 (long press for 4 seconds) occurs, as shown in FIG. An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed, and the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. , the production button 17 emits red light. Note that the words "long press" are displayed on the opaque effect button image.

After that, when the production button 17 is pressed and held for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) or when the validity period has elapsed, a temporary SPSP development pattern is displayed in the middle area, as shown in FIG. 85(d). At the same time as the stop, a temporary stop sound effect is output, and a strong action effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits blue light and moves. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After one second has passed, the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, the screen whites out and the development effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 85(e), the effect pattern 70a in the middle area changes again, and the three effect patterns 70a are displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen. SPSP reach performance starts. It should be noted that with the start of the SPSP reach effect, the pending icon and the icon are hidden.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, depending on the type of special production symbols (special production symbols that are not finally temporarily stopped, special production symbols that are temporarily stopped) that are displayed in a variable manner in the roulette production, , suggests whether or not the performance will develop into a production with high expectations for jackpots (jackpot expectations). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the types of special effect symbols that are variably displayed in the roulette effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, effective suggestion production may be executed in the development production, thereby increasing the player's expectations for the development of the reach production with high expectations for a jackpot. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production performed during the development production is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the development production. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the development performance without the vibration performance being superior to the appearance of the development performance. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, since the vibration production executed during the advanced production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image (opaque production button Display sound effects when displaying images (images, gauge images) and performance sounds (operation sound effects, temporary stop sound effects, etc.) when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the development performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the advanced production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. There is. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the vibration effect cannot be fully experienced depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the performance light emission due to the vibration performance accompanied by the valid period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production executed during the advanced production, but the production button 17 can be set in a predetermined mode (other than rainbow color, which is the emitting color that guarantees a jackpot) over the execution period of the vibration production. The light may be emitted in a different color from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.

In addition, the vibration performance that is executed during the development performance will be performed at the same timing regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and regardless of the operation timing (for example, from the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated). The vibration effect may be executed until after 0.5 seconds (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Furthermore, during the development performance, the valid period of the performance button 17 is generated and the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed, but during the development performance, the vibration performance is performed without generating the validity period of the performance button 17. Alternatively, the vibration effect may be generated during the effective period of the effect button 17, but the vibration effect may not be executed.

In addition, in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed, the effective suggestion performance can be executed during the development performance, while the second When a variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the effective suggestion display is not executed during the development display, or even if it is made more difficult to execute (lower execution rate) than the first variable display. Okay, in the performance modes D to G (specific game states), when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the effective suggestion performance can be executed during the development performance, and the second When the 1st variation performance (variation display of the 1st special symbol) is executed, the effective suggestion performance is not executed during the development performance or is made more difficult to execute (the rate of execution is lower) than the 2nd variation performance. Good too.

(Example of performance when cut-in performance is executed during SP reach performance and becomes a jackpot)
An example of a performance in which a cut-in performance is executed during the SP ready-to-win performance in variable performance pattern 13 and results in a jackpot will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87.

First, as shown in FIG. 86(a), the effect symbols 70a in the left and right areas are reduced and displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and the SP ready-to-reach effect is being executed. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the SP reach effect reaches its final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. 86(b), an effective suggestion effect appears indicating that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective for the cut-in effect. will be started. Specifically, an effect is performed in which two translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are brought together from the left and right lower portions of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, the effective period (single click 4 seconds) of the effect button 17 occurs, as shown in FIG. An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. At the same time, the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the red cut-in effect is started as shown in FIG. 86(d). Specifically, a red frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a third cut-in sound effect is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for 3 seconds, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After that, when one second passes after the output of the third cut-in sound effect ends, the cut-in effect and the weak vibration effect end, and as shown in FIG. 86(e), the effect of "5" in the middle area is An effect is performed in which the symbol 70a stops or the effect symbol 70a of "6" stops.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 86(f), it is temporarily stopped with three "5" production symbols 70a aligned (symbols aligned), and the production button 17 is pressed strongly for 4 seconds. At the same time as a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is started, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

After 4 seconds have elapsed, as shown in FIG. 87(g), the strong vibration effect ends, but the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 continue to emit light in rainbow colors. Further, when one second has elapsed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume emitting light for effect, and the effect button 17 turns off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87(h), the re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, when three "5" production symbols 70a are aligned (designs aligned), they are moved to the back direction and displayed in a reduced size, and the validity period of the production button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) occurs, An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is displayed. is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a promotion failure effect is started as shown in FIG. 87(i). Specifically, when three of the "5" production symbols 70a, which had been displayed in a reduced size, are aligned (designs aligned), they are moved to the front of the screen and enlarged, and a non-promoted sound effect is output, but multiple The effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the game board decoration LED continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 87(j), the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the normal size, and the promotion failure performance ends. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 87(k), an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three performance symbols 70a.

Thereafter, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and becomes temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 87(l), and the first special image If there is a pending number, the pending icon will be redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration performance (jackpot confirmation vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 are activated. It glows in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

When one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 87(m), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are completed, the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "555", and the special The symbol TZ is also stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without any accompanying movement is started, and the performance button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the round game is started.

In addition, in the case of a variable performance pattern in which the re-lottery performance is not executed, the process moves to FIG. 87(k) after FIG. 87(g), and the eye-catching performance is executed.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, effective suggestion production may be executed in the cut-in production, and in addition to the occurrence of the validity period, the expectation of jackpot is high. This can be suggested to the player, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the execution period (3 seconds) of the cut-in production is the same as the execution period (3 seconds) of the vibration production performed during the cut-in production. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the cut-in production. In addition, the vibration effect can suggest to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, since the vibration production executed during the cut-in production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image (opaque production Display sound effects when displaying a button image, gauge image) and performance sounds (operation sound effects, cut-in sound effects, etc.) when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, the effect of the cut-in performance can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, when the production patterns 70a in the display mode that does not include characters are temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (designs aligned), the vibration during the cut-in production Since the strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is executed for a longer period of time than the performance, it is possible to effectively inform the player that a jackpot has been won, increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, when the production patterns 70a in the display mode including characters are temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (C symbols aligned), a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation (vibration effect) is now executed. Therefore, the player can reconfirm that he or she has won the jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation vibration production, jackpot confirmation vibration production, jackpot confirmation vibration production, Vibration effects, opening vibration effects) do not involve the validity period of the production button 17 (display of operation promotion images), so the display sound effects and validity period when displaying operation promotion images (opaque production button images, gauge images) During the operation, the effect sound (operation sound effect, other sound effect, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated is not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the cut-in production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the vibration effect cannot be fully experienced depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, when a jackpot occurs as a result of the SP reach production, while the vibration production is executed while the production symbol 70a that becomes the jackpot is temporarily stopped, The vibration effect is not executed during the main stop. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the fluctuating performance is still continuing due to the vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the performance light emission due to the vibration performance accompanied by the valid period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light during the vibration production executed during the cut-in production, but the production button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color, which is the luminous color that guarantees a jackpot) over the execution period of the vibration production. It is also possible to emit light in a color other than the above, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.).

In addition, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs were designed to continue emitting light during the validity period related to the cut-in performance, but if the performance button 17 is operated immediately before or from the start of the validity period, the validity period will expire. Until the elapse of time, some or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs may be turned off, and then the effect light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be restarted. In this way, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when executing the promotion success effect, multiple game board decoration LEDs and the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 were started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 was started first, and then the multiple game board decoration LEDs were started simultaneously. The rainbow light emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

Further, when the SP reach effect is executed, the effect of the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the display mode of the effect pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is executed, and then the effect pattern 70a is stopped. However, if the SP reach performance results in a loss, the performance pattern 70a is stopped after performing an eye-catching performance or a performance that returns the display mode of the performance pattern 70a to the display mode included in the character, In the case of a jackpot, the performance pattern 70a may be stopped in the number-only display mode without performing the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the display mode of the performance pattern 70a to the display mode included in the character. .

In addition, the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect will be performed at the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period expires when the effect button 17 is not operated) The vibration effect may be executed until 2 seconds after the start (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Furthermore, although the vibration effect is executed during the cut-in effect or promotion success effect, it is also possible to execute the vibration effect during the cut-in effect, but not to perform the vibration effect during the promotion success effect. The reverse may be done, or the vibration effect may not be performed during the cut-in effect and promotion success effect.

In addition, the vibration effect is executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a containing only numbers, or when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a including a character. While the vibration effect is executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped, the vibration effect may not be executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a including a character, or vice versa, or only numbers The vibration effect may not be executed when the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped for a jackpot and when the effect pattern 70a including a character is temporarily stopped for a jackpot effect.

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect symbol 70a stops displaying (even during the cut-in effect, the winning opening lamp NR corresponds to the display mode of the icon) However, the light may be emitted and turned off in conjunction with the light emitting mode of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs.

(Example 1 of the effect when the decisive effect is executed during the SPSP reach effect and results in a jackpot)
With reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, performance example 1 in which a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance in the variable performance pattern 20 and results in a jackpot will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 88(a), three effect symbols 70a form a ready-to-reach state and are displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, thereby executing the SPSP ready-to-reach effect. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the SPSP reach performance approaches its final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. will be started. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are gathered from the four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, the effective period (single click 5 seconds) of the effect button 17 occurs, as shown in FIG. An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. At the same time, the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a successful decision effect is started as shown in FIG. 88(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, after strongly vibrating the production button 17 for 4 seconds, a strong vibration production (decision success vibration production) is started in which the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between, and at the top left of the screen. It temporarily stops when three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the winning success effect and strong vibration effect are completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect buttons 17 are displayed in rainbow colors, as shown in FIG. A celebration performance will begin to celebrate the jackpot while the light continues to emit light. Then, when the blessing performance ends, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs restarts the performance light emission, and the performance button 17 turns off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88(f), a temporary stop is made when the three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned (designs are aligned), and a strong vibration performance (which makes the performance button 17 vibrate strongly for 4 seconds) is performed. At the same time as the jackpot confirmation vibration performance is started, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

After 4 seconds have elapsed, the strong vibration effect ends, but the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 continue to emit light in rainbow colors. Further, when one second has elapsed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume emitting light for effect, and the effect button 17 turns off.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89(g), the re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, when three "5" production symbols 70a are aligned (designs aligned), they are moved to the back direction and displayed in a reduced size, and the validity period of the production button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) occurs, An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is displayed. is output, and the production button emits red light.

Thereafter, when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a promotion success performance is started as shown in FIG. 89(h). Specifically, the "7" production symbol 70a, which has been switched from the "5" production symbol 70a that had been displayed in a reduced size, is moved to the front of the screen in a state where three of the "7" production symbols 70a are aligned (designs are aligned) and is enlarged and displayed. , a promotion sound effect is output. Further, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 emit light in rainbow colors, and a strong vibration performance (promotion vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for 3 seconds is started.

As shown in FIG. 89(i), when the strong vibration effect ends and a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped at the normal size, multiple game boards At the same time that the decorative LED resumes the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission), the effect button 17 turns off.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 89(j), an eye-catching effect that suggests that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three performance symbols 70a.

Thereafter, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and becomes temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 89(k), and the icon is displayed again. At the same time, if there is a first special figure pending number, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration performance (jackpot confirmation vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 are activated. It glows in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

When one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 89(l), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are completed, the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "777", and the special The symbol TZ is also stopped at "777".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without any accompanying movement is started, and the performance button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the first round game is started.

(Example 2 of the performance when the decisive performance is executed during the SPSP reach performance and it becomes a jackpot)
With reference to FIGS. 90 and 91, a performance example 2 in which a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance in variable performance pattern 16 and results in a jackpot will be described. Note that FIGS. 90(a) to (c) are the same as FIGS. 88(a) to (c), so the explanation here will be omitted.

When the production button 17 is operated from the state shown in FIG. 90(c) or the validity period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 90(d), three "5" production symbols 70a are aligned (symbols are aligned). A temporary stop is performed at , and a jackpot is notified by the performance symbol 70a, but no strong vibration performance is performed at this point. At this time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board illumination device) continue to emit light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, a success effect is started as shown in FIG. 90(e). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, after strongly vibrating the production button 17 for 4 seconds, a strong vibration production (decision success vibration production) is started in which the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between. It temporarily stops when three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the winning success effect and strong vibration effect are completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect buttons 17 are displayed in rainbow colors, as shown in FIG. A celebration performance will begin to celebrate the jackpot while the light continues to emit light. Then, when the blessing performance ends, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs restarts the performance light emission, and the performance button 17 turns off.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 91(g), an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three performance symbols 70a.

Then, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect ends, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and becomes temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 91(h), and the icon is displayed again. At the same time, if there is a first special figure pending number, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration performance (jackpot confirmation vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 are activated. It glows in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

When one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 91(i), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are completed, the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "555", and the special The symbol TZ is also stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without any accompanying movement is started, and the performance button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the round game is started.

In addition, if the performance button 17 is operated during the validity period related to the winning performance, or if the validity period has elapsed and a failure performance is performed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate. A failure effect image is displayed on the single-image display device 70, and a failure sound effect is output. Furthermore, part or all of the performance button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off, and then the three performance symbols are temporarily stopped when the number of reach misses (for example, "565") is rolled. After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, an eye-catching effect that suggests that the effect pattern 70a is to be displayed in a stopped state is executed, and when the eye-catching effect is completed, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and is temporarily stopped. Then, the icon is re-displayed, and if there is a number of reserved first special symbols, the reserved icon is re-displayed. When one second has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is permanently stopped when the reach is missed, and the special symbol TZ is also permanently stopped when the reach is missed.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the effective suggestion production may be executed in the deciding production, so that in addition to the occurrence of the validity period, the expectation level of jackpot is high. It is possible to suggest this to the player, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, there is a determined success effect in which the first movable member 73 operates before the symbols are aligned, and a successful effect in which the first movable member 73 operates after the symbols are aligned. Since there is a winning success performance, it is possible to effectively improve the performance effect of the winning performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, there is a determined success effect in which the first movable member 73 operates before the symbols are aligned, and a successful effect in which the first movable member 73 operates after the symbols are aligned. The period from when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period to when the vibration effect (successful vibration effect) is executed is different between the success effect and effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of elation from the beginning, or to give the player a feeling of elation after stirring up the player's anxiety, and the contrasting effect can effectively improve the interest in the game. .

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the operation period (10 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the successful decision production and the execution period (10 seconds) of the vibration production executed at the successful decision production. are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the performance effect of the success performance. In addition, the vibration effect can indicate to the player that he has won a jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the vibration production (successful vibration production) that is executed at the time of the final production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image). Display sound effects when displaying promotion images (opaque effect button images, gauge images) and effect sounds when the effect button 17 is operated during the validity period (operation sound effects, success sound effects, operation sound effects of movable members, etc.) ) is now output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the winning success performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, when the production patterns 70a in the display mode that does not include characters are temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (designs aligned), a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation vibration) Since the player can effectively notify the player that he or she has won a jackpot, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, when the production patterns 70a of the display mode including characters are temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (C symbols aligned), a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation vibration performance) is now executed. Therefore, the player can reconfirm that he or she has won the jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the vibration production (opening vibration production) executed at the time of a temporary stop when three production symbols 70a are aligned or at the opening of a jackpot game can be performed by pressing the production button 17 does not have a valid period (display of operation promotion image), so the display sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period. Sounds (operation sound effects, other sound effects, etc.) are not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the execution period of the vibration production executed at the time of successful decision production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the vibration effect cannot be fully experienced depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs were designed to continue emitting light during the validity period related to the fixed performance, but if the performance button 17 is operated immediately before the validity period occurs or from the start of the generation, or the validity period changes. Until the time elapses, some or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs are turned off, and when a successful performance is determined by operating the performance button 17 or by elapse of the valid time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. It may also be made to emit light. In this way, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 were configured to emit rainbow light when the game board was successfully executed. Some or all of the game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or the first movable member 73 may emit rainbow light, while the production button 17 and some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be turned off. It's okay.

Furthermore, when executing the success effect, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 started emitting the rainbow light at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 was started first. After the start, the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may start emitting rainbow light, or the first movable member 73 may first start emitting rainbow light, and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs start emitting rainbow light. And the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started, or the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is started first, and then the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs is started. You can.

In addition, after the blessing performance ended, the multiple game board decoration LEDs resumed their light emission and the performance button 17 turned off, but even after the blessing performance ended, the game board decoration LEDs continued to emit rainbow light. The effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the re-lottery effect, or the effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the eye-catching effect, or the rainbow emission may be restarted until the main stop of the effect pattern 70a. may be continued.

In addition, when executing the promotion success effect, multiple game board decoration LEDs and the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 were started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 was started first, and then the multiple game board decoration LEDs were started simultaneously. The rainbow light emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

In addition, when the SPSP reach effect is executed, the actual stop of the effect pattern 70a is performed after performing an eye-catching effect or a effect that returns the display mode of the effect pattern 70a to the display mode including the character. However, if the SPSP reach performance results in a loss, the performance pattern 70a is stopped after performing an eye-catching performance or a performance that returns the display mode of the performance pattern 70a to the display mode included in the character, In the case of a jackpot, the performance pattern 70a may be stopped in the number-only display mode without performing the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the display mode of the performance pattern 70a to the display mode included in the character. .

In addition, regarding the vibration performance that is executed at the time of successful decision performance, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated) (The execution period of the vibration effect may be varied) until 3 seconds later.

In addition, although the vibration effect is executed when a successful decision is made or when a promotion is successful, the vibration effect may be executed when a successful decision is made, but not when the promotion is successful. The reverse may be done, or the vibration presentation may not be performed during the successful decision presentation and the promotion successful presentation.

Further, a vibration effect is executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a containing only numbers after a blessing effect, or when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a including a character after an eye-catching effect. However, when a jackpot roll is temporarily stopped by the number-only performance pattern 70a after the blessing performance, a vibration performance is executed, while a vibration performance is executed when a jackpot roll is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including a character after an eye-catching performance. You may choose not to do so, or vice versa, or when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the number-only performance pattern 70a after the blessing performance, and a jackpot by the performance pattern 70a including characters after the eye-catching performance. The vibration effect may not be performed during the temporary stop.

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect pattern 70a stops displaying (even during the deciding effect, the icon before the winning opening lamp NR is hidden) Although the light is emitted in a color corresponding to the display mode, the light may be emitted and turned off in conjunction with the light emission mode of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs.

(Example of performance when special SP reach performance is executed in performance mode A (normal gaming state) and results in a jackpot)
An example of a performance when a special SP ready-to-win performance is executed in performance mode A (normal gaming state) and results in a jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. 92.

First, as shown in FIG. 92(a), on the image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "635" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped display state. Further, "2" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. At this time, since the mode is production mode A (normal gaming state), the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed.

When the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is started from this state, the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F changes from "2" to "1" as shown in FIG. 92(b). Change. Note that although the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, the icon may be displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(c), a development effect that suggests development into a special SP ready-to-reach effect is executed, and a special SP ready-to-reach effect is executed.

Then, when the special SP reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 92(d), the effect symbol 70a is fully stopped at "555", and the special symbol TZ is also fully stopped at "555", and the second variation The performance ends.

After the second variable performance ends, as shown in FIG. 92(e), the opening performance of the jackpot game is started, and the jackpot performance 1 is executed. Note that when the second jackpot game is executed as a result of the first variable effect, the jackpot effect 2 will be executed.

(Example of performance when special SP reach performance is executed in performance mode G (specific gaming state) and results in a jackpot)
An example of a performance when a special SP ready-to-win performance is executed in performance mode G (specific gaming state) and results in a jackpot will be described using FIG. 93.

First, as shown in FIG. 93(a), on the image display device 70, the production symbol 70a of "285" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped state. Further, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E. At this time, since it is the performance mode G (specific game state), the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed.

When the first variable performance is started from this state, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" as shown in FIG. 93(b). Note that although the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, the icon may be displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(c), a development effect that suggests development into a special SP ready-to-reach effect is executed, and a special SP ready-to-reach effect is executed.

Then, when the special SP reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 93(d), the effect symbol 70a is fully stopped at "555", and the special symbol TZ is also fully stopped at "555", and the first variation The performance ends.

After the first variable performance ends, as shown in FIG. 93(e), the opening performance of the jackpot game is started, and jackpot performance 1 is executed. Note that when the second jackpot game is executed as a result of the first variable effect, the jackpot effect 2 will be executed.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in a specific game state, there is a case where the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, and a case where the second variation production (the second variation display) is executed. Variable display of special symbols) is executed in different manners (whether or not a look-ahead effect is executed, whether or not various preview effects are executed, whether or not a specific reach effect is executed, whether or not the relevant icon is displayed, the type of background image) However, the jackpot effect after the first variable effect in a specific gaming state and the jackpot effect after the second variable effect in a specific gaming state have the same aspects (background image, BGM type, etc.). , round effect images, etc.). Therefore, during the jackpot performance, the player does not have to be aware of whether the first variable performance is the trigger or the second variable performance is the trigger, so the player can enjoy the jackpot performance without having to think about it. , it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, there are different aspects between the case where the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed and the case where the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed. (Whether or not a look-ahead effect is executed, whether or not various preview effects are executed, whether or not there is a specific reach effect, whether or not the relevant icon is displayed, the type of background image, the type of BGM, etc.), and the normal game state The jackpot performance after the first variable performance in the normal game state and the jackpot performance after the second variable performance in the normal game state may be executed in a common manner (background image, BGM, round performance image, etc.). In this way, during the jackpot performance, the player does not have to be aware of whether the first variable performance is the trigger or the second variable performance, so the player can enjoy the jackpot performance without having to think about it. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of production when a fixed mission production is executed during a jackpot)
With reference to FIG. 94, an example of a performance in a case where a variable probability mission performance is executed to determine whether or not the probability variable game state will be entered during a jackpot (round game) will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 94(a), when the opening performance of the jackpot game starts, a strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started. ) is started, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration performance ends, the opening performance of the jackpot game ends, and the first round game begins.

After that, when the interval period after the first round game ends and the second round game starts, as shown in FIG. is started, and the words ``You are guaranteed to defeat the enemy'' are displayed until the second round game ends.

Then, when the interval period after the second round game ends and the third round game starts, the effective period of the production button 17 (single press for 5 seconds) occurs, as shown in FIG. 94(c). The mission performance will begin. Specifically, the words "Destroy" are displayed, and an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed. , the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output, and the production button 17 emits white light. At this time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board illumination device) continue to emit light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the mission success effect is started as shown in FIG. 94(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. Further, a strong vibration performance (promotional vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds is started, and a part or all of the performance button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs emit rainbow light.

After that, when the mission success effect is completed, as shown in FIG. The effect light emission of the decorative LED is restarted, and when the third round game ends, the word "defeat" is erased and the round effect is restarted.

Then, when the ninth round game is started, as shown in FIG. A time period of at least 11 seconds (from the start until 5 seconds has elapsed) occurs, and mode selection performance for selecting the performance mode in the variable probability game state is started. Specifically, the option image for production mode D and the option image for production mode E are displayed, and the text "Please select the mode that is currently changing with the cross key and confirm with the button!" is displayed as an operation promotion image, and the white text is displayed. An opaque effect button image imitating the light emitting effect button 17 is displayed.

After that, when the right button of the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 94(g), the option image of production mode D is selected (the option image of production mode E is displayed in dark color). A state is reached in which the option image of presentation mode E is selected (the option image of presentation mode D is displayed in dark color).

Then, when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the option image of the performance mode E is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. E is notified and the mode selection performance ends. Thereafter, when the 10th round game ends, an ending performance is executed, and when the ending performance ends, a variable probability game state is started.

Note that when the mission failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the first image display device 70 displays a failure effect image and outputs a failure sound effect. . Furthermore, the mode selection effect is not executed and the ending effect is shifted to.

As described above, according to the production example shown in FIG. 94, the operation period (5 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the mission success production and the execution period of the vibration production (promotion vibration production) executed during the mission success production. (5 seconds) are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the presentation effect of the mission success presentation. Further, the vibration effect can suggest to the player that the result is advantageous to the player, that is, that a probability change state will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 94, since the vibration production (promotion vibration production) executed at the time of the mission success production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17, the operation promotion images (opaque production button image, gauge image ) when displaying the display sound effect and the effect sound (success sound effect) when the effect button 17 is operated during the validity period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the winning success performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 94, the execution period of the vibration production (promotion vibration production) executed at the time of the mission success production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the vibration effect cannot be fully experienced depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 94, even if the production button 17 or the cross key 19 is operated during the mode selection production, the vibration production is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences in which players are misled into thinking that the jackpot expectation is higher in the selected presentation mode than in the unselected presentation mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

In addition, multiple game board decoration LEDs were designed to continue emitting light during the validity period related to the variable mission production, but if the production button 17 is operated immediately before or from the start of the validity period, the validity period will change. Until the elapse of time, some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off, and when performing a mission success effect by operating the effect button 17 or by elapse of the effective time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. It may be possible to emit rainbow light. In this way, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Furthermore, during the mission success presentation, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the presentation button 17 were configured to emit rainbow light; Some or all of the game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or the first movable member 73 may emit rainbow light, while the production button 17 and some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be turned off. It's okay.

In addition, when executing the mission success effect, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 were started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 was started first. After the start, the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may start emitting rainbow light, or the first movable member 73 may first start emitting rainbow light, and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs start emitting rainbow light. And the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started, or the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is started first, and then the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs is started. It's okay.

In addition, the vibration effect that is executed during the mission success effect will be performed at the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period expires if the effect button 17 is not operated) (The execution period of the vibration effect may be varied) until 3 seconds later.

Further, although the vibration effect is executed when the mission is successful, the vibration effect may not be executed when the mission is successful.

(Example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during the execution of the icon change performance and lamp change performance)
An example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change performance and the lamp change performance will be described using FIGS. 95 and 96.

As shown in FIG. 95(a), when the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, "728 ” is displayed in a stopped state.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (white icon) displayed in the section 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, thereby starting the icon change effect, and accordingly, the winning opening lamp NR changes from the off state to blinking red. When the state changes, the lamp change effect starts.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95(c), the effect pattern 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, and the center variable display area is A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed variably is executed.

Then, when it develops into an SP reach, as shown in FIG. The pending icon display area 70D is erased together with the pending icon.

Thereafter, when the SPSP reaches, as shown in FIG. 95(e), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the icon display area 70C in which the icon is displayed is erased together with the icon. At this time, the winning a prize opening lamp NR does not turn off as the icon disappears, and the lamp change performance in the winning a prize opening lamp NR continues.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, as shown in FIG. 95(f), the image display device becomes non-display and the winning slot lamp NR is turned off.

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 96(g), an initial screen including the words "Loading" is displayed on the image display device, but the winning slot lamp NR is turned off. maintain the condition.

Then, when the production control board 130 receives the second power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. The returning screen including is displayed for the duration of the SPSP reach effect (including the execution period of the re-lottery effect to determine whether or not the temporarily stopped jackpot effect symbol will be promoted to a jackpot effect symbol with higher value for the player). However, the winning opening lamp NR remains in the off state here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that results in a loss ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special pattern stop designation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. 96(i), a temporary stop display of the effect pattern 70a ( A stop screen (second standby screen) is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display) without any shaking fluctuation). , the variable effect ends without restarting the lamp change effect.

At this time, the same white icon as before the power supply was stopped is displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but a rectangular icon is displayed. By displaying the area image, a display space (display area) for the icon is secured in a state where an effect image such as a background image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variable performance is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (white icon) shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that results in a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special pattern stop designation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 96(k), a temporary stop display of the effect pattern 70a ( The jackpot effect pattern 70a of "777" (which formed the reach state before the power cutoff) indicates the type of the current jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game) without performing any swing fluctuation/swing display). A combination of performance symbols different from the reach combination according to the production symbol "3↓3") and a stop screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) will be displayed, and a lamp change effect will be displayed with the winning opening lamp NR. The variable performance ends without restarting.

In addition to the variation production in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, other variation productions (variation production in which a normal variation is executed, variation production in which a shortened variation is executed, variation production in which a normal reach production is executed, SP reach production) Regarding the fluctuating performance), when the power supply that was stopped during the execution is restarted and the execution period of the performance ends, the temporary stop display (swinging fluctuation/swinging display) of the performance pattern 70a is not performed and " 753'' loss effect pattern 70a, or a jackpot effect pattern that is the same combination of effect patterns or a combination of different effect patterns as the reach combination based on the effect patterns that formed the reach state before the power cut-off is displayed in a stopped state (static display). will be done.

In addition, regarding the special symbol TZ, it depends on whether the game control state is initialized or restored, whether the subsequent state is the normal gaming state, or the specific gaming state (low accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state). Regardless of whether there is a special symbol TZ, the special symbol TZ has the same display mode (shape, design) and is statically displayed (statically displayed) with numbers that are the same combination as the performance symbol 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 96(l), the image display device displays information indicating the type of jackpot game ("MAX jackpot" indicating that it is the first jackpot game). The opening performance including the first pending icon display area 70B, the second pending icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

Although the winning slot lamp NR remains off while the initial screen and/or returning screen is displayed, the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not indicate the level of expectation of winning a jackpot) ) may turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the power supply that was stopped during execution of the fluctuating production in which the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking variation) and then stopped is restarted. After the control state of the game is restored, the special symbol stop designation command is issued after the special symbol fluctuation time has passed (if the special symbol stop designation command is missed and the state then shifts to the customer waiting state, the customer waiting state When a state designation command) is received, the performance pattern 70a is not temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation/swinging display) but is displayed stopped (still display). Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the production symbols 70a are displayed in a stopped state (static display) after the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the loss variation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the combination of performance symbols that are the initial symbols when the power is restored is displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) instead of the normal loss performance symbols. Therefore, there is no need to perform complicated processing such as determining by lottery the performance symbols to be displayed statically, and the power restoration restores the control state of the game, and is executed when the power supply stops. It becomes possible to understand that the fluctuating performance that was being performed has ended.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the production symbols are stopped and displayed (stationary display) after the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the jackpot effect symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state (static display). Therefore, it is possible to understand that the control state of the game is restored due to the power supply restoration, and that the fluctuating performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped was a jackpot fluctuating performance.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, when the combination of jackpot production symbols is displayed in a stopped state (static display) after the control state of the game is restored, a ready-to-reach state is formed before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to stop display (still display) a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is different from the reach combination based on the effect patterns that were previously used. Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of the jackpot effect symbols that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed before the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, if the fluctuating production that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped includes the execution period of the promotion production described above, the power supply is resumed and the control is performed. After the state is restored, the jackpot effect symbols are stopped and displayed (stationary display) without executing the promotion effect. Therefore, since no unnecessary effects are performed before the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (statically displayed), the player is immediately informed that the variable effect that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped was a jackpot variable effect. It becomes possible to understand the

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, there are two cases in which the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the loss variation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and a case in which the power supply stopped during the execution of the jackpot variation production is restored. The display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screens) of the image display device after power supply is restarted is the same as when power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, it is possible to perform simple display control without being aware of whether a loss fluctuation effect or a jackpot fluctuation effect is being executed, and the processing load associated with display control after power supply is resumed. It becomes possible to reduce the

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the special symbol TZ will be displayed in the same manner as before the power supply was stopped after the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Then, numbers that are in the same combination as the effect pattern 70a are displayed in a stopped state (statically displayed). Therefore, it becomes easier to understand that the fluctuating performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, if the power supply that was stopped while the icon was being displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next screen will be displayed after the display of the returning screen is finished. Until the fluctuation effect (scrolling of the effect pattern 70a) starts, a rectangular area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is changed to a background image, etc. The effect image is secured in a state where it can be displayed, but the icon is not displayed. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, if the power supply that was stopped while the pending icon was displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next Until the fluctuation effect starts, a rectangular area image is displayed in the hold icon display area, so that the display space (display area) of the hold icon is in a state where it is possible to display a effect image such as a background image. It is now reserved and a pending icon is displayed. Therefore, even if the power supply is stopped, it is possible to know that the suspended variable performance has not disappeared, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the variable production (winning opening lamp NR) corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production is changed to the lighting color (blue, red, etc.) with high expectation of winning the jackpot. If the power supply that was stopped during the memorization of the special figure judgment information that will change to , rainbow) is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening lamp NR will be hit as a jackpot without restarting the lamp change effect. The notification mode (lights off or lit in white) does not indicate the degree of expectation of winning. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation where the player is confused, such as the lamp change performance being restarted even though the fluctuating performance has not been executed.

In addition, after the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect ends, a stop screen with the jackpot effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ stopped is displayed, but as in the case of a loss, when the power is restored, A second standby screen may be displayed in which the initial symbol "753" production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

In addition, after the execution period of the jackpot fluctuating effect ends, a stop screen in which the jackpot effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed is displayed, but the jackpot effect pattern 70a is displayed without displaying the stop screen. It is also possible to start an opening performance of a jackpot game in which the is not displayed. In addition, information indicating the type of jackpot game may be displayed in the opening performance, a jackpot special symbol TZ of "777" may be displayed, or a special symbol "753" which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. TZ may also be displayed.

In addition, after the execution period of the loss fluctuation performance ends, the performance symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed, and after the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation performance ends, the jackpot The opening performance of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the performance symbols 70a and the special symbols TZ are stopped and displayed.

In addition, if it is possible to perform a specific performance that incites whether or not a jackpot game will be executed without displaying the production symbol 70a in a reach state in a variable production (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed), the specification After the power supply that was stopped during execution of the performance is resumed and the control state is restored, if it is a loss, the performance symbol 70a which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration is stopped (statically displayed), and if it is a jackpot, the performance symbol 70a is displayed in a stopped state (static display). The jackpot effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a stopped state (stationary display).

In addition, when the combination of jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (statically displayed) after the control state of the game is restored, one of the combinations of jackpot effect symbols corresponding to the type of jackpot game to be executed thereafter. may be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting execution of the first jackpot game is "333" and "777", and the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting execution of the second jackpot game is "222" and " 444'', ``666'', and ``888'', and the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting execution of the third jackpot game is ``111'', ``555'', and ``999''.

If the reach combination before the power supply is stopped is "1↓1" which constitutes a part of the jackpot effect symbol combination that suggests the execution of the third jackpot game, then the jackpot game to be executed after that is the first jackpot game. In the case of a jackpot game, either "333" or "777" (a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is different from the reach combination based on the effect symbols that formed the reach state) is stopped and displayed, and then the game is executed. If the jackpot game is the third jackpot game, any one of "111", "555", and "999" (a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is the same as or different from the reach combination of the effect symbols that formed the reach state) It is a good idea to stop and display the .

In addition, regarding the special symbol TZ, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, instead of being displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) with numbers that are the same combination as the production symbol 70a, it becomes a combination different from the production symbol 70a. The display may be displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) using numbers.

In addition, if the normal gaming state and the customer waiting state occur after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (stationary display), while the power supply is stopped. After restarting and restoring the control state, if the specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state) and customer waiting state, the production pattern 70a is not displayed in a stopped state (static display), The special symbol TZ may be displayed in a stopped state (stationary display).

(Example of effects when restarting after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped during execution of look-ahead effect effect, pending icon change effect, and lamp change effect)
FIGS. 97 and 98 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the prefetch effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 97(a), the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1, second display section 70B2, and third display section 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B. Suppose that the loss effect pattern 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed when the player is in the game.

After that, when the pre-variation variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 97(b), the variation display of the production pattern 70a is started, and the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and The first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the third display section 70B3 is shifted and displayed on the icon display area 70C, the first display section 70B1, and the second display section 70B2, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, thereby starting the first effect of the look-ahead effect, and the first pending icon ( When the display mode of the final icon display mode (red icon) changes to a blue icon, the pending icon change effect starts, and accordingly, the winning slot lamp NR changes from an off state to a blinking blue state, and the lamp changes to a blue icon. The change production begins.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97(c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect image 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 97(d), after the performance symbol 70a indicating a loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss performance symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. .

After that, when the pre-variation variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. The displayed first pending icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, by displaying the effect image EF around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, the second look-ahead effect effect is started, and the pending icon change effect and lamp change effect continue. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 97(f), the effect image EF displayed around the effect pattern 70a is erased, and the effect image 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, as shown in FIG. 97(g), the image display device becomes non-display and the winning slot lamp NR is turned off.

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. To maintain a state where the lights are turned off without restarting the change performance.

Then, when the production control board 130 receives the second power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. A returning screen including the above is displayed during the execution period of the advance variation, but the winning a prize opening lamp NR remains in the off state here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the advance variation ends (the production control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. 98(j), the temporary stop display (shaking variation) of the production pattern 70a Without doing so, a stop screen with the initial symbol 753, the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (statically displayed), and the lamp change effect is restarted beforehand. The fluctuation ends.

At this time, the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B displays a white icon instead of the blue icon before the power supply is stopped, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C. By displaying a rectangular area image, a display space (display area) for the icon is secured in a state where an effect image such as a background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 98(k), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the 1 pending icon (white icon) is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, if a lottery regarding the newly executed icon change performance is won, the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a blue icon according to the result, and the icon changes. The performance begins. On the other hand, since the lottery related to the lamp change effect is not newly executed, the prize opening lamp NR remains in the off state and the lamp change effect is not restarted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 98(l), the lines uttered by ally A are displayed in the lines window displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 emits a voice corresponding to the lines, "Your chance has arrived!" When the is displayed, the dialogue preview performance is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 98(m), the effect pattern 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, and the center variable display area is A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed variably is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. The pending icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when the SPSP reaches reach, as shown in FIG. 98(o), the SPSP reach effect is started and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 98(p), the current jackpot game (here, the first The jackpot effect pattern 70a of "333" indicating the type of one jackpot game (1 jackpot game) and the special pattern TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (fluctuation fluctuation) and then stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation performance ends.

Although the winning slot lamp NR remains off while the initial screen and/or returning screen is displayed, the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not indicate the level of expectation of winning a jackpot) ) may turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

In addition, if the special figure stop designation command cannot be received during the fluctuation performance (temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) of the performance pattern 70a), the performance pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped displaying (shaking fluctuation) will not be displayed stop. , the temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) will continue.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the look-ahead effect production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure that was stored at the time of restoration is restored. The continuous preview performance is not restarted in the variable performance corresponding to the judgment information. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the continuous preview performance proceeds while the preview target of the continuous preview performance is unknown due to the stoppage of power supply, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. The same applies to the case where the power supply that was stopped during the execution of another continuous notice performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the icon is displayed as a special icon (including cases where the final display mode has not changed and cases where the final display mode has changed) When the power supply that was stopped while the icon was being displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the pending icon that was displayed as a special icon is displayed as a normal icon. Therefore, the user does not need to be aware of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the icon change production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure determination information that was stored at the time of recovery In the variable performance corresponding to , the pending icon change performance is not executed, but the icon change performance can be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the icon change effect due to the stop of power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, even when the icon change production is executed again while the variation production corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration is being executed, The process will no longer continue from the stage that was suggested before the power supply was cut off. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change performance that matches the content of the current variation performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the variable production (winning opening lamp NR) corresponding to the pending icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production is changed to the lighting color (blue, red, etc.) with high expectation of winning the jackpot. Even if the power supply that was stopped during the memorization of the special figure judgment information that will cause the lamp to change to a rainbow) is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the winning slot will not restart without restarting the lamp change effect. The lamp NR is set in a notification mode (unlit or lit in white) that does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation where the player is confused, such as the lamp change performance being restarted even though the fluctuating performance has not been executed.

(Second embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a production lever device 23 is provided in addition to the production button 17 as an operation means that can be operated by the player.

First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment. Note that a description of the same parts as in the first embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 99, a production lever device 23 that functions as an input device is provided on the central bottom side of the upper plate 11 so as to face the production button device 16 on the front and back sides.
The production lever device 23 is provided on the center bottom side of the upper tray 11 so as to be on the opposite side of the production button device 16, and includes a production lever 24 that can be pulled toward the front by the player, and a production lever 24. A production lever detection switch (not shown) that detects an operation on the production lever 24 and a lever vibration motor (not shown) that vibrates the production lever 24 are provided. Predetermined information can be input to 1.

The effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11, so when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibrations cause the upper plate 11 to act as a transmission member. The signal is transmitted to the production lever 24 via. On the other hand, when the lever vibration motor that vibrates the production lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the production button 17 via the upper plate 11. In other words, when the player is manually operating one operation part, the other operation part vibrates (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut). When a vibration performance with/without the validity period of the operation part related to an in-performance, final performance, re-lottery performance, confirmed performance, etc. is executed, the vibration is transmitted to the player's hand via the other operation part. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, since the production button device 16 and production lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11 attached to the glass frame 4, when the button vibration motor that vibrates the production button 17 is driven, the vibration acts as a transmission member. It is also transmitted to the firing handle via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4, which perform the function. Further, when the lever vibration motor that vibrates the effect lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 17 via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4.

(Decision production pattern determination table)
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a fixed effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the fixed effect in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 100, the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each successive performance pattern, and selected performance pattern are associated with the final performance pattern determination table. For reference, the production structure (effective suggestion production, validity period, production content) of each fixed production pattern is described.

"Effective suggesting effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur. Specifically, it includes a semi-transparent effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a semi-transparent effect imitating the effect lever 24. This is an effect in which a transparent effect lever image is moved and displayed on the first image display device 70, and a translucent effect button image and a translucent effect lever image are gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the fixed performance ends when the performance button 17 or the performance lever 24 is operated once or when 5 seconds elapse.

The "operation target" in the valid period column indicates the type of the operation part (effect button 17, effect lever 24) whose operation is valid during the valid period. The operation becomes valid, and if it is the "production lever", the operation of the production lever 24 becomes valid.
"Promotional performance" is a performance that prompts the operation of the operation unit (performance button 17, performance lever 24) during the valid period, and specifically, it is a performance that prompts the operation of the operation part (performance button 17, performance lever 24), and specifically, it is a performance that prompts the operation of the operation part (performance button 17, performance lever 24), and specifically, it is a performance that encourages the operation of the operation part (performance button 17, production lever 24). As a result, an opaque effect button image or an opaque effect lever image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal Button White" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 also emits a rainbow light. It is shown that.

The "normal lever" indicates that a production lever image imitating the production lever 24 of a predetermined size is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque production lever image.
"Large lever rainbow" indicates that a production lever image imitating the production lever 24 larger than a predetermined size is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque production lever image.

“Operation unit status” in the valid period column indicates the status of the operation unit (production button 17, production lever 24) during the validity period, and “normal” means that the target operation unit is the production button 17. If there is, it is a normal state in which it is not protruding, and "protruding" indicates that if the target operation section is the production button 17, it is in a protruding state in which it is protruding. In addition, since the production lever 24 does not have a protruding state, it is only in a normal state.

"Failure" in the column of winning presentation mode refers to a failed presentation indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed because the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color. indicates that it will be executed.
"Success" means that the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position and emits rainbow-colored light, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that a jackpot game is executed. This indicates that a successful performance will be executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the button vibration column is determined by the vibrator to vibrate the performance button 17 and is determined by the start of a successful performance (= when the performance button 17 is operated or the valid period ends) This shows that a strong vibration performance (decision success vibration performance) is executed in which strong vibrations are performed for 4 seconds and then strong vibrations are performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the button light emission column is determined by the effect button LED for causing the effect button 17 to emit light and starts from the start of a successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This shows that rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the strong vibration of the production button 17). Note that even if the operation target is the effect lever 24, the effect button 17 emits a rainbow light.

The expected jackpot for each promotional effect is ``normal button white'' < ``protruding button red'' < ``normal lever'' < ``protruding button rainbow'' = ``large lever rainbow.'' Furthermore, the jackpot expectation level for each operation unit state is "normal" < "prominent".

The first feature of the deciding performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the performance (direction) is carried out. Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively notify that a jackpot game will be executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 100 is that the valid period occurs over the longest period of time that occurs during the variable performance. Therefore, inconveniences such as the player missing the operation of the performance button 17 can be suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 100 is that the performance button 17 or the performance lever 24 vibrates for the longest period as a strong vibration performance that occurs during a variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of successful performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 100 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24. Therefore, even after the vibration of the performance button 17 or the performance lever 24 ends, the player's sense of elation can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, all three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop (shaking motion) after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuating performance, but the left and right performance symbols 70a stop and the center performance stops. Only the symbol 70a may be temporarily stopped (swinging motion). At this time, all three performance symbols 70a may perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion), or the left and right performance symbols 70a may not perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion), and only the center performance symbol 70a may perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion). ).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the decoration part are made to fluctuate (production movement). Only one of them may be made to perform a fluctuating motion (acting motion).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the identification section consisting of a hexagonal base image and a numeric part (identification character) does not perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion). The texture (surface pattern, etc.) may be made to perform a fluctuation motion (presentation motion), or the identification portion may be caused to perform a fluctuation motion (presentation motion) by adding a light emitting effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a may be expanded/contracted. In this case, if the start command is received during a temporary stop, if the production pattern 70a is deviated from the stop position in the direction of shrinking (smaller than the normal size) or in the direction of expanding (smaller than the normal size). (large), it is recommended that it be displayed in the normal size at the stop position.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a does not swing and the decorative part and number part protrude from the base image. It may also be made to fluctuate as shown in FIG. In this case, if the start command is received during a temporary stop, if the decorative part or number part is out of the base image, it will fit within the base image and be displayed at the stop position. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), since the effect pattern 70a is composed of only a number part (identification character), the decoration part fluctuates when the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. Although the movement (performance movement) is not performed, the performance pattern 70a is composed of a number part (identification character) and a decoration part consisting of a pattern effect image, and the design effect image is displayed when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. It may also be made to perform a fluctuating motion (direction motion).

Further, in this embodiment, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 76 are not mentioned during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, but the frame illumination device 76 is not mentioned during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a. At least one of the plurality of light emitting units 10 may be set in the same manner as during the temporary stop before the extension (emission mode with lower brightness than during fluctuation, light emission mode with less change or movement than during fluctuation). , at least one of the plurality of light emitting parts constituting the board lighting device 76 is set in the same light emission mode as during temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower brightness than during fluctuation, light emission with less change or movement than during fluctuation) mode, lights out). In this case, when the next start command is received, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 76 change (switch) to a light emission mode corresponding to the fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production pattern 70a in the losing mode stops, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), but the special symbol TZ has the same number as the production pattern 70a. The actual stop may be performed in a manner of failure. In addition, when the production pattern 70a in the jackpot mode stops, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined jackpot mode ("333"), but the special symbol TZ stops in the jackpot mode with the same number as the production pattern 70a. It may be stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, the production control unit transmits the start commands (special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m while the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. When 130m is received, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ continues, but even if the variable display is started after being instantaneously derived and displayed as in the production symbol 70a. good. In this case, regarding the special symbol TZ, it is preferable to display the special symbol TZ that is shifted from the predetermined stopping position at the stopping position.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a start command or a customer waiting state designation command is received while the icon TI is displayed, the icon TI is erased with one frame of non-animation, but when the icon TI is stopped It only needs to be shorter than 10 frames required for erasing the icon TI based on reception of a command, 20 frames required for shift display of the pending icon HI, and 10 frames required for additional display of the pending icon. You may also do so.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a start command is received while displaying a number of pending icons greater than the number of reserved special drawings, the excess pending icons HI are erased with one frame of non-animation. However, the number of frames may be shorter than 10 frames required for erasing the icon TI based on reception of the stop command, 20 frames required for shift display of the pending icon HI, and 10 frames required for additional display of the pending icon, for example. The data may be erased after 5 frames of animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production control unit 130m receives a start command in which the number of reserved special symbols becomes a predetermined number, the production control unit 130m stores the number of reserved special symbols and the production control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m ( If there is an inconsistency due to a command abnormality (an abnormality where the number is the same, an abnormality where there is a deviation in the increasing direction) between the number of reserved special drawings that was known (understood), one more than the predetermined number. After displaying a large number of pending icons, a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed, but instead of displaying one more pending icon than the predetermined number, the predetermined number of pending icons are displayed as they are. You can also do this.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production control unit 130m receives a start command in which the number of reserved special symbols becomes a predetermined number, the production control unit 130m stores the number of reserved special symbols and the production control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m ( If there is an inconsistency due to a command abnormality (an abnormality where the number is the same, an abnormality where there is a deviation in the increasing direction) between the number of reserved special drawings that was known (understood), the reception of this starting command Although the icon is displayed during the variable performance executed in response to the start command, the icon may not be displayed during the variable performance executed in response to the reception of the start command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal icon is a white icon regardless of the type of performance mode, but the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon may be changed depending on the type of performance mode or gaming state. good. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of performance mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be changed depending on the type of performance mode or game state.

In addition, when changing the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon depending on the type of production mode or game state, the operation mode (performance movement mode) during the variable production should be made different depending on the form of the normal icon. Good too. Furthermore, even when changing the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon depending on the type of performance mode or game state, the operation mode (performance operation mode) during the variable performance can be changed depending on the form of the special icon. Good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, only the special icon was displayed as a result of the icon change effect, but special icons that suggest a change to a special icon (displayed in the process of changing to a special icon) and specific A specific icon indicating that a reach effect (for example, an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect) is to be executed may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to make the form and presentation operation of the special icon or specific icon different from the form and presentation operation of the normal icon or special icon.

In addition, in this embodiment, the hold icon is displayed when both the command for specifying the number of special drawings on hold and the pre-reading specifying command as commands at the time of winning are successfully received, but when the command for specifying the number of special drawings on hold is received. If the pre-reading designation command is not received successfully, a pending icon is displayed, while the pending icon is displayed if the pre-reading designation command is successfully received without receiving the special figure reservation number designation command. You may choose not to do so, or vice versa. In addition, when displaying a pending icon by receiving only one of the special figure pending number designation command and the prefetch designation command, the icon change effect for this pending icon may not be executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the performance mode cannot be changed by operating the performance button 17 by the player, but the performance mode may be changed by operating the performance button 17. In this case, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a based on the command abnormality in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, no operation for changing the production mode is accepted, that is, the production button 17 It is preferable to restrict changes in the production mode based on the operation.

Further, in this embodiment, the hold icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the hold icon is displayed as a button icon that prompts the operation of the effect button 17, and An operation change effect may be executed in which the button icon is changed to any one of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon in response to the effect button 17 being operated while the button icon is displayed. . In this case, in the operation change production, the production button 17 is changed at a predetermined rate from the first operation mode (non-vibration, non-protruding state in the standby position) to the second operation mode (vibration, protrusion state in the production position) You can do it like this. In this case, the rate at which the production button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change production is higher than the rate at which the production button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the dialogue preview production or final production. It is better to make the rate of change higher.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the effect button image executed in the effective suggestion effect is semi-transparent, but it may also be a effect button image that is not translucent but only an outline, or a effect button image that is only a silhouette. good.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a pre-reach preview performance (line preview performance, step-up preview performance) or a development performance is executed, a vibration performance of the performance button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) can be executed. However, a movable frame member may be provided in the glass frame 4, and an action performance that moves the frame movable member may be performed when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed in the pre-reach preview performance or development performance. Instead of the vibration effect, an action effect that moves the frame movable member may be performed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a vibrating effect of the effect button 17 when performing a post-reach preview effect (pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decisive effect, confirmed effect) or when the symbols are aligned. , a frame movable member may be provided in the glass frame 4, and when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the symbols are aligned, an action effect may be executed in which the frame movable member is operated, or instead of the vibration effect. It may also be possible to perform an action effect that moves the frame movable member.

In addition, in this embodiment, while the SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect is being executed, the title is not displayed to indicate that the reach effect is being performed. The title may be displayed using either red text, which has a higher jackpot expectation than white text, or rainbow text, which guarantees a jackpot, etc. After the title is displayed in white text, it changes to red text or rainbow text. You may also do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, the cut-in performance was performed at the end of the SP reach performance, but it is made to be performed in the middle (first period) or the end (second period) of the SP reach performance. Even if the production button 17 is more likely to be in the protruding state (the proportion of the protruding state is higher) when the cut-in production is performed at the end of the SP reach production than when the cut-in production is performed in the middle. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, a valid period is generated in which the performance button 17 is held down for a long time in the development performance, but a validity period is generated in which the performance button 17 is held pressed as a jackpot preview performance other than the development performance. At the same time, it may be possible to execute an operation progress effect that progresses the effect according to the long press period during the valid period. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the long press continues at a plurality of determination timings during the validity period, and determine to which stage the performance should be advanced based on the determination result.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the reach-inciting effect that incites whether or not it becomes a reach-to-reach effect using the movement of the movable members (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) and/or the effect pattern 70 that temporarily stops second Although it was supposed to not be executed, it is also possible to execute a reach promotion effect. In this case, in the normal gaming state, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed, the reach stimulation performance can be executed, while the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed. display) is executed, the reach-stimulating effect may not be executed or may be made more difficult to execute (the rate of execution is lower) than the first variable effect, or the second variable effect may be executed in a specific game state. (Variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the reach promotion effect can be executed, while when the first variation production (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the reach promotion effect is enabled. The effect may not be executed or may be made less likely to be executed (the rate of execution is lower) than the second variable effect.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment)
Conventional gaming machines determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on determination information obtained based on the establishment of starting conditions, and execute variable effects according to the result of the determination. is common. In such a gaming machine, the interest of the game is increased by performing various performances in the variable performance (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-033816). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem that there is room for improvement in the variable performance and the game is not very interesting.

◆The first invention for solving the above problems is a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting hole) ), and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the above, and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the second starting condition (a game ball enters the second starting hole). a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute; a normal gaming state; and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the state, a first variation effect is executed according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and a second variation effect is executed according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. performance control means (performance control board 130), the performance control means executes the first variable performance and the second variable performance in any of a plurality of variable performance patterns, and executes the first variable performance and the second variable performance in any of a plurality of variable performance patterns, The variable performance pattern is executed more when the second variable effect is executed which results in a loss during the specific gaming state than when the first variable effect which results in a loss is executed during the specific gaming state. There are many types of. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The second invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting hole). ), and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the above, and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the second starting condition (a game ball enters the second starting hole). a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute; a normal gaming state; and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the state, a first variation effect is executed according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and a second variation effect is executed according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. performance control means (performance control board 130), the performance control means executes the first variable performance and the second variable performance in any of a plurality of variable performance patterns, and executes the first variable performance and the second variable performance in any of a plurality of variable performance patterns, When the first variable effect that results in a loss is executed during the specific gaming state than when the first variable effect that results in a loss is executed in the same variable effect pattern, it is better to The first variation effect is easier to execute. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The third invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, and includes operating means (performance button 17, cross key 19) that can be operated by the player. a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole); and a second starting condition. a second determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (the game ball enters the second starting port); A state control means (main control board 110) that controls the game to a specific game state (variable probability game state, time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and executes a first variable effect according to the determination result of the first determination means. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a second variable performance according to the determination result of the second determination means, and the performance control means executes the variation according to the operation of the operation means. The performance element (performance mode, BGM, volume, light amount, etc.) used in the performance can be changed to any of a plurality of performance elements, and during the execution of the first variation performance in the specific game state, the second variation performance can be changed. The performance elements used in the performance can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The fourth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, and includes operation means (performance button 17, cross key 19) that can be operated by the player. a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole); and a second starting condition. a second determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (the game ball enters the second starting port); A state control means (main control board 110) that controls the game to a specific game state (variable probability game state, time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and executes a first variable effect according to the determination result of the first determination means. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a second variable performance according to the determination result of the second determination means, and the performance control means executes the variation according to the operation of the operation means. A performance element (performance mode, BGM, volume, light amount, etc.) used in the performance can be changed to any of a plurality of performance elements, and during execution of the second variation performance in the specific game state, the first variation The performance elements used in the performance can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A fifth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, in which the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting hole). ), and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the above, and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the second starting condition (a game ball enters the second starting hole). a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute; a normal gaming state; and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state, and a first variable effect accompanied by a variable display of effect symbols according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols; ), and then the effect symbols can be displayed in a variable manner, and the first variable effect is executed during the normal gaming state, and the first variable effect is executed during the specific gaming state. The rate at which the predetermined effect is executed differs depending on the case where the predetermined effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The sixth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting hole). ), and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the above, and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the second starting condition (a game ball enters the second starting hole). a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute; a normal gaming state; and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state, and a first variable effect accompanied by a variable display of effect symbols according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols; ), and then the effect symbols can be displayed in a variable manner, and the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state, and the second variable effect is executed during the specific game state. The rate at which the predetermined effect is executed differs depending on the case where the predetermined effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A seventh invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, and includes operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player. a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole); and a second starting condition. a second determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (the game ball enters the second starting port); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling specific game states (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that are advantageous to the player; performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a first variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols according to a determination result of the second determination means (performance control board 130); The control means generates a valid period during execution of the first variable performance or the second variable performance, and also generates an operation performance (line preview performance) that performs a predetermined performance in response to the operation of the operating means during the valid period. , pseudo-continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance, etc.) can be executed during the specific gaming state, rather than when the first variable performance that results in a loss is executed during the normal gaming state. The operation performance is more difficult to execute when the first variable performance is executed which results in a loss. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The 8-1 invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player. 24), a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole); a second determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a starting condition (the winning of a game ball in a second starting port), a normal game state, and the normal game; A state control means (main control board 110) that controls a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the state, and a variation of the production symbols according to the determination result of the first determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variable performance accompanied by a display, and executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means, The performance control means generates a valid period during execution of the first variable performance, and generates an operation performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance) that performs a predetermined performance in response to the operation of the operating means during the valid period. , development performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance, etc.), and the first variation performance includes a specific performance in which a second performance (post-reach performance) is executed after the first performance (pre-reach performance). Including a variable performance (reach variable performance), the specific variable performance that results in a special result is executed during the specific gaming state rather than when the specific variable performance that results in a special result is executed during the normal gaming state. In this case, it is more difficult for the operation performance to be executed during the first performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, the 8-2 invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, with operating means (performance button 17, performance button 17, etc.) that can be operated by the player. lever 24), a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting port); 2. A second determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting hole), a normal game state, and the normal gaming state. A state control means (main control board 110) that controls a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the game state; Performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variable performance accompanied by a variable display and executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means. , the performance control means generates a valid period during the execution of the first variable performance, and generates an operation performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo-sequential performance) that performs a predetermined performance in response to the operation of the operating means during the valid period. performance, development performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance, etc.), and the first variable performance that results in a special result (jackpot result) is executed during the normal gaming state. When the first variable performance that results in a special result is executed during the game, the number of executions of the operation performance is more likely to decrease. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The ninth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting hole). ), and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the above, and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the second starting condition (a game ball enters the second starting hole). a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute; a normal gaming state; and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state, and a first variable effect accompanied by a variable display of effect symbols according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols; It is possible to generate a valid period and perform a predetermined performance according to the operation of the operating means during the valid period (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a final performance, etc.). The case where the second variable effect resulting in a loss result is executed during the specific gaming state is better than the case where the first variable effect resulting in a loss result is performed during the specific gaming state, The operation performance is easier to execute. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The 10-1 invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player. 24), a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole); a second determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a starting condition (the winning of a game ball in a second starting port), a normal game state, and the normal game; A state control means (main control board 110) that controls a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the state, and a variation of the production symbols according to the determination result of the first determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variable performance accompanied by a display, and executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means, The performance control means generates a valid period during execution of the first variable performance or the second variable performance, and generates an operation performance (speech) that performs a predetermined performance in response to an operation of the operating means during the valid period. A preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a decisive performance, etc.) can be executed, and the first variation performance includes a second performance (post-reach performance) after the first performance (pre-reach performance). ) is executed, and the second variable performance includes a first specific variation performance (reach variation performance) in which a second performance (post-reach performance) is performed after the first performance (pre-reach performance). 2. The second specific variable performance that results in a special result during the specific gaming state is better than the first specific variable performance that includes a two specific variable performance (reach variable performance) that results in a special result during the specific gaming state. When a variable performance is executed, the operation performance is more easily executed during the first performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, the 10-2 invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, with operation means (performance button 17, performance button 17, etc.) that can be operated by the player. lever 24), a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting port); 2. A second determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting hole), a normal game state, and the normal gaming state. A state control means (main control board 110) that controls a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the game state; Performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variable performance accompanied by a variable display and executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means. , the performance control means generates a valid period during execution of the first variable performance or the second variable performance, and performs a predetermined performance in response to the operation of the operating means during the valid period ( (Speech preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance, etc.) can be executed, and the specified When the second variable performance that results in a special result is executed during the gaming state, the number of executions of the operation performance is likely to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆An eleventh invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, and includes operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player. a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole); and a second starting condition. a second determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (the game ball enters the second starting port); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling specific game states (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that are advantageous to the player; performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a first variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols according to a determination result of the second determination means (performance control board 130); The control means is configured to perform a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the first variation performance or the second variation performance (during a pre-reading vibration performance, during a dialogue preview performance, during a step-up preview performance, during a pseudo continuous performance, and during a development). vibrating effects such as during presentations, cut-in presentations, etc.), and it is possible to execute vibrating presentations that result in a losing result during the specific gaming state, rather than when the first variable presentation that results in a losing result is performed during the normal gaming state. When the first variation effect is executed, the vibration effect is more difficult to execute. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The 12-1 invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, which includes operation means (performance button 17, performance lever) that can be operated by the player. 24), a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole); a second determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a starting condition (the winning of a game ball in a second starting port), a normal game state, and the normal game; A state control means (main control board 110) that controls a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the state, and a variation of the production symbols according to the determination result of the first determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variable performance accompanied by a display, and executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means, The performance control means is configured to produce a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the first variable performance or the second variable performance (during a pre-reading vibration performance, during a dialogue preview performance, during a step-up preview performance, during a pseudo continuous performance). etc.), and the first variation performance includes a first specific variation performance (reach variation performance) in which a second performance (post-reach performance) is executed after the first performance (pre-reach performance). performance), and when the first specific fluctuation performance that results in a special result is executed during the specific gaming state, rather than when the first specific fluctuation performance that results in a special result is executed during the normal gaming state. In this case, it is more difficult for the vibration effect to be executed during the first effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, the 12-2 invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player. lever 24), a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting port); 2. A second determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting hole), a normal game state, and the normal gaming state. A state control means (main control board 110) that controls a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the game state; Performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variable performance accompanied by a variable display and executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means. , the performance control means may perform a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the first variable performance or the second variable performance (during a pre-reading vibration performance, during a dialogue preview performance, during a step-up preview performance, during a pseudo continuous performance). vibration effects such as time, etc.), and the first variable effect that results in a special result during the specific gaming state is more effective than when the first variable effect results in a special result during the normal gaming state. When this is executed, the number of times the vibration effect is executed is more likely to be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A thirteenth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, and includes operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player. a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole); and a second starting condition. a second determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (the game ball enters the second starting port); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling specific game states (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that are advantageous to the player; performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a first variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols according to a determination result of the second determination means (performance control board 130); The control means is configured to perform a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the first variation performance or the second variation performance (during a pre-reading vibration performance, during a dialogue preview performance, during a step-up preview performance, during a pseudo continuous performance, and during a development). Vibration effects such as during production, cut-in production, etc.) can be executed, and it is possible to execute vibration effects such as vibration effects such as during production, cut-in production, etc., and it is possible to execute vibration effects that result in a loss during the specific game state, rather than when the first variable effect that results in a loss during the specific game state is executed. When the second variation effect is executed, the vibration effect is more easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The 14-1 invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player. 24), a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole); a second determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a starting condition (the winning of a game ball in a second starting port), a normal game state, and the normal game; A state control means (main control board 110) that controls a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the state, and a variation of the production symbols according to the determination result of the first determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variable performance accompanied by a display, and executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means, The performance control means is configured to produce a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the first variable performance or the second variable performance (during a pre-reading vibration performance, during a dialogue preview performance, during an SU preview performance, during a pseudo continuous performance, etc.). The first variation performance includes a first specific variation performance (reach variation performance) in which a second performance (post-reach performance) is executed after the first performance (pre-reach performance). ), and the second variable performance includes a second specific variable performance (reach variation performance) in which a second performance (post-reach performance) is executed after the first performance (pre-reach performance), The first specific variation effect is better when the second specific variation effect is executed as a special result during the specific gaming state than when the first specific variation effect is executed as a special result during the gaming state. The vibration performance is easily executed during the performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, the 14-2 invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, with operation means (performance button 17, performance button 17, etc.) that can be operated by the player. lever 24), a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting port); 2. A second determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting hole), a normal game state, and the normal gaming state. A state control means (main control board 110) that controls a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the game state; Performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variable performance accompanied by a variable display and executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means. , the performance control means is configured to produce a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the first variable performance or the second variable performance (during a pre-reading vibration performance, during a dialogue preview performance, during an SU preview performance, during a pseudo-continuous performance). etc.), and the second variable effect that results in a special result during the specific gaming state is more effective than the first variable effect that results in a special result during the specific gaming state. When the vibration effect is executed, the number of times the vibration effect is executed is more likely to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The fifteenth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting hole) ), and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the above, and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the second starting condition (a game ball enters the second starting hole). a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute; a normal gaming state; and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state, and a first variable effect accompanied by a variable display of effect symbols according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols, and the performance control means executes a special game performance (jackpot game performance) during execution of the special game The first variable effect in the specific gaming state and the second variable effect in the specific gaming state are different in terms of the presence or absence of a reach effect, the presence or absence of the icon, the type of background image, BGM However, the special game performance after the first variable performance in the specific gaming state and the special game performance after the second variable performance in the specific gaming state are common. It is possible to perform the performance in various ways. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The 16th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, when the first starting condition is satisfied (the game ball enters the first starting hole) ), and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the above, and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the second starting condition (a game ball enters the second starting hole). a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute; a normal gaming state; and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state, and a first variable effect accompanied by a variable display of effect symbols according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols; controllable, and the change in the effect mode is more effective when the first variable effect is executed during the specific gaming state than when the first variable effect is executed during the normal gaming state. It is becoming more difficult to occur. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The seventeenth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting hole) ), and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the above, and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the second starting condition (a game ball enters the second starting hole). a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute; a normal gaming state; and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state, and a first variable effect accompanied by a variable display of effect symbols according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols; controllable, and the change in the effect mode is more effective when the second variable effect is executed during the specific gaming state than when the first variable effect is executed during the specific gaming state. It is becoming more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆An 18th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, when a first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting hole). ), and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the above, and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the second starting condition (a game ball enters the second starting hole). a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute; a normal gaming state; and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state, and a first variable effect accompanied by a variable display of effect symbols according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols; A case where it is possible to perform a stop-suggesting performance (such as an eye-catching performance, a light-emitting effect performance, etc.) that suggests that the performance symbols are stopped and displayed, and the first variable performance that results in a special result is executed during the normal gaming state. It is more difficult for the stop suggestion performance to be executed when the first variable performance that results in a special result is executed during the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The 19th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, when the first starting condition is satisfied (the game ball enters the first starting hole) ), and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the above, and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the second starting condition (a game ball enters the second starting hole). a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute; a normal gaming state; and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state, and a first variable effect accompanied by a variable display of effect symbols according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols; A case where it is possible to perform a stop-suggestion performance (eye-catching performance, light-emitting effect performance, etc.) that suggests that the performance symbols are stopped and displayed, and the first variable performance that results in a special result is executed during the specific gaming state. The stop suggestion performance is more likely to be executed when the second variable performance that results in a special result is executed during the specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The 20-1 invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, when the first starting condition is satisfied (the game ball enters the first starting hole). a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the winning of the game ball); A second determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute a special game, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. ), a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state, a first fluctuation performance according to the determination result of the first determination means, and a second fluctuation performance according to the determination result of the second determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance control means (performance control board 130), and the performance control means executes a plurality of types of preview performance ( (a dialogue preview performance, a step-up preview performance, a pseudo-continuation performance, a development performance, a roulette preview performance, a cut-in performance, etc.) can be executed, and compared to the case where the first variable performance is executed during the specific game state, When the first variable performance is executed during the normal gaming state, the number of types of the preview performance to be executed is greater. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Furthermore, the 20-2 invention for solving the above problem provides a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, in which a first starting condition is met (a game is entered into a first starting opening). a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the winning of the ball), and a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of the game ball in the second starting opening). A second determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the state), a first variation effect according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and a second variation effect according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance, and the performance control means is configured to perform a plurality of types of preview performances that indicate the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed during the execution of the first variable performance. (Speech preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, roulette preview performance, cut-in performance, etc.) can be executed, and the performance is better than when the first variable performance is executed during the specific game state. In the case where the second variable performance is executed during the specific game state, the number of types of the preview performance to be executed is greater. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The 21-1 invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, when the first starting condition is satisfied (the game ball enters the first starting hole). a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the winning of the game ball); A second determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute a special game, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. ), a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state, a first fluctuation performance according to the determination result of the first determination means, and a second fluctuation performance according to the determination result of the second determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a preview performance (pre-reach preview) that indicates the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed during the execution of the first variable performance. The above-mentioned notice performances include a first notice performance (pre-reach notice performance, etc.) and a second notice performance (post-reach notice performance, etc.), and the specific game When the first variable effect is executed during the normal gaming state, the number of executions of the first preview effect is more likely to increase than when the first variable effect is executed during the normal gaming state. There is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, the 21-2 invention for solving the above problem provides a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, in which a first starting condition is satisfied (a game is entered into a first starting opening). a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the winning of the ball), and a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of the game ball in the second starting opening). A second determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. a state control means (main control board 110) that controls the state), a first variation effect according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and a second variation effect according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance, the performance control means indicating the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed during execution of the first variable performance or the second variable performance. It is possible to execute a preview performance (pre-reach preview performance, post-reach preview performance, etc.), and the preview performance includes a first preview performance (pre-reach preview performance) and a second preview performance (post-reach preview performance, etc.). The execution of the first preview effect is better when the second variable effect is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable effect is executed during the specific game state. It is becoming easier and more frequent. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A twenty-second invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, which includes movable members (first movable member 73, first movable member 73, 2 movable member 74, etc.) and a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting port). a second determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port); and a normal gaming state. , a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variation performance and executes a second variation performance according to the determination result of the second determination means, the performance control means is configured to control the first variation performance. It is possible to perform a specific performance involving the movement of the movable member during the execution of the performance (a look-ahead motion performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, etc.), and from a case where the first variable performance is executed during the specific game state. Also, when the first variable performance is executed during the normal gaming state, the specific performance is easier to execute. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The twenty-third invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to players, and includes movable members (first movable member 73, first 2 movable member 74, etc.) and a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting port). a second determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port); and a normal gaming state. , a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variation performance and executes a second variation performance according to the determination result of the second determination means, the performance control means is configured to control the first variation performance. During execution of the performance or the second variable performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance that involves the movement of the movable member (a look-ahead motion performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, etc.), and the first variable performance is performed during the specific game state. When the second variable performance is executed during the specific game state, the specific performance is more easily executed than when the second variable performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The twenty-fourth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, in which a game medium is placed in a first starting area (first starting opening) to win a prize. a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the winning of the game medium in a second starting area (second starting port); a second determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not the game is played; and a state that controls the normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a control means (main control board 110); and a performance control means that executes a first variable performance according to the determination result of the first determination means and executes a second fluctuation performance according to the determination result of the second determination means. (effect control board 130), and the effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined sound (first to fourth occurrence notification sounds, etc.) from the sound output section based on winning of the game medium in the first starting area. The predetermined sound is louder when a game medium wins in the first starting area during the normal gaming state than when the gaming medium wins in the first starting area during the specific gaming state. It is easier to output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The twenty-fifth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, in which a game medium is placed in a first starting area (first starting opening) to win a prize. a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the winning of the game medium in a second starting area (second starting port); a second determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not the game is played; and a state that controls the normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a control means (main control board 110); and a performance control means that executes a first variable performance according to the determination result of the first determination means and executes a second fluctuation performance according to the determination result of the second determination means. (effect control board 130), and the effect control means is configured to generate a predetermined sound (first to fourth generation notification) from the sound output section based on winning of the game medium in the first start area or the second start area. (sound, etc.), and the case where the game medium wins in the second starting area during the specific gaming state is better than the case where the gaming medium wins in the first starting area during the specific gaming state. However, the predetermined sound is more likely to be output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The twenty-sixth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, and includes operating means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player. a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole); and a second starting condition. a second determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (the game ball enters the second starting port); A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling specific gaming states (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that are advantageous to the player, and variation of a plurality of performance symbols according to the determination result of the first determining means performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variable performance accompanied by a display, and executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means; The performance control means is configured to perform a specific performance (a pre-read chance pattern) that temporarily stops the plurality of performance symbols at a specific combination (a chance roll, the same color, a roll including a pseudo pattern, etc.) during execution of the first variable performance. performance, pseudo-continuous performance), and the case where the first variable performance is executed during the normal gaming state is better than the case where the first variable performance is executed during the specific gaming state. , the specific effect is easier to execute. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The twenty-seventh invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, and includes operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player. a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole); and a second starting condition. a second determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (the game ball enters the second starting port); A state control means (main control board 110) for controlling specific gaming states (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that are advantageous to the player, and variation of a plurality of performance symbols according to the determination result of the first determining means performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variable performance accompanied by a display, and executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols according to the determination result of the second determination means; In preparation, the performance control means temporarily stops the plurality of performance symbols at a specific combination (a chance roll, the same color, a roll including a pseudo symbol, etc.) during execution of the first variable performance or the second variable performance. It is possible to execute a specific performance (a look-ahead chance performance, a pseudo continuous performance), and the second variable performance is executed during the specific gaming state rather than when the first variable performance is executed during the specific gaming state. The specific effect is easier to execute when Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The twenty-eighth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, in which a first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting hole). ), and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the above, and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the second starting condition (a game ball enters the second starting hole). a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute; a normal gaming state; and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state, and a first variable effect accompanied by a variable display of effect symbols according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols; It is possible to execute a specific performance (prefetch effect performance, pseudo-continuous performance, etc.) that displays a predetermined image (effect image) in the normal game state, and the first variable performance is executed during the specific game state. It is easier to execute the specific effect when the first variable effect is executed during the state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The 29th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, when the first starting condition is satisfied (the game ball enters the first starting hole) ), and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the above, and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the second starting condition (a game ball enters the second starting hole). a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute; a normal gaming state; and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state, and a first variable effect accompanied by a variable display of effect symbols according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols; When it is possible to perform a specific performance (prefetch effect performance, pseudo continuous performance, etc.) that displays a predetermined image (effect image) in correspondence with the performance symbol, and the first variable performance is executed during the specific game state. It is easier to execute the specific performance when the second variable performance is executed during the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The 30th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, in which movable members (first movable member 73, first movable member 73, 2 movable member 74, etc.) and a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting port). a second determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port); and a normal gaming state. , a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variation performance and executes a second variation performance according to the determination result of the second determination means, the performance control means is configured to control the first variation performance. During execution of the performance, a motion performance of the movable member (a look-ahead motion performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance deciding performance, etc.) can be executed, and the first variable performance that results in a loss is executed during the normal gaming state. The action performance is more difficult to execute when the first variable performance that results in a loss is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable performance results in a loss. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The 31st-1st invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, in which a movable member (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, etc.) and a first determination means (main control board 110), a second determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting hole), and a normal game. and a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state to a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the determination result of the first determining means. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variable performance according to the determination result of the second determination means (performance control board 130); It is possible to perform a movement performance of the movable member (a look-ahead motion performance, a pseudo continuous performance, etc.) during execution of the first variation performance, and the first variation performance includes a second performance after the first performance (pre-reach performance). Including a specific fluctuation performance (reach fluctuation performance) in which a performance (post-reach performance) is executed, the special fluctuation performance during the specific gaming state is more effective than when the specific fluctuation performance that results in a special result is executed during the normal gaming state. In the case where the resulting specific variation effect is executed, it is more difficult for the action effect to be executed during the first effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, the 31-2 invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, in which a movable member (a first movable member) that can operate in a predetermined manner is provided. 73, second movable member 74, etc.) and a first determination means (main control board 110), a second determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port), and a normal A state control means (main control board 110) that controls the gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the determination result of the first determining means. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variable performance according to the determination result of the second determination means (performance control board 130); During the execution of the first variable effect, a movement effect of the movable member (a look-ahead movement effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a development effect, etc.) can be executed, and the first variable effect resulting in a special result is executed during the normal gaming state. The number of executions of the motion performance is more likely to be reduced when the first variable performance resulting in a special result is executed during the specific game state, rather than when the first variable performance is performed as a special result. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A thirty-second invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, which includes movable members (first movable member 73, first movable member 73, 2 movable member 74, etc.) and a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting port). a second determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port); and a normal gaming state. , a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variation performance and executes a second variation performance according to the determination result of the second determination means, the performance control means is configured to control the first variation performance. It is possible to perform a motion performance of the movable member (a look-ahead motion performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a decisive performance, etc.) during the execution of the performance or the second variable performance, and the above-mentioned motion performance that results in a loss during the specific game state. The motion performance is more easily executed when the second variable performance that results in a loss is performed during the specific game state than when the first variable performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The 33rd invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, which includes a movable member (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner. , second movable member 74, etc.) and a first determination means (main control board 110), a second determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting hole), and a normal game. and a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state to a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the determination result of the first determining means. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variable performance according to the determination result of the second determination means (performance control board 130); During the execution of the first variation production or the second variation production, it is possible to execute a motion production of the movable member (a look-ahead motion production, a pseudo continuous production, a development production, a decisive production, etc.), and the first variation production includes a first variation production. The second variation performance includes a first specific variation performance (reach variation performance) in which a second performance (post-reach performance) is executed after the first performance (pre-reach performance), and the second variation performance includes a first performance (pre-reach performance). ) when the first specific variable effect that results in a special result is executed during the specific gaming state, including a second specific variable effect (reach variable effect) in which a second effect (post-reach effect) is executed after In the case where the second specific variable performance that results in a special result is executed during the specific game state, the action performance is more likely to be executed during the first performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
A 33-2 invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing special games (jackpot games) advantageous to players, in which movable members (first movable member 73, second movable member 74 etc.) and a first determination means (main control board 110 ), a second determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second starting condition (a game ball enters the second starting port), and a normal game state. and a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and according to the determination result of the first determining means. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variable performance according to the determination result of the second determination means (performance control board 130); During the execution of the variable performance or the second variable performance, a motion performance of the movable member (a look-ahead motion performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a decisive performance, etc.) can be executed, and a special result is obtained during the specific game state. The number of executions of the motion performance is more likely to increase when the second variable performance that results in a special result is executed during the specific game state than when the first variable performance is executed. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A thirty-fourth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, and includes operating means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player. a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole); and a second starting condition. a second determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (the game ball enters the second starting port); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling specific game states (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that are advantageous to the player; performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a first variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols according to a determination result of the second determination means (performance control board 130); The control means generates a valid period during the execution of the first variable performance, and generates an operation performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development) that performs a predetermined performance in response to the operation of the operating means during the validity period. production, cut-in production, decisive production, etc.), and the first variation production includes a specific variation production in which a second production (post-reach production) is executed after the first production (pre-reach production). (reach variation effect), and when the specific variation effect is executed during the specific game state, the operation effect is easier to execute during the second effect than during the first effect. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A thirty-fifth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, and includes operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player. a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole); and a second starting condition. a second determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of (the game ball enters the second starting port); a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling specific game states (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) that are advantageous to the player; performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a first variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols according to a determination result of the second determination means (performance control board 130); The control means vibrates the operating means during execution of the first variable performance (at the time of a pre-reading vibration performance, at the time of a line preview performance, at the time of a step-up preview performance, at the time of a pseudo continuous performance, at the time of a development performance, and a cut-in performance). The first variation performance includes a specific variation performance (reach variation performance) in which a second performance (post-reach performance) is executed after the first performance (pre-reach performance). ), and when the specific variation performance is executed during the specific game state, the vibration performance is easier to execute during the second performance than during the first performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A thirty-sixth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, which includes movable members (first movable member 73, first movable member 73, 2 movable member 74, etc.) and a first determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first starting port). a second determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port); and a normal gaming state. , a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a first variation performance and executes a second variation performance according to the determination result of the second determination means, the performance control means is configured to control the first variation performance. During execution of the performance, it is possible to execute the motion performance of the movable member (pre-reading motion performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, decisive performance, etc.), and the first variation performance includes a first performance (pre-reach performance). Also includes a specific variation performance (reach variation performance) in which a second performance (post-reach performance) is executed later, and when the specific variation performance is executed during the specific game state, the second performance (post-reach performance) is executed more than during the first performance. The action performance is easier to execute during the second performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The thirty-seventh invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, in which the first starting condition is met (the game ball enters the first starting hole). ), and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the above, and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the second starting condition (a game ball enters the second starting hole). a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute; a normal gaming state; and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state, and a first variable effect accompanied by a variable display of effect symbols according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols, the performance control means displaying a plurality of options during execution of the first variable performance. At the same time, it is possible to perform a selection performance (roulette performance) in which an option is selected according to the performance to be executed subsequently, and it is possible to execute a selection performance (roulette performance) that selects an option according to the performance to be executed afterwards, and is more advantageous than when the first variable performance that results in a loss is executed during the normal gaming state. When the first variable performance that results in a loss is executed during the specific game state, the selection performance is more difficult to execute. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The thirty-eighth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, in which a first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting hole). ), and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the above, and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the second starting condition (a game ball enters the second starting hole). a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute; a normal gaming state; and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state, and a first variable effect accompanied by a variable display of effect symbols according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols, the performance control means displaying a plurality of options during execution of the first variable performance. At the same time, it is possible to perform a selection performance (roulette performance) that selects an option according to the performance to be executed subsequently, and compared to the case where the first variable performance resulting in a special result is executed during the normal gaming state, When the first variable performance that results in a special result is executed during the specific gaming state, the selection performance is more difficult to execute. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The thirty-ninth invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, in which a first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting hole). ), and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the above, and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the second starting condition (a game ball enters the second starting hole). a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute; a normal gaming state; and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state, and a first variable effect accompanied by a variable display of effect symbols according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols; It is possible to execute an update effect (timer effect, count-up effect, etc.) that updates predetermined information (numerical value, quantity), and from the case where the first variable effect that results in a loss is executed during the normal gaming state. Also, when the first variable performance that results in a loss is executed during the specific gaming state, it is more difficult for the update performance to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The 40th invention for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, in which a first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting hole). ), and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the above, and a first determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the second starting condition (a game ball enters the second starting hole). a second determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute; a normal gaming state; and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state, and a first variable effect accompanied by a variable display of effect symbols according to the judgment result of the first judgment means, and according to the judgment result of the second judgment means. performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a second variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols; It is possible to execute an update effect (timer effect, count-up effect, etc.) that updates predetermined information (numerical value, quantity), and from the case where the first variable effect resulting in a special result is executed during the normal gaming state. Also, when the first variable performance that results in a special result is executed during the specific gaming state, it is more difficult for the update performance to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used in a jankyu game machine or an arranged ball game machine.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to a low probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game when the type of jackpot special symbol is a normal symbol, and when the type of jackpot special symbol is a specific symbol. Although the game machine is configured to shift to a high-probability game state that continues until the next jackpot game after the end of a jackpot game, the game machine may shift to a high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all jackpot games.

In addition, after all the jackpot games are finished, the game is moved to a high probability game state, and if the player wins the falling lottery that is executed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation display in the high probability game state, the high probability game state is ended and the normal It is also possible to use a gaming machine that returns to a gaming state.

Furthermore, when a game ball passes through a specific area in a specific round game of a jackpot game, the gaming machine may be configured to shift to a high probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game ends.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. However, a gaming machine may be used in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel).

Further, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative in all respects and should be considered not to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that equivalent meanings to the claims and all changes within the scope be included.

1 Game machine 5 Game board 44 General figure gate 45 First starting port 47 Second starting port 50 Big prize opening 70 First image display device 71 Second image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Production control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can execute special games advantageous to players,
a movable member operable in a predetermined manner;
An operation means that can be operated by a player;
a first determining means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a first starting condition;
a second determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the establishment of a second starting condition;
a state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state;
performance control means that executes a first variable performance according to the determination result of the first determination means, and performs a second fluctuation performance according to the determination result of the second determination means,
The performance control means is
During execution of the first variable performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance that involves the movement of the movable member, a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means, and a reach performance that makes you expect the execution of the special game,
During the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to execute a win/lose effect indicating whether or not the special game will be executed;
The vibration production includes
a first vibration performance executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation validity period;
a second vibration performance executed without the operation validity period;
The specific performance is more easily executed when the first variable performance is executed during the normal gaming state than when the first variable performance is performed during the specific gaming state,
The operation validity period related to the first vibration production is
It is possible for this to occur when the winning/losing effect is executed,
The first vibration performance is
Executed when notifying that the special game will be executed with the movement of the movable member in the win/loss effect,
The second vibration performance is
There is a possibility that the special game may be executed without movement of the movable member, depending on the result of a preliminary determination that determines whether or not the special game is to be executed before the first determination means. is executed when suggesting
A vibration period in the first vibration performance accompanying the win/loss performance that is executed at a later timing than the second vibration performance than a vibration period in the second vibration performance that is performed at a timing before the win/ loss performance. A game machine characterized in that the game machine can be executed so that the time period is longer than the time period.

Images